[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025225376A1 - Photocurable composition, pixel production method, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator - Google Patents

Photocurable composition, pixel production method, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator

Info

Publication number
WO2025225376A1
WO2025225376A1 PCT/JP2025/014108 JP2025014108W WO2025225376A1 WO 2025225376 A1 WO2025225376 A1 WO 2025225376A1 JP 2025014108 W JP2025014108 W JP 2025014108W WO 2025225376 A1 WO2025225376 A1 WO 2025225376A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
formula
alkyl group
photocurable composition
resin
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2025/014108
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
雅臣 牧野
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujifilm Corp
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Publication of WO2025225376A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025225376A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C251/00Compounds containing nitrogen atoms doubly-bound to a carbon skeleton
    • C07C251/32Oximes
    • C07C251/62Oximes having oxygen atoms of oxyimino groups esterified
    • C07C251/64Oximes having oxygen atoms of oxyimino groups esterified by carboxylic acids
    • C07C251/66Oximes having oxygen atoms of oxyimino groups esterified by carboxylic acids with the esterifying carboxyl groups bound to hydrogen atoms, to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C323/00Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups
    • C07C323/23Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C323/46Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, bound to the same carbon skeleton having at least one of the nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, further bound to other hetero atoms
    • C07C323/47Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, bound to the same carbon skeleton having at least one of the nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups, further bound to other hetero atoms to oxygen atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/04Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
    • C07D209/10Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C07D209/12Radicals substituted by oxygen atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D307/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D307/77Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D307/91Dibenzofurans; Hydrogenated dibenzofurans
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D333/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D333/50Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D333/76Dibenzothiophenes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/10Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing aromatic rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/44Polymerisation in the presence of compounding ingredients, e.g. plasticisers, dyestuffs, fillers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F290/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups
    • C08F290/08Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups on to polymers modified by introduction of unsaturated side groups
    • C08F290/12Polymers provided for in subclasses C08C or C08F
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F290/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups
    • C08F290/08Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups on to polymers modified by introduction of unsaturated side groups
    • C08F290/14Polymers provided for in subclass C08G
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/028Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with photosensitivity-increasing substances, e.g. photoinitiators
    • G03F7/031Organic compounds not covered by group G03F7/029

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a photocurable composition containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
  • the present invention also relates to a pixel manufacturing method, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the photocurable composition.
  • the present invention also relates to a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Photocurable compositions containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound can be polymerized and cured by exposure to light, and are therefore used in optical filters, photocurable inks, photosensitive printing plates, various photoresists, and more.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses that pixels are formed by forming a pattern using a photolithography method using a photopolymerization initiator containing an oxime compound and a photosensitive coloring composition containing a polymerizable compound.
  • lowering the exposure illuminance can improve the contrast between exposed and unexposed areas, but lowering the exposure illuminance also tends to reduce sensitivity and result in insufficient curing of the film in the exposed areas.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a photocurable composition that has little exposure illuminance dependency and is capable of forming pixels with excellent sensitivity and adhesion even when exposed to low illuminance.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a pixel manufacturing method, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the present invention provides the following:
  • a photocurable composition containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound is a photocurable composition containing a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B);
  • X 1a represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
  • Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —,
  • R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group,
  • R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and
  • R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
  • Ar 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
  • R 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • X11 and X12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —S—, —NR L1 —, —CR L2 R L3 —, or —CO—
  • R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • L 11 and L 12 are not simultaneously single bonds
  • L13 represents a single bond or —CO—
  • X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond
  • a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L 11 is absent;
  • L 13 and X 13 are single bonds, X 11 and X 12 are benzene ring groups, and L 12 is -NR L1 -, a is 0, or a is 1 and L 11 is -O-
  • L Z1 represents a single bond or an alkylene group
  • L Z2 to L Z4 each independently represent —CR LZ1 R LZ2 —, —O—, —S— or —NR LZ3 —
  • R LZ1 to R LZ3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group
  • R Z1 and R Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • R Z1 and R Z2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring
  • at least two of L Z2 to L Z4 are -CR LZ1 R LZ2 -.
  • L Z11 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms; R Z11 to R Z14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group; L Z11 may be bonded to R Z11 or R Z12 to form a ring; L Z12 represents —(CR LZ11 R LZ12 ) p —, R LZ11 and R LZ12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and p represents an integer of 1 to 5.
  • ⁇ 5> The photocurable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, further comprising a colorant.
  • ⁇ 7> The photocurable composition according to ⁇ 6>, wherein the resin includes a resin having a crosslinkable group.
  • the resin includes a graft resin.
  • the resin includes at least one selected from a (meth)acrylic resin, a polyester resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin, a polyimide resin, a polyamic acid resin, and a polybenzoxazole resin.
  • ⁇ 11> The photocurable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>, further comprising a chain transfer agent.
  • ⁇ 12> A step of forming a composition layer on a support using the photocurable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11>; a step of patternwise exposing the composition layer to light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm; and developing and removing the unexposed portion of the composition layer.
  • ⁇ 13> A film obtained by curing the photocurable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11>.
  • ⁇ 14> A solid-state imaging device comprising the film according to ⁇ 13>.
  • ⁇ 15> An image display device comprising the film according to ⁇ 13>.
  • X 1a represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
  • Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —,
  • R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group,
  • R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and
  • R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
  • Ar 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
  • R 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl
  • X11 and X12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —S—, —NR L1 —, —CR L2 R L3 —, or —CO—
  • R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • L 11 and L 12 are not simultaneously single bonds
  • L13 represents a single bond or —CO—
  • X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond
  • a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L 11 is absent;
  • L 13 and X 13 are single bonds, X 11 and X 12 are benzene ring groups, and L 12 is -NR L1 -, a is 0, or a is 1 and L 11 is -O-
  • the present invention can provide a photocurable composition that has little exposure illuminance dependency and can form pixels with excellent sensitivity and adhesion even when exposed to low illuminance.
  • the present invention can also provide a pixel manufacturing method, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the word "to” is used to mean that the numerical values before and after it are included as the lower limit and upper limit.
  • groups (atomic groups) when a notation does not specify whether the group is substituted or unsubstituted, it encompasses both unsubstituted groups (atomic groups) and substituted groups (atomic groups).
  • alkyl group encompasses not only unsubstituted alkyl groups (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also substituted alkyl groups (substituted alkyl groups).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams.
  • Examples of light used for exposure include the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and other actinic rays or radiation.
  • (meth)acrylate refers to either or both of acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth)acrylic refers to either or both of acrylic and methacrylic
  • (meth)acryloyl refers to either or both of acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography) in terms of polystyrene.
  • the total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • a pigment means a coloring material that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
  • the term "process” includes not only an independent process but also a process that cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes as long as the intended effect of the process is achieved.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention comprises A photocurable composition containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound,
  • the photopolymerization initiator is characterized by containing a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B).
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention has little dependence on exposure illuminance, and even when exposed to low illuminance, it can form pixels with excellent sensitivity and adhesion.
  • the reason for this effect is presumed to be as follows.
  • the photopolymerization initiator contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a compound represented by formula (1-A ) or formula (1-B). These compounds have a structure in which an acyloyloxy structure ("Y 1a -COO-" in formula (1-A) and "Y 1b -COO-" in formula (1-B)) is bonded to an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group (Ar 1a in formula (1-A) and Ar 1b in formula (1-B)).
  • X 1a in formula (1-A) and X 1b in formula (1-B) are each a group represented by formula (X1-1), and it is presumed that the aromatic hydroxy group generated by the photo-Fries transition increases the transition dipole moment and results in a high absorption transition. Therefore, it is presumed that the light absorption of the photopolymerization initiator can be further increased in the exposed area, and that radicals can be efficiently generated even when exposed to low illuminance.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention has little exposure illuminance dependency, and can form pixels with excellent sensitivity and adhesion even when exposed to low illuminance.
  • the photocurable composition has excellent developability and can further suppress the generation of development residues.
  • the generation of development residues can be further suppressed, and even when an alkaline developer with a low alkaline concentration is used, the generation of development residues can be suppressed. Therefore, even when the alkaline concentration of the alkaline developer varies, the generation of development residues can be suppressed.
  • the aromatic hydroxy group is generated in the exposed area of the compound by the photo-Friess transition. It is presumed that the aromatic hydroxy group generated by the photo-Friess transition improves the solubility of the decomposition products of the photopolymerization initiator in the alkaline developer, thereby achieving this effect.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention preferably further contains a colorant.
  • Photocurable compositions containing a colorant are preferably used as photocurable compositions for optical filters.
  • optical filters include color filters, infrared transmission filters, and infrared cut filters, with color filters being preferred.
  • color filter is a filter having colored pixels that transmit light of a specific wavelength.
  • colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels.
  • the colored pixels of a color filter can be formed using a photocurable composition containing a chromatic colorant.
  • the infrared cut filter's maximum absorption wavelength is preferably in the wavelength range of 700 to 1800 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 700 to 1300 nm, and even more preferably in the wavelength range of 700 to 1000 nm.
  • the transmittance of the infrared cut filter over the entire wavelength range of 400 to 650 nm is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more.
  • the transmittance at at least one point in the wavelength range of 700 to 1800 nm is preferably 20% or less.
  • the ratio of the absorbance Amax at the infrared cut filter's maximum absorption wavelength to the absorbance A550 at a wavelength of 550 nm is preferably 20 to 500, more preferably 50 to 500, even more preferably 70 to 450, and particularly preferably 100 to 400.
  • the infrared cut filter can be formed using a photocurable composition containing an infrared-absorbing colorant.
  • the infrared transmission filter is a filter that transmits at least a portion of infrared light.
  • the infrared transmission filter is preferably a filter that blocks at least a portion of visible light and transmits at least a portion of infrared light.
  • Preferred examples of the infrared transmission filter include filters that satisfy the spectral characteristics of a maximum transmittance of 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less) in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm and a minimum transmittance of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1300 nm.
  • the infrared transmission filter is preferably a filter that satisfies any of the following spectral characteristics (1) to (5).
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention can also be used as a light-shielding film, etc.
  • the solids concentration of the photocurable composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 30% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention exhibits high sensitivity when exposed to light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm. Therefore, the photocurable composition of the present invention is preferably used as a curable composition for exposure to light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm.
  • Examples of light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm include i-line (wavelength 365 nm), KrF line (wavelength 248 nm), and ArF line (wavelength 193 nm), with i-line (wavelength 365 nm) or KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) being preferred.
  • the light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm is preferably excimer laser light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator, which is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator used contains a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B).
  • the compound represented by formula (1-A) and the compound represented by formula (1-B) are collectively referred to as specific compounds.
  • X 1a represents a group represented by formula (X1-1): Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —, R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring; Ar 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group; R 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group; R2a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl
  • X 1a and X 1b - X 1a in formula (1-A) and X 1b in formula (1-B) represent a group represented by formula (X1-1).
  • * represents a bond.
  • X11 and X12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group;
  • L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —S—, —NR L1 —, —CR L2 R L3 —, or —CO—;
  • R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
  • L 11 and L 12 are not simultaneously single bonds;
  • L13 represents a single bond or —CO—;
  • X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond;
  • a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L 11
  • X 11 and X 12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by X11 and X12 is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 18.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a single ring or a condensed ring. Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and an anthracene ring group, and a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group is preferred.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by X11 and X12 may have a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and a heteroaryloxy group. Details of these groups include those described in the section on Y1a below.
  • L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, -O-, -S-, -NR L1 -, -CR L2 R L3 -, or -CO-, and R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group. Details of these groups represented by R L1 to R L3 include those described in the section on Y 1a below.
  • L 11 and L 12 are preferably each independently a single bond, —O—, —S— or —CR L2 R L3 —.
  • a 0 or 1
  • L11 does not exist. That is, when a in formula (X1-1) is 0, the group represented by formula (X1-1) is a group represented by formula (X1-1a), and when a in formula (X1-1) is 1, the group represented by formula (X1-1) is a group represented by formula (X1-1b).
  • L 12 is preferably a single bond, —O—, —S— or —CR L2 R L3 —, and more preferably —O— or —S—.
  • L 11 is preferably a single bond
  • L 12 is preferably —O—, —S— or —CR L2 R L3 —.
  • Preferred combinations of L 11 and L 12 include the following embodiments. An embodiment in which L 11 is a single bond and L 12 is —O—. An embodiment in which L 11 is a single bond and L 12 is —S—. An embodiment in which L 11 is a single bond and L 12 is —CR L2 R L3 — (particularly preferably, R L2 and R L3 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms).
  • L 13 represents a single bond or —CO—, and preferably —CO—.
  • L 13 is also a single bond.
  • X13 in formula (X1-1) represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, preferably a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and more preferably a group having an indole ring.
  • groups having a pyrrole ring include groups represented by formula (X3-1).
  • groups having an indole ring include groups represented by formula (X3-2).
  • * and the wavy line each represent a bond, and * represents a bond to L13 in formula (X1-1), R and R each independently represent a substituent.
  • L and L each independently represent a single bond or a linking group; x represents an integer of 0 to 3; y represents an integer of 0 to 5;
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R X31 in formula (X3-1) and R X32 in formula (X3-2) include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an aryloxy group, an arylthio group, a heteroaryloxy group, a heteroarylthio group, an amino group, an acyl group, a cyano group, a nitro group, a hydroxy group, a thiol group, a carboxy group, and a halogen atom, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and a heteroaryloxy group. Details of these groups include those described in the section on Y 1a below.
  • R a1 to R a32 and R b1 to R b32 each independently represent a substituent;
  • R ar1 to R ar25 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group;
  • k1 to k32 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3, n1 to n32 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3;
  • L13 represents a single bond or —CO—;
  • X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond;
  • L 13 is —CO—
  • X 13 is a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring.
  • L 13 and X 13 are as described above.
  • substituents represented by R a1 to R a32 and R b1 to R b32 include alkyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, and heteroaryloxy groups. Details of these groups include those described in the section on Y 1a below.
  • Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —, where R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 5.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 1a and R 1b is particularly preferably a methyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkoxy group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group and aryloxy group preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 or 7 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • Types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • R y1 and R y2 may be bonded via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring.
  • Examples of the linking group when forming the ring include -O-, -S-, -NR L101 -, and -CR L102 R L103 -.
  • R L101 to R L103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6 or 7.
  • Y 1a in formula (1-A) is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, more preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an alkoxy group, still more preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group.
  • Y 1b - Y 1b in formula (1-B) represents a t-valent linking group.
  • the t-valent linking group represented by Y 1b include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, a group in which two or more hydrocarbon groups are linked via a single bond or a linking group, a group in which two or more heterocycles are linked via a single bond or a linking group, and a group in which a hydrocarbon group and a heterocyclic group are linked via a single bond or a linking group, and a hydrocarbon group or a group in which two or more hydrocarbon groups are linked via a single bond or a linking group is preferred.
  • the hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or acyclic.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent or may not have a substituent.
  • the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • linking groups that link the above hydrocarbon groups together, the heterocyclic groups together, or the hydrocarbon group and the heterocyclic group include -CH2- , -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, -SO-, -SO2- , -NRx- , and groups combining two or more of these.
  • Rx represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • Ar 1a in formula (1-A) and Ar 1b in formula (1-B) each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by Ar 1a and Ar 1b is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 10 to 18.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring, but is preferably a fused ring.
  • Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by Ar 1a and Ar 1b include: Examples include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, a phenanthrene ring group, a benzophenanthrene ring group, and a pyrene ring group.
  • a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, or an anthracene ring group is preferred, and a naphthalene ring group or an anthracene ring group is more preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group represented by Ar 1a and Ar 1b is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • Examples of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group include nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, and sulfur atoms.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • aromatic heterocyclic group examples include a furan ring group, a thiophene ring group, a benzofuran ring group, a benzothiophene ring group, a pyrrole ring group, an indole ring group, a pyridine ring group, a quinoxaline ring group, an imidazole ring group, and a benzimidazole ring group, and a benzofuran ring group is preferred.
  • the above aromatic hydrocarbon groups and aromatic heterocyclic groups may have a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, and an arylthio group, with an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkylthio group being preferred.
  • R 1a and R 1b each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group, preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, and more preferably an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 1a and R 1b is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 5.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 1a and R 1b is particularly preferably a methyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group represented by R 1a and R 1b is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkoxy group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group and aryloxy group represented by R 1a and R 1b preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 or 7 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group represented by R 1a and R 1b is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • Types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • R 2a and R 2b each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably an alkyl group.
  • R 2a and R 2b are preferably an unsubstituted linear alkyl group, an alkyl group having a branched structure, an alkyl group having a cyclic structure, or an alkyl group having at least one substituent selected from the following Group A, more preferably an alkyl group having a branched structure or an alkyl group having a cyclic structure, and even more preferably an alkyl group having a cyclic structure.
  • the alkyl group having a cyclic structure is preferably an alkyl group having a cyclic alkyl group as a substituent, more preferably an alkyl group having a 3- to 7-membered cyclic alkyl group as a substituent, even more preferably an alkyl group having a 5- to 7-membered cyclic alkyl group as a substituent, particularly preferably an alkyl group having a 5- or 6-membered cyclic alkyl group as a substituent, and most preferably an alkyl group having a 6-membered cyclic alkyl group as a substituent.
  • the position of the branched structure is preferably the ⁇ -position of the oxime group, and it is more preferable that one hydrogen atom ( ⁇ -hydrogen) be present at the ⁇ -position.
  • R2a and R2b are also preferably alkyl groups having a group having a heteroatom as a substituent.
  • the group having a heteroatom is preferably a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom.
  • Each of the R a's is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, more preferably an alkyl group, and particularly preferably a cyclic alkyl group.
  • Each R b is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group.
  • the above Rc is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group.
  • Each Rd is preferably an alkylene group, more preferably an ethylene group or a propylene group.
  • R a to R c may be bonded via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring.
  • the linking group when forming the ring include -O-, -S-, -NR L101 -, and -CR L102 R L103 -.
  • R L101 to R L103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6 or 7.
  • R 2a and R 2b are alkyl groups having at least one substituent selected from Group A
  • the substituent from Group A on the alkyl group is preferably an alkenyl group, an azaacyloyl group, or -SR a .
  • R a in -SR a is preferably an aryl group.
  • R 2a and R 2b each independently represent a group represented by formula (Z-1).
  • * represents a bond.
  • L Z1 represents a single bond or an alkylene group
  • L Z2 to L Z4 each independently represent —CR LZ1 R LZ2 —, —O—, —S— or —NR LZ3 —
  • R LZ1 to R LZ3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group
  • R Z1 and R Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • R Z1 and R Z2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
  • at least two of L Z2 to L Z4 are -CR LZ1 R LZ2 -.
  • the alkylene group represented by L Z1 in formula (Z-1) preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, even more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 carbon atom.
  • L Z1 is preferably a single bond or a methylene group, more preferably a single bond.
  • L Z2 to L Z4 each independently represent —CR L1 R L2 —, —O—, —S— or —NR L3 —
  • R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R L1 to R L3 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group represented by R L1 to R L3 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 or 7 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group represented by R L1 to R L3 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • Types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the heteroaryl group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • R L1 to R L3 are each preferably independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • L Z2 to L Z4 are —CR L1 R L2 —.
  • a preferred embodiment is one in which L Z2 is —CR L1 R L2 —.
  • R L1 and R L2 in —CR L1 R L2 — represented by L Z2 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • Another preferred embodiment is one in which L Z3 and L Z4 are each independently -CR L1 R L2 -.
  • R L1 and R L2 in -CR L1 R L2 - represented by L Z3 and L Z4 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • L Z2 to L Z4 in formula (Z-1) are each independently —CR L1 R L2 —.
  • L Z1 is a single bond or a methylene group and L Z2 is —CR L1 R L2 —, and it is more preferable that L Z1 is a single bond and L Z2 is —CR L1 R L2 —.
  • R 1 Z1 and R 2 Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R Z1 and R Z2 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group represented by R 1 Z1 and R 1 Z2 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 or 7 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group represented by R Z1 and R Z2 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • Types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the heteroaryl group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. It is preferred that R 1 Z1 and R 1 Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • R Z1 and R Z2 in formula (Z-1) may be bonded via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring.
  • the linking group when forming the ring include -O-, -S-, -NR L101 -, and -CR L102 R L103 -.
  • R L101 to R L103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6 or 7.
  • the ring formed is preferably a 3- to 8-membered ring, more preferably a 4- to 7-membered ring, and even more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the ring formed is preferably a non-aromatic ring, more preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the ring formed is particularly preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • a preferred embodiment of the group represented by formula (Z-1) is L Z1 is a single bond or a methylene group; L Z2 to L Z4 are each independently —CR L1 R L2 —, and R L1 and R L2 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group; An embodiment in which R 1 Z1 and R 2 Z2 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group is given. In this embodiment, R L1 , R L2 , R Z1 and R Z2 are each preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • L Z1 is a single bond or a methylene group
  • L Z2 to L Z4 are each independently —CR L1 R L2 —
  • R L1 and R L2 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • R L1 and R L2 are each preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the ring formed by bonding R and R is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, more preferably a 3- to 8-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, even more preferably a 4- to 7-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and particularly preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • R 2a and R 2b each independently represent a group represented by formula (Z-2).
  • * represents a bond.
  • L Z11 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
  • R Z11 to R Z14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
  • L Z11 may be bonded to R Z11 or R Z12 to form a ring;
  • L Z12 represents —(CR LZ11 R LZ12 ) p —, R LZ11 and R LZ12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and p represents an integer of 1 to 5.
  • L Z11 is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl groups represented by R Z11 to R Z14 , R LZ11 and R LZ12 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • R Z11 to R Z14 , R LZ11 and R LZ12 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • p represents an integer from 1 to 5, preferably 3 or 4, and more preferably 3.
  • na and nb- na in formula (1-A) and nb in formula (1-B) each independently represent 0 or 1, and are preferably 1.
  • -About ma and mb- ma in formula (1-A) and mb in formula (1-B) each independently represent 0 or 1, and are preferably 1.
  • s represents an integer of 1 to 3, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.
  • t represents an integer of 2 to 4, and is preferably 2 or 3, more preferably 2, because this allows for further suppression of development residues.
  • the specific compound is preferably a compound represented by formula (1-A) because it can reduce the exposure illuminance dependency.
  • the molecular weight of the specific compound is preferably 200 to 2000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1500 or less, and more preferably 1000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 300 or more, and more preferably 400 or more.
  • the molar absorption coefficient of the specific compound at a wavelength of 248 nm is preferably 5,000 L mol cm or more, more preferably 10,000 L mol cm or more , even more preferably 20,000 L mol cm or more , and particularly preferably 30,000 L mol cm or more .
  • the molar absorption coefficient at a wavelength of 248 nm is preferably 200,000 L mol cm or less .
  • the molar absorption coefficient of the specific compound at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 500 L mol cm or more , more preferably 1000 L mol cm or more , even more preferably 2000 L mol cm or more , and particularly preferably 3000 L mol cm or more .
  • the specific compound preferably has a long wavelength absorption end (the longest wavelength at which the molar absorption coefficient is less than 100 L mol cm ) of 450 nm or less, more preferably 400 nm or less, and even more preferably 380 nm or less. Having the long wavelength absorption end in the above range prevents yellow light fogging and provides excellent light stability during synthesis. Furthermore, since the specific compound does not exhibit a yellow color, good color reproducibility is achieved when applied to optical filters such as color filters.
  • the molar absorption coefficient of a specific compound is measured by the following method. Accurately weigh out 12.5 mg of a specific compound and place it in a 100 mL volumetric flask. Add acetonitrile to this and dissolve completely. Take 2 mL of this solution with a volumetric pipette and make up to 25 mL in a volumetric flask. This is the measurement sample. Add the measurement sample to a 1 cm square 5 mL quartz glass cell, measure the absorbance in air, and calculate the molar extinction coefficient. Examples of measurement devices include an ultraviolet-visible-near-infrared spectrophotometer (UH4150, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Corporation).
  • the specific compound may be the E geometric isomer, the Z geometric isomer, or a mixture of the E and Z geometric isomers.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the specific compound preferably exists in the wavelength range of 230 to 380 nm.
  • the number of maximum absorption wavelengths may be one or two or more. If there are two or more maximum absorption wavelengths, the maximum absorption wavelengths are preferably at least 20 nm apart, and more preferably at least 50 nm apart.
  • the melting point of the specific compound is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 60 to 130°C, and even more preferably 70 to 120°C.
  • the 50% cumulative value of the specific compound as measured by dynamic light scattering is preferably 0.001 to 1000 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 to 100 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m, from the standpoint of ease of handling and solubility in solvents.
  • the specific compound can be synthesized by the following methods (1) to (3).
  • They can be synthesized by subjecting an acid chloride or acid anhydride having an acyloyloxy group to a Friedel-Crafts reaction in the presence of a Lewis acid ( AlCl3 , SnCl4 , BCl3 , AlBr3 , FeCl3 , GaCl3 , SbCl5 , InCl3 , SnBr4 , AsCl5 , ZnCl2 , CdCl2 , HgCl2, etc.), followed by conversion to an oxime or ketoxime.
  • the conversion to an oxime or ketoxime can be carried out by a conventional method.
  • a methoxy-containing acid chloride or acid anhydride is subjected to a Friedel-Crafts reaction in the presence of a Lewis acid, followed by demethylation with BBr3 to synthesize an OH-free form.
  • the resulting OH-free form can then be acylated in the presence of a base.
  • Acylation can be carried out after oxime or ketoxime formation, or simultaneously with the oxime esterification step.
  • An acid chloride or acid anhydride having a tertiary alkoxy group (such as a tert-butoxy group) is subjected to a Friedel-Crafts reaction in the presence of a Lewis acid, followed by dealkylation with a Br ⁇ nsted acid (preferably with a pKa of ⁇ 0; for example, methanesulfonic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, sulfuric acid, etc.) to synthesize an OH-free form.
  • the resulting OH-free form can be acylated in the presence of a base.
  • Acylation may be carried out after oxime formation or ketoxime formation, or may be carried out simultaneously in the oxime esterification stage.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a precursor oxime body and a ketone body prior to oximation. If these are contained, the content of each of the oxime body and ketone body is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.001 to 8% by mass, and even more preferably 0.001 to 5% by mass of the specific compound.
  • Specific examples of specific compounds include compounds A-1 to A-339 shown below.
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • iPr represents an isopropyl group
  • tBu represents a tert-butyl group
  • MOM represents a methoxymethyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group
  • Fr represents a furanyl group
  • OMe represents a methoxy group
  • OPh represents a phenoxy group
  • NHHex represents an N-hexyl group
  • NHPh represents an N-phenyl group.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may use only one of the specific compounds described above, or two or more of them in combination. Using two or more of them in combination has the effect of achieving a better balance between resolution and sensitivity, whether the exposure light source is KrF line or i-line.
  • the impurities that may be contained in the specific compound will be described below.
  • the content of water contained in the specific compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, further preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound.
  • the lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass.
  • the content of the organic solvent contained in the specific compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, further preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound.
  • the lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass.
  • the content of the organic acid and organic acid anhydride contained in the specific compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, more preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound.
  • the lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass.
  • organic acids include formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, succinic acid, phthalic acid, and benzoic acid.
  • organic acid anhydrides include anhydrides of these.
  • the content of the organic base contained in the specific compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound.
  • the lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass.
  • organic bases include triethylamine, dimethylamine, diethylamine, pyridine, piperidine, pyrrolidine, morpholine, and amines used in producing the specific compound.
  • the content of halogen contained in the specific compound is preferably 5 parts by mass or less, more preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound.
  • the lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass.
  • Halogen includes Cl, Br, F, I, etc., and may be an organic compound having these halogen atoms.Also, ions of these halogens may be used.
  • the content of the residual metal contained in the specific compound is preferably 0.1 parts by mass or less, more preferably 0.01 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 0.001 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the specific compound.
  • the type of residual metal is not particularly limited, but examples include Li, Na, Mg, Al, K, Ca, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Cd, Pb, Ti, V, As, Ag, Sn, Ba, W, Au, and Zr.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may further contain a photopolymerization initiator other than the specific compound described above (hereinafter also referred to as other photopolymerization initiator).
  • a photopolymerization initiator other than the specific compound described above hereinafter also referred to as other photopolymerization initiator.
  • the content of the other photopolymerization initiator is preferably 1 to 1,000 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the specific compound.
  • the upper limit is preferably 500 parts by mass or less, more preferably 200 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 50 parts by mass or more.
  • photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, etc.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds e.g., acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, etc.
  • the other photopolymerization initiator is preferably a trihalomethyltriazine compound, a benzyl dimethyl ketal compound, an ⁇ -hydroxyketone compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, an acylphosphine compound, a phosphine oxide compound, a metallocene compound, an oxime compound, a hexaarylbiimidazole compound, an onium compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex, a halomethyloxadiazole compound, or a 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compound; more preferably an oxime compound, an ⁇ -hydroxyketone compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, or an acylphosphine compound; even more preferably an ⁇ -aminoketone compound or an oxime compound; and particularly preferably an oxime compound
  • photopolymerization initiators include the compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP 2014-130173 A, the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489 A, and the compounds described in MATERIAL STAGE pp. 37-60, vol. 19, No.
  • photopolymerization initiators that can be suitably used include SPI-02, SPI-03, SPI-05, SPI-06, and SPI-07 (all manufactured by SAMYANG Co., Ltd.), Nikkacure series YJ-04(T), IW-15, TG-05, TG-10, and TKG-01 (all manufactured by Nippon Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), SpeedCure PDO (all manufactured by ARKEMA Co., Ltd.), HTPI-429 (all manufactured by Heraeus Co., Ltd.), Omnirad 1312, and Omnirad 1316 (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), etc.
  • hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2',4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1'-biimidazole.
  • ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, and Omnirad 127 (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), and Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, and Irgacure 127 (all manufactured by BASF).
  • Commercially available ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, and Omnirad 379EG (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), and Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 369E, and Irgacure 379EG (all manufactured by BASF).
  • acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819 and Omnirad TPO (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), and Irgacure 819 and Irgacure TPO (all manufactured by BASF).
  • Examples of oxime compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0142 of WO 2022/085485, the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5430746, the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5647738, the compounds represented by general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0022 to 0024 of JP 2021-173858 A, the compounds represented by general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0117 to 0120 of JP 2021-170089 A, and the like.
  • oxime compound examples include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime), and the like.
  • Irgacure OXE01 Irgacure OXE02, Irgacure OXE03, Irgacure OXE04, and Irgacure OXE05 (all manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-301, TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-305, TR-PBG-309, TR-PBG-3054, TR-PBG-3057, TR-PBG-314, TR-PBG-327, and TR-PBG-309.
  • oxime compound examples include R-PBG-345, TR-PBG-346, TR-PBG-358, TR-PBG-365, TR-PBG-380, TR-PBG-610, TR-NPI-807, TR-PBG-A, and TR-PBG-B (all manufactured by TRONLY), ADEKA OPTOMER N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, photopolymerization initiator 2 described in JP-A 2012-014052), and Esacure 563 (manufactured by IGM).
  • ADEKA Arcles NCI-730, NCI-831, NCI-831E, and NCI-930 all manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
  • photopolymerization initiators that can be used include oxime compounds having a fluorene ring, oxime compounds having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is replaced with a naphthalene ring, oxime compounds having a fluorine atom, oxime compounds having a nitro group, oxime compounds having a benzofuran skeleton, oxime compounds in which a substituent having a hydroxy group is bonded to a carbazole skeleton, and compounds described in paragraphs 0143 to 0149 of WO 2022/085485.
  • Another photopolymerization initiator that can be used is a compound represented by formula (OX-1).
  • X 1a represents a divalent linking group containing at least one ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring and a heterocyclic ring;
  • R 1a represents a hydrogen atom or an acyl group;
  • R2a represents an alkyl group or an aryl group;
  • R 3a and R 4a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
  • Alk 1 and Alk 2 each independently represent an alkyl group;
  • R 3a and R 4a may be bonded to form a ring;
  • Alk 1 and Alk 2 may be linked to form a ring;
  • n represents 0 or 1.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by X 1a in formula (OX-1) include a divalent aromatic ring group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent group in which two or more aromatic ring groups are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, a divalent group in which two or more heterocyclic groups are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, and a divalent group in which an aromatic ring group and a heterocyclic group are bonded via a single bond or a linking group.
  • Examples of the linking group that bonds the above-mentioned aromatic ring groups, heterocyclic groups, or aromatic ring groups and heterocyclic groups include -CH 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -NR x -, and groups formed by combining these.
  • R x represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • X 1a in formula (OX-1) is preferably a group represented by any one of formulas (X-1) to (X-13), more preferably a group represented by formula (X-1), formula (X-2), formula (X-4), formula (X-6) or formula (X-8), and even more preferably a group represented by formula (X-2) or formula (X-6).
  • R X1 to R X9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and * represents a bond.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 2 to 15, and more preferably 2 to 10.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkenyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group.
  • the heteroaryl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroatoms contained in the heteroaryl group are preferably oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur atoms.
  • the number of heteroatoms contained in the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the heteroaryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and an aryl group.
  • R 1a represents a hydrogen atom or an acyl group, and is preferably an acyl group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 2a is preferably an unsubstituted linear or branched alkyl group, and more preferably an unsubstituted linear alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R 2a is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted aryl group.
  • R 3a and R 4a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 3a and R 4a is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • R3a and R4a may be bonded to form a ring.
  • the formed ring is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and more preferably a cyclopentane ring or a cyclohexane ring.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R 1b and R 2b include an alkyl group and an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group.
  • Ar 1b represents an aryl group which may have a substituent or a heteroaryl group which may have a substituent, and Ar 1b is preferably an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a nitro group, and an acyl group, and an acyl group is preferred.
  • Another photopolymerization initiator that can be used is a compound represented by formula (OX-3).
  • Ar 1c represents a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+m+1)-valent heterocyclic group
  • Ar 2c represents a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+2)-valent heterocyclic group
  • R 1c to R 3c each independently represent a substituent
  • L 1c represents a single bond or CR 11c R 12c
  • R 11c and R 12c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group
  • X 1c represents —CH 2 —, —N—, —O— or —S—
  • k represents 0 or 1
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • n represents 0 or 1.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R 1c and R 2c include an alkyl group and an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferred.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent.
  • substituents include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group.
  • R 2c is preferably an alkyl group having a branched or cyclic structure.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R 3c include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group and an acyl group, with an acyl group being preferred.
  • L 1c represents a single bond or CR 11c R 12c
  • R 11c and R 12c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group and aryl group in R 11c and R 12c have the same meanings as the alkyl group and aryl group in R 1c and R 2c .
  • L 1c is preferably a single bond.
  • X 1c represents —CH 2 —, —N—, —O— or —S—, and is preferably —O— or —S—.
  • Ar 1c represents a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+m+1)-valent heterocyclic group, and is preferably a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.
  • Ar2c represents a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+2)-valent heterocyclic group, and is preferably a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.
  • k represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 1.
  • n represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.
  • oxime compounds include the compounds shown below.
  • bifunctional, trifunctional or higher functional photopolymerization initiators may also be used.
  • Specific examples of bifunctional, trifunctional or higher functional photopolymerization initiators include the compounds described in paragraph 0148 of WO 2022/065215.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 20% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 2% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less, and even more preferably 8% by mass or less.
  • only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
  • the content of the specific compound in the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, and even more preferably 90% by mass or more.
  • the content of the specific compound in the total solids of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 45% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • only one type of specific compound may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound include a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, and a (meth)acryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form, such as a monomer, prepolymer, or oligomer, but a monomer is preferred.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3,000.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 2,000 or less, and even more preferably 1,500 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 150 or more, and even more preferably 250 or more.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing two or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 2 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and even more preferably a compound containing 2 to 6 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. Furthermore, the polymerizable compound is preferably a difunctional to 15functional (meth)acrylate compound, and more preferably a difunctional to hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound. Specific examples of polymerizable compounds include the compounds described in paragraphs 0075 to 0083 of WO 2022/065215 and the compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201832008.
  • Preferred polymerizable compounds include dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-330, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-320, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-310, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products: KAYARAD DPHA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., and NK Ester A-DPH-12E, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and compounds in which the (meth)acryloyl group is bonded via an ethylene glycol and/or propylene glycol residue (e.g.,
  • polymerizable compounds examples include diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth)acrylate (commercially available product: M-460, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (NK Ester A-TMMT, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (KAYARAD HDDA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and RP-104.
  • diglycerin EO ethylene oxide modified (meth)acrylate
  • M-460 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • pentaerythritol tetraacrylate NK Ester A-TMMT, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate KAYARAD HDDA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • a polymerizable compound having an ethylene oxide repeating chain can also be used. According to this embodiment, the effects of the present invention are more pronounced.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound having an ethylene oxide repeating chain include a compound represented by formula (EO-1).
  • R E1 in formula (EO-1) represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L E1 represents an m-valent linking group.
  • Examples of the m-valent linking group represented by L E1 include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, —O—, —S—, —NR A1 —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 —, and groups combining two or more of these groups.
  • R A1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or acyclic.
  • the acyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the hydrocarbon group may or may not have a substituent.
  • the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • examples of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • n represents an integer from 1 to 20
  • m represents an integer from 2 to 10.
  • n is preferably an integer from 1 to 15, and more preferably an integer from 1 to 10.
  • m is preferably an integer from 2 to 8, and more preferably an integer from 2 to 6.
  • a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used.
  • the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton is preferably a bifunctional polymerizable compound.
  • Commercially available polymerizable compounds having a fluorene skeleton include OGSOL EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomers having a fluorene skeleton).
  • a compound having an amino group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group (hereinafter also referred to as an amine monomer) can also be used.
  • the amine monomer is preferably a compound containing 1 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 2 to 10 groups, and even more preferably a compound containing 3 to 10 groups.
  • the pKaH of the amine monomer is preferably 5.5 or higher, more preferably 6.5 or higher, and even more preferably 7.5 or higher, because this effectively suppresses oxygen inhibition by the amine and further increases the sensitivity of the photosensitive composition.
  • pKaH is a value representing the pKa of the conjugate acid of the base.
  • the pKaH value of the amine monomer is calculated in accordance with the method described in A Web Server for Small Molecule pKa Prediction Using a Graph-Convolutional Neural Network, J. Chem. Inf. Model. 2021, 61, 7, 3159-3165.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10 mmol/g or less, and more preferably 9 mmol/g or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1 mmol/g or more, and more preferably 2 mmol/g or more.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the amine monomer is a numerical value representing the molar amount of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups per gram of solids in the amine monomer.
  • the amine value of the amine monomer is preferably 1 to 150 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit of the amine value is preferably 2.5 mgKOH/g or more, and more preferably 5 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit of the amine value is preferably 125 mgKOH/g or less, and more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the hydroxyl value of the amine monomer is preferably 75 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 30 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the molecular weight of the amine monomer is preferably 100 to 5,000, and more preferably 200 to 3,000.
  • amine monomers include Ebecryl 80, Ebecryl 81, Ebecryl 83, and Ebecryl 7100 manufactured by Daicel Allnex Corporation, Aronix MT-3041 and 3042 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., Light Ester DE and Light Ester DM manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., and CN383, CN371 NS, CN386, CN549 NS, CN550, CN551 NS, and CN9906NS manufactured by Arkema.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 30% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, and even more preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain only one polymerizable compound or may contain two or more polymerizable compounds. When two or more polymerizable compounds are contained, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, to disperse pigments or the like in the photocurable composition or as a binder.
  • Resins used primarily to disperse pigments or the like in the photocurable composition are also called dispersants.
  • these uses of resins are merely examples, and resins can also be used for purposes other than these uses.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, and more preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 4,000 or more, and more preferably 5,000 or more.
  • resins examples include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, (meth)acrylamide resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyamic acid resins, polybenzoxazole resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, and siloxane resins.
  • At least one resin selected from (meth)acrylic resins, polyester resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyamic acid resins, and polybenzoxazole resins is preferred.
  • Polyimide resins and polyamic acid resins are obtained by polycondensation of aromatic or aliphatic acid dianhydrides with aromatic or aliphatic diamines.
  • Polyimide resins and polyamic acid resins may contain crosslinkable groups. Examples of crosslinkable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
  • Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, and styrene groups.
  • Examples of cyclic ether groups include epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups.
  • polyimide resins and polyamic acid resins include resins in which crosslinkable groups have been introduced into polyimides or polyamic acids having carboxylic acids, as described in JP 2023-166413 A; polyimide resins or polyamic acid resins, as described in WO 2022/019253; block resins having poly(meth)acrylic, polyether, or polyester structures or combinations thereof at both ends of polyimide resins or polyamic acid resins, as described in WO 2022/019254; and resins having both a polyester moiety with a graft polymer portion and a polyamic acid moiety, as described in WO 2022/019255.
  • Resins include those described in paragraphs 0091 to 0099 of WO 2022/065215, blocked polyisocyanate resins described in JP 2016-222891 A, resins described in JP 2020-122052 A, resins described in JP 2020-111656 A, resins described in JP 2020-139021 A, resins containing a structural unit having a ring structure in the main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in the side chain described in JP 2017-138503 A, resins described in paragraphs 0199 to 0233 of JP 2020-186373 A, alkali-soluble resins described in JP 2020-186325 A, and Korean Patent Publication No.
  • a resin having an acid group examples include a carboxy group, a phosphate group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 40 mgKOH/g or more, and more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 50,000.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 1,000 to 20,000.
  • the resin having an acid group preferably contains repeating units having an acid group on the side chain, and more preferably contains 5 to 70 mol% of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain out of all repeating units of the resin.
  • the upper limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more.
  • resins having acid groups please refer to paragraphs [0558] to [0571] of JP 2012-208494 A (corresponding paragraphs [0685] to [0700] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) and paragraphs [0076] to [0099] of JP 2012-198408 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Commercially available resins having acid groups can also be used.
  • There are no particular restrictions on the method for introducing acid groups into the resin but examples include the method described in Japanese Patent No. 6,349,629 A.
  • Another method for introducing acid groups into the resin involves reacting an acid anhydride with the hydroxyl group generated by the ring-opening reaction of an epoxy group.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention also preferably contains a resin having a basic group.
  • the resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain, more preferably a copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not having a basic group, and even more preferably a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not having a basic group.
  • the resin having a basic group can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the amine value of the resin having a basic group is preferably 5 to 300 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.
  • resins with basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, and BYK-LPN6919 (all manufactured by BYK-Chemie), Solsperse 11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, and 24 000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 37500, 38500, 39000, 53095, 56000, 7100 (all manufactured by Lubrizol Japan), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (all manufactured by BASF), and the like.
  • the resin having a basic group may be the block copolymer (B) described in paragraphs [0063] to [0112] of JP 2014-219665 A, the block copolymer A1 described in paragraphs [0046] to [0076] of JP 2018-156021 A, or the vinyl resin having a basic group described in paragraphs [0150] to [0153] of JP 2019-184763 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention contains both a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group.
  • This embodiment further improves the storage stability of the photocurable composition.
  • the content of the resin having a basic group is preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 300 parts by mass, and even more preferably 50 to 200 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group.
  • a resin having an aromatic carboxy group may be contained in the main chain of the repeating unit or in the side chain of the repeating unit.
  • the aromatic carboxy group is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • an aromatic carboxy group refers to a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring.
  • the number of carboxy groups bonded to the aromatic ring is preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 to 2.
  • resins having an aromatic carboxy group include the resins described in paragraphs 0082 to 0107 of WO 2021/166858.
  • crosslinkable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
  • ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, and styrene groups.
  • cyclic ether groups include epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups.
  • the resin preferably contains a graft resin.
  • graft resins include resins having repeating units with graft chains.
  • a graft chain refers to a polymer chain that branches off from the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the graft chain preferably has 40 to 10,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, more preferably 50 to 2,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, and even more preferably 60 to 500 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms.
  • the graft chain preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polyester structure, polyether structure, poly(meth)acrylic structure, polystyrene structure, polyurethane structure, polyurea structure, and polyamide structure; more preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polyester structure, polyether structure, poly(meth)acrylic structure, and polystyrene structure; even more preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polyester structure, polyether structure, and poly(meth)acrylic structure; still more preferably contains repeating units of a polyester structure or polyether structure; and particularly preferably contains repeating units of a polyester structure.
  • repeating units of polyester structures include repeating units of structures represented by the following formula (G-1), formula (G-4), or formula (G-5).
  • Examples of repeating units of polyether structures include repeating units of structures represented by the following formula (G-2).
  • Examples of repeating units of poly(meth)acrylic structures include repeating units of structures represented by the following formula (G-3).
  • Examples of repeating units of polystyrene structures include repeating units of structures represented by the following formula (G-6).
  • R G1 and R G2 each independently represent an alkylene group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group represented by R G1 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 2 to 16, and even more preferably 2 to 12.
  • the alkylene group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group represented by R G2 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 2 to 5, and still more preferably 2 or 3.
  • the alkylene group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Q G1 represents —O— or —NH—
  • L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L G1 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group (preferably an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • an alkylene group preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms
  • an alkyleneoxy group preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms
  • an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group preferably an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms
  • an arylene group preferably an
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R G4 include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heterocyclic thioether group.
  • R G5 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R G6 represents an aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R G6 is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and still more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the aryl group represented by R G6 may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heterocyclic thioether group.
  • the terminal structure of the graft chain is not particularly limited. It may be a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituent include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heterocyclic thioether group.
  • groups that have a steric repulsion effect are preferred, and alkyl or alkoxy groups having 5 to 24 carbon atoms are preferred.
  • the alkyl and alkoxy groups may be linear, branched, or cyclic, with linear or branched groups being preferred.
  • the graft chain preferably has a structure represented by the following formula (G-1a), (G-2a), (G-3a), (G-4a), (G-5a) or (G-6a), and more preferably has a structure represented by formula (G-1a), (G-4a) or (G-5a).
  • R G1 and R G2 each represent an alkylene group
  • R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Q G1 represents -O- or -NH-
  • L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R G5 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R G6 represents an aryl group
  • W 100 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • n1 to n6 each independently represent an integer of 2 or more.
  • R G1 to R G6 , Q G1 , and L G1 have the same meanings and preferred ranges as R G1 to R G6 , Q G1 , and L G1 described in formulas (G-1) to (G-6).
  • W 100 is preferably a substituent.
  • the substituent include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heterocyclic thioether group.
  • a group having a steric repulsion effect is preferred, and an alkyl group or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is preferred.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and linear or branched groups are preferred.
  • n1 to n6 are each preferably an integer from 2 to 100, more preferably an integer from 2 to 80, and even more preferably an integer from 8 to 60.
  • the R G1 in each repeating unit may be the same or different.
  • the arrangement of the repeating units is not particularly limited and may be random, alternating, or block. The same applies to formulas (G-2a) to (G-6a).
  • the graft chain has a structure represented by formula (G-1a), formula (G-4a), or formula (G-5a) and includes two or more different R G1 repeating units.
  • repeating unit having a graft chain examples include a repeating unit represented by formula (b1-2).
  • a b12 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b12 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Y b12 represents a graft chain.
  • Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by A b12 include a poly(meth)acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine linking group, a polyester linking group, a polyurethane linking group, a polyurea linking group, a polyamide linking group, a polyether linking group, and a polystyrene linking group.
  • a poly(meth)acrylic linking group or a polyalkyleneimine linking group is preferred, and a poly(meth)acrylic linking group is more preferred.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L b12 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these groups.
  • Examples of the graft chain represented by Y b12 include the graft chains described above.
  • the weight-average molecular weight of the repeating unit having a graft chain is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 1,000 to 10,000, and even more preferably 1,000 to 7,500.
  • the weight-average molecular weight of a repeating unit having a graft chain is a value calculated from the weight-average molecular weight of the raw material monomer used to polymerize the repeating unit.
  • a repeating unit having a graft chain can be formed by polymerizing a macromonomer.
  • a macromonomer refers to a polymeric compound in which a polymerizable group has been introduced at the polymer terminal.
  • the weight-average molecular weight of the macromonomer corresponds to the repeating unit having a graft chain.
  • the content of repeating units having graft chains is preferably 1 to 60 mol% of the total repeating units of the graft resin.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50 mol% or less, and more preferably 40 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, and more preferably 5 mol% or more.
  • the graft resin further contains a repeating unit having a crosslinkable group.
  • crosslinkable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
  • ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, and styrene groups.
  • cyclic ether groups include epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups.
  • the content of repeating units having crosslinkable groups is preferably 1 mol% or more, and more preferably 1 to 80 mol%, of all repeating units in the graft resin.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70 mol% or less, and more preferably 60 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, and more preferably 5 mol% or more.
  • the graft resin further contains a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphate group.
  • the content of repeating units having an acid group is preferably 1 to 80 mol%, more preferably 5 to 80 mol%, and even more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, of all repeating units in the graft resin.
  • a resin containing a repeating unit represented by formula (Ac-2) can also be used.
  • Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxy group
  • L 11 represents —COO— or —CONH—
  • L 12 represents a trivalent linking group
  • P 10 represents a polymer chain.
  • Examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 10 in formula (Ac-2) include a structure derived from an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride, a structure derived from an aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride, etc.
  • Examples of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride and aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride include compounds having the following structure:
  • Q 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO—, —SO 2 —, —C(CF 3 ) 2 —, a group represented by the following formula (Q-1) or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).
  • the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 10 may have a crosslinkable group.
  • Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 10 include a group represented by formula (Ar-11), a group represented by formula (Ar-12), and a group represented by formula (Ar-13).
  • n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 2.
  • n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 2.
  • n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 1. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or greater.
  • Q 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO—, —SO 2 —, —C(CF 3 ) 2 —, a group represented by formula (Q-1) above or a group represented by formula (Q-2) above.
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L10 .
  • L 11 in formula (Ac-2) represents —COO— or —CONH—, and is preferably —COO—.
  • Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 in formula (Ac-2) include hydrocarbon groups, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and groups combining two or more of these.
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group include aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and aromatic hydrocarbon groups.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20, and even more preferably 1 to 15.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by formula (L12-1), and more preferably a group represented by formula (L12-2).
  • L 12b represents a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • *1 represents the bonding position to L 11 in formula (Ac-2)
  • *2 represents the bonding position to P 10 in formula (Ac-2).
  • Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by L 12b include hydrocarbon groups and groups in which a hydrocarbon group is combined with at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and -S-, and the like.
  • a hydrocarbon group or a group in which a hydrocarbon group is combined with -O- is preferred.
  • L 12c represents a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • *1 represents the bonding position to L 11 in formula (Ac-2)
  • *2 represents the bonding position to P 10 in formula (Ac-2).
  • Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by L 12c include hydrocarbon groups and groups in which a hydrocarbon group is combined with at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and -S-, and a hydrocarbon group is preferred.
  • the polymer chain represented by P10 in formula (Ac-2) includes a polymer chain containing a repeating unit of at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a polyester structure, a polyether structure, a poly(meth)acrylic structure, a polystyrene structure, a polyurethane structure, a polyurea structure, and a polyamide structure.
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the polyester structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-1), formula (G-4), or formula (G-5) above.
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the polyether structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-2) above.
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the poly(meth)acrylic structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-3) above.
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the polystyrene structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-6) above.
  • the polymer chain represented by P10 may contain a repeating unit having a crosslinkable group.
  • the proportion of the repeating units having a crosslinkable group in all repeating units constituting P10 is preferably 1 mol% or more, more preferably 1 to 80 mol%.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 60 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more.
  • the polymer chain represented by P10 may contain a repeating unit containing an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphate group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the proportion of the repeating unit having an acid group in all repeating units constituting P10 is preferably 1 to 80 mol%, more preferably 5 to 80 mol%, and even more preferably 10 to 80 mol%.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain represented by P10 is preferably 500 to 20,000.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1,000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.
  • X represents a 4+m-valent organic group
  • Y represents a 2+n-valent organic group
  • R and R each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 6
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 6
  • n+m is an integer of 1 or more
  • X represents a 4+m-valent organic group
  • Y represents a 2 +n-valent organic group
  • a and A each independently represent a monovalent organic group
  • R and R each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 6
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 6
  • n+m is an integer of 1 or more, provided that when at least one of A and A has a polymerizable group, n+m may be 0.
  • -X B1 - X B1 in formula (B-1) and formula (B-2) is preferably a structure derived from an acid anhydride monomer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the acid anhydride monomer is not particularly limited as long as it has two cyclic acid anhydride groups in one molecule. It may be an aromatic acid anhydride, an aliphatic acid anhydride, or a mixture thereof.
  • X B1 is preferably a group having an alicyclic hydrocarbon.
  • XB1 those represented by the following formulae (Xp-1) to (Xp-23) are preferably used.
  • *1 represents the bonding site to the carbonyl group represented by *1 in the following formula (BX-1) or formula (BX-2), respectively
  • *2 represents the bonding site to the carbonyl group represented by *2 in the following formula (BX-1) or formula (BX-2).
  • the following formulae (BX-1) and (BX-2) are obtained by adding the symbols *1 and *2 to formula (B-1) and formula (B-2), respectively.
  • R1 and R2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
  • R1 and R2 may bond to form a ring structure, which may be an aromatic ring, or
  • R1 and R2 may combine to form a benzene ring.
  • Ls When multiple Ls are present in one molecule, they may be the same or different.
  • R3 , R4 , R5 , and R6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group ; adjacent R3 to R6 may be linked via a divalent organic group to form a ring.
  • R7 and R8 each represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluoroalkyl group, a fluoroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or a halogen atom.
  • n1 and n2 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4. When geometrical isomers exist, the distinction between cis/trans and endo/exo is not particularly limited.
  • X 1 to X 4 represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, and are preferably a single bond, -C(Rx) 2 - (Rx represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Rx When Rx is a substituent, they may be linked to each other to form a ring), -O-, -S( ⁇ O) 2 -, -C( ⁇ O), -S-, -NR N -, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, an arylene group, a heteroarylene group, -C( ⁇ O)O-, -C( ⁇ O)NH-, or a combination thereof, and more preferably a single bond or -C(Rx) 2 -.
  • Rx represents a substituent
  • specific examples thereof include an alkyl group, an alkyl group optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, and a fluorenyl group.
  • R 1 N represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • linking groups X 1 to X 4 are divalent linking groups represented by the following formula (X1-1) in terms of exhibiting excellent mechanical strength.
  • n and m each independently represent 0 or 1.
  • T1 and T2 each independently represent a single bond, -O-, -S-, or -NR-, where R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • P1 , P2 , and P3 each independently represent an aromatic group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic group having 5 to 12 carbon atoms, an aliphatic group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or an alicyclic group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Each of the groups P1 , P2, and P3 may further have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, and a halogen atom.
  • substitution position of these groups is not particularly limited.
  • R each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, or an aryl group, and Rs may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • p and q each independently represent 0 or 1;
  • aromatic carboxylic dianhydrides such as pyromellitic anhydride, 3,3',4,4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,4,9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4-chloroformylphthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, tetrachlorophthalic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, naphthalene-1,4,5,8-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4'-(hexafluoroisopropylidene)diphthalic anhydride, 4,4'-oxydiphthalic anhydride, 4,4'-(4,4'-isopropylidenediphenoxy)diphthalic anhydride, 4,4'-biphthalic anhydride, tetrabromophthalic anhydride, 3,4'-oxydiphthalic anhydride, 4-(1
  • aliphatic acid dianhydrides include bicyclo[2.2.2]oct-7-ene-2,3,5,6-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 5-(2,5-dioxotetrahydrofuryl)-3-methyl-3-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic acid anhydride, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid dianhydride, dicyclohexyl-3,4,3',4'-tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, meso-butane-1,2,3,4-tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-cyclopentanetetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 4-(2,5-dioxotetrahydrofuran-3 Suitable examples of compounds that can be used include 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-1,2-dicarboxylic acid anhydride, octahydrobiphenylene-4a,8b:4b,8a
  • -Y B1 - Y B1 in formula (B-1) and formula (B-2) is preferably a structure derived from a diamine monomer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the diamine monomer is not particularly limited as long as it has two primary amino groups in one molecule. It may be an aromatic diamine, an aliphatic diamine, or a mixture thereof.
  • Y B1 preferably has a structure of the following formulae (Yp-1) to (Yp-16), where * indicates the bonding site to the nitrogen atom.
  • R 10 to R 15 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluoroalkyl group, a fluoroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or a halogen atom.
  • R 16 and R 17 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • a to f each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 12.
  • the substitution positions of R 10 to R 15 are not particularly specified.
  • Y 1 or Y 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is preferably a single bond, -C(Rx) 2 - (Rx represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Rx When Rx is a substituent, they may be linked to each other to form a ring), -O-, -S( ⁇ O) 2 -, -C( ⁇ O), -S-, -NR N -, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, an arylene group, a heteroarylene group, -C( ⁇ O)O-, -C( ⁇ O)NH-, or a combination thereof, and more preferably a single bond or -C(Rx) 2 -.
  • Rx represents a substituent
  • specific examples thereof include an alkyl group, an alkyl group optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, and a fluorenyl group.
  • R 1 N represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the linking group Y1 or Y2 is more preferably a divalent linking group represented by the following formula (Y1-1) in terms of exhibiting excellent mechanical strength.
  • aromatic diamines such as 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl sulfone, 1,5-naphthalenediamine, 4,4'-diaminostilbene-2,2'-disulfonic acid, m-xylylenediamine, p-xylylenediamine, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfone, 4,4'-methylenebis(2,6-diethylaniline), 1,3-phenylenediamine, 4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4'-methylenebis(2-chloroaniline), 1,4-bis[2-(4-aminophenyl)-2-propyl]benzene, 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-biphenyldisulfonic acid, 1,4-phenylenediamine, o-
  • aromatic diamines such as 4,4'-diamin
  • Suitable aliphatic diamines include, for example, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane dimethanamine (mixture of isomers), 4,4'-methylenebis(cyclohexylamine) (mixture of isomers), 4,4'-methylenebis(2-methylcyclohexylamine) (mixture of isomers), isophoronediamine (mixture of cis- and trans-), 1,3-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane (mixture of cis- and trans-), 1,4-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane (mixture of cis- and trans-), 1,3-bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, 1,3-cyclohexanediamine (mixture of cis- and trans-), and 1,4-cyclohexanediamine (mixture of cis- and trans-).
  • R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group, and the polymerizable group is preferably a radically polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, and a benzoxazolyl group, with an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group being preferred.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a maleimide group, and a group having a norbornene skeleton.
  • a (meth)acryloyl group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group is preferred, and from the viewpoint of reactivity, a (meth)acryloyl group is more preferred.
  • a vinylphenyl group or a maleimide group is preferred.
  • the (meth)acryloyl group preferably constitutes a (meth)acryloyloxy group or a (meth)acrylamide group, and from the viewpoint of reactivity, a (meth)acryloyloxy group is more preferred.
  • Lx 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —NR 1 —, —C( ⁇ O)O—, —OC( ⁇ O)—, —OC( ⁇ O)O—, —C( ⁇ O)NR 2 —, —NR 2 C( ⁇ O)—, —NR 2 C( ⁇ O)O—, —OC( ⁇ O)NR 2 —, —NR 2 C ( ⁇ O)NR 3 —, —NR 3 C( ⁇ O)NR 2 —, —CH 2 CH(OH)—CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH(OR 4 )—CH 2 —;
  • Lb represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms and having a valence of r4+1, or a group represented by any one of formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) or a combination thereof;
  • A represents an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, or an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group;
  • r1 represents 0 or 1;
  • r2 represents 0 or 1;
  • r3 represents an integer of 0 to 5;
  • r4 represents an integer of 1 to 10; * indicates the bonding site to X B1 (when R B2 ) or Y B1 (when R B1 ) in formula (B-1) or formula (B-2).
  • Ra 1 and Ra 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group; * indicates the binding site with Lx1 ; The wavy lines represent the binding sites to Lb or A.
  • Lc1 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, or a combination thereof, and x, y, and z each independently represent an integer from 1 to 30.
  • L X1 is —C( ⁇ O)O—
  • the carbon atom is the bonding site to X B1 or Y B2 in formula (B-1) or formula (B-2)
  • the oxygen atom is the bonding site to La, Lb or A.
  • Lx 1 is preferably —O—, —C( ⁇ O)O—, —NR 2 C( ⁇ O)O—, —OC( ⁇ O)NR 2 —, —CH 2 CH(OH)—CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH(OR 4 )—CH 2 —, and more preferably —O— or —C( ⁇ O)O—.
  • R 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R2 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R3 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R4 is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group.
  • La represents a group represented by formula (La-1)
  • Ra 1 and Ra 2 each independently represent preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably a methyl group.
  • Another preferred embodiment is one in which one of Ra 1 and Ra 2 is a hydrogen atom and the other is an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a methyl group).
  • r1 is 1 or 0, and preferably 0.
  • Lx 2 is preferably —O—, —C( ⁇ O)O—, —NR 2 C( ⁇ O)O—, —OC( ⁇ O)NR 2 —, —CH 2 CH(OH)—CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH(OR 4 )—CH 2 —, and more preferably —O—.
  • r2 is 1 or 0, and when Lb is any one of formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) or a combination thereof, it is preferably 1.
  • Lb when Lb is an r4+1-valent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, Lb is preferably an r4+1-valent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an r4+1-valent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon group or saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group in Lb may be substituted with known substituents.
  • Lb is preferably a group represented by formula (Lb-1) to formula (Lb-3), or a bond thereof, and is also preferably a group represented by formula (Lb-1), formula (Lb-2), or a bond thereof.
  • Lc1 is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or a combination thereof, and more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • x, y, and z each independently represent an integer of 1 to 30, preferably an integer of 1 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 10.
  • r3 represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, and more preferably 0, 1 or 2.
  • An embodiment in which r3 is 1 to 5 and Lb includes any one of formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) is also one of the preferred embodiments.
  • the structures represented by formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) are thought to be easily decomposed by heating. Therefore, for example, when heating (for example, heating at 180°C or higher) is performed during film formation, the structures represented by formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) are decomposed, which presumably makes it easier for the resin to be oriented in the film and reduces the CTE (coefficient of thermal expansion).
  • A represents an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, or an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, and is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group is preferably a (meth)acryloyl group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group, but may also be a known group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, such as a vinyl group or an allyl group.
  • r4 is preferably an integer of 1 to 6, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3, and even more preferably 1 or 2.
  • -A x1 ,A x2 - AX1 and AX2 in formula (B-2) are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a group represented by formula (AA-1) above, and more preferably a group represented by formula (AA-1) above.
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 2. An embodiment in which m is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • n+m is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 2. An embodiment in which m is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 2.
  • n+m is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and more preferably 0, 1, or 2.
  • R B1 and R B2 in formula (B-1), and R B1 , R B2 , A x1 and A x2 in formula (B-2) are ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups.
  • one of n and m in formula (B-1) may be 0, and at least one of n and m in formula (B-2) may be 0.
  • the terminal structure of the specific resin is not limited unless otherwise specified.
  • the terminal structure of the specific resin may be a monovalent organic group, an acidic functional group such as carboxylic acid, phosphoric acid, or sulfonic acid, or a structure in which the acidic group is protected, a basic functional group such as an amino group, or a structure in which the basic group is protected, or a polymerizable group.
  • the terminal structure may be represented by formula (AA-1) described above, in which case the * in formula (AA-1) indicates the bonding site between the terminal polymerizable monomer residue of the specific resin and the carboxylic acid, amino group, acid anhydride, imide group, etc.
  • the total content of the partial structure represented by formula (B-1) or the partial structure represented by formula (B-2) relative to all repeating units of the specific resin is preferably 50 mol% or more, more preferably 70 mol% or more, even more preferably 80 mol% or more, and particularly preferably 90 mol% or more. There is no particular upper limit to the content, and it may be 100 mol%.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant.
  • dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins).
  • an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) refers to a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups.
  • an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) a resin in which the amount of acid groups is 70 mol% or more is preferred, when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is taken as 100 mol%.
  • the acid groups possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) are preferably carboxy groups.
  • the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mg KOH/g.
  • a basic dispersant refers to a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups.
  • a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups is preferred, when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is taken as 100 mol%.
  • the basic groups possessed by the basic dispersant are preferably amino groups.
  • the resin used as a dispersant is preferably a graft resin.
  • the resin used as a dispersant is also preferably a resin having an aromatic carboxy group.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is preferably a polyimine-based dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and side chain.
  • the polyimine-based dispersant is preferably a resin having a main chain with a partial structure containing a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less, a side chain with 40 to 10,000 atoms, and a basic nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and side chain.
  • the basic nitrogen atom there are no particular restrictions on the basic nitrogen atom, as long as it is a nitrogen atom that exhibits basicity.
  • polyimine-based dispersants please refer to the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP 2012-255128 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the resin used as a dispersant is preferably one with a structure in which multiple polymer chains are bonded to a core.
  • resins include dendrimers (including star-shaped polymers).
  • dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP 2013-043962 A.
  • the resin used as a dispersant is a resin containing repeating units having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain.
  • the content of repeating units having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and even more preferably 20 to 70 mol%, of all repeating units in the resin.
  • resins described in JP 2018-087939 A, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraphs 0219 to 0221 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077 A, polyethyleneimine having polyester side chains described in WO 2016/104803 A, block copolymers described in WO 2019/125940 A, block polymers having acrylamide structural units described in JP 2020-066687 A, block polymers having acrylamide structural units described in JP 2020-066688 A, dispersants described in WO 2016/104803 A, and the like can also be used.
  • Dispersants are also commercially available, and specific examples include the DISPERBYK series manufactured by BYK Chemie, the SOLSPERSE series manufactured by Lubrizol Japan, the Efka series manufactured by BASF, and the AJISPER series manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Ltd. Additionally, the products described in paragraph 0129 of JP 2012-137564 A and paragraph 0235 of JP 2017-194662 A can also be used as dispersants.
  • the resin content of the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 99 mass%. Furthermore, the combined content of the polymerizable compound and resin of the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 99 mass%.
  • the resin content of the total solids of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 50% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types of resins are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a coloring material.
  • the coloring material include a white coloring material, a black coloring material, a chromatic coloring material, and an infrared-absorbing coloring material.
  • the white coloring material includes not only pure white coloring materials but also light gray coloring materials close to white (e.g., grayish white, light gray, etc.).
  • the colorant may be a pigment or a dye.
  • a combination of pigment and dye may also be used.
  • the pigment may be either an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, but organic pigments are preferred from the standpoint of a wide range of color variations, ease of dispersion, safety, etc.
  • the colorant preferably contains a pigment.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less.
  • the primary particle diameter of the pigment can be determined from a photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is determined, and the corresponding circle-equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment.
  • the crystallite size of the pigment determined from the half-width of a peak derived from any crystal plane in an X-ray diffraction spectrum when CuK ⁇ radiation is used as an X-ray source, is preferably 0.1 to 100 nm, more preferably 0.5 to 50 nm, even more preferably 1 to 30 nm, and particularly preferably 5 to 25 nm.
  • the specific surface area of the pigment is preferably 1 to 300 m 2 /g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 m 2 /g or more, and more preferably 30 m 2 /g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 250 m 2 /g or less, and more preferably 200 m 2 /g or less.
  • the specific surface area value can be measured in accordance with DIN 66131: determination of the specific surface area of solids by gas adsorption, in accordance with the BET (Brunauer, Emmett and Teller) method.
  • chromatic colorants include colorants having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm, such as green colorants, red colorants, yellow colorants, purple colorants, blue colorants, and orange colorants.
  • red colorants examples include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo compounds, naphthol compounds, azomethine compounds, xanthene compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, and thioindigo compounds, with diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, and azo compounds being preferred, and diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds being more preferred.
  • the red colorant is preferably a pigment (red pigment), and diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments are more preferred.
  • red colorants include C.I. (Color Index) Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48:1, 48:2, 48:3, 48:4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81:3, 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149,
  • red pigments include 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 269, 270, 272, 279, 291, 294, 295, 296, and 297. Additionally, the compound described
  • C.I. Pigment Red 122, 177, 224, 254, 255, 264, 269, 272, and 291 are preferred, C.I. Pigment Red 254, 264, and 272 are more preferred, and C.I. Pigment Red 254 and 264 are even more preferred.
  • Green colorants include phthalocyanine compounds and squarylium compounds, with phthalocyanine compounds being preferred. Furthermore, the green colorant is preferably a pigment (green pigment), with phthalocyanine pigment being more preferred.
  • green colorants include green pigments such as C.I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, and 66. Furthermore, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments containing an average of 10 to 14 halogen atoms, an average of 8 to 12 bromine atoms, and an average of 2 to 5 chlorine atoms per molecule can also be used as green colorants. Specific examples include the compounds described in WO 2015/118720. Other examples of green colorants that can be used include the compounds described in paragraph 0029 of WO 2022/085485, the aluminum phthalocyanine compounds described in JP 2020-070426 A, and the diarylmethane compounds described in JP 2020-504758 A.
  • Preferred green colorants are C.I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58, 62, and 63.
  • Orange colorants include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds and azo compounds.
  • the orange colorant is preferably a pigment (orange pigment).
  • Specific examples of orange colorants include orange pigments such as C.I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17:1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, and 73.
  • Yellow colorants include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindoline compounds, pteridine compounds, quinophthalone compounds, and perylene compounds.
  • the yellow colorant is preferably a pigment (yellow pigment). Specific examples of yellow colorants include C.I.
  • an azobarbituric acid nickel complex having the following structure can also be used.
  • Yellow colorants that can be used include the compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0033 of WO 2022/085485, the methine dyes described in JP 2019-073695 A, and the methine dyes described in JP 2019-073696 A.
  • Purple colorants include oxazine compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, and indigo compounds, with oxazine compounds being preferred.
  • the purple colorant is preferably a pigment (purple pigment).
  • Specific examples of purple colorants include purple pigments such as C.I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, and 61.
  • blue colorants examples include phthalocyanine compounds and squarylium compounds, with phthalocyanine compounds being preferred.
  • the blue colorant is preferably a pigment (blue pigment).
  • Specific examples of blue colorants include blue pigments such as C.I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15:1, 15:2, 15:3, 15:4, 15:6, 16, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, and 88.
  • Aluminum phthalocyanine compounds containing phosphorus atoms can also be used as blue colorants. Specific examples include the compounds described in paragraphs 0022 to 0030 of JP-A No. 2012-247591 and paragraph 0047 of JP-A No. 2011-157478.
  • Dyes can also be used as chromatic colorants. There are no particular restrictions on the dyes, and known dyes can be used. Examples include pyrazole azo dyes, anilino azo dyes, triarylmethane dyes, anthraquinone dyes, anthrapyridone dyes, benzylidene dyes, oxonol dyes, pyrazolotriazole azo dyes, pyridone azo dyes, cyanine dyes, phenothiazine dyes, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine dyes, xanthene dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, benzopyran dyes, indigo dyes, and pyrromethene dyes.
  • known dyes can be used. Examples include pyrazole azo dyes, anilino azo dyes, triarylmethane dyes, anthraquinone dyes, anthrapyridone dyes, benzylidene dye
  • Dye polymers can also be used as chromatic colorants.
  • the dye polymer is preferably a dye dissolved in a solvent before use.
  • the dye polymer may also form particles. When the dye polymer is particulate, it is typically used in a dispersed state in a solvent.
  • Particulate dye polymers can be obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization; examples of the compounds and manufacturing methods described in JP-A-2015-214682 include the compounds and manufacturing methods described in JP-A-2015-214682.
  • the dye polymer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, preferably three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but can be 100 or less.
  • the multiple dye structures in one molecule may be the same or different dye structures.
  • the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye polymer is preferably 2,000 to 50,000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3,000 or more, and even more preferably 6,000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, and even more preferably 20,000 or less.
  • Dye multimers may also use compounds described in JP 2011-213925 A, JP 2013-041097 A, JP 2015-028144 A, JP 2015-030742 A, WO 2016/031442, etc.
  • 10-2020-0069062 halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments described in Japanese Patent No. 6809649, isoindoline compounds described in JP 2020-180176, phenothiazine compounds described in JP 2021-187913, halogenated zinc phthalocyanines described in WO 2022/004261, halogenated zinc phthalocyanines described in WO 2021/250883, and compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0030759.
  • the chromatic colorant may be a rotaxane.
  • the dye skeleton may be used in the cyclic structure of the rotaxane, in the rod-shaped structure, or in both structures.
  • Two or more chromatic colorants may be used in combination.
  • the combination of two or more chromatic colorants may form a black color. Examples of such combinations include the following embodiments (1) to (7).
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a photocurable composition for forming an infrared transmission filter.
  • An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, a yellow color material, and a purple color material (3) An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, a yellow color material, and a purple color material. (4) An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, a yellow color material, a purple color material, and a green color material. (5) An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, a yellow color material, and a green color material. (6) An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, and a green color material. (7) An embodiment containing a yellow coloring material and a purple coloring material.
  • white coloring material examples include inorganic pigments such as titanium oxide, strontium titanate, barium titanate, zinc oxide, magnesium oxide, zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, barium sulfate, silica, talc, mica, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, and zinc sulfide.
  • the white coloring material can be the white pigments described in paragraphs 0040 to 0043 of WO 2022/085485.
  • the black coloring material is not particularly limited, and known materials can be used.
  • the black coloring material may be an inorganic black coloring material or an organic black coloring material.
  • the black coloring material is preferably a pigment.
  • the black coloring material means a coloring material that exhibits absorption over the entire wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm.
  • Inorganic black colorants include carbon black, titanium black, graphite, etc., with carbon black and titanium black being preferred, and titanium black being more preferred. Titanium black is black particles containing titanium atoms, and low-order titanium oxide or titanium oxynitride is preferred. The titanium black described in paragraph 0044 of WO 2022/085485 can be used. Zirconium nitride powder described in JP 2023-048173 A can also be used as an inorganic black colorant.
  • organic black colorants examples include bisbenzofuranone compounds, azomethine compounds, perylene compounds, and azo compounds, with bisbenzofuranone compounds and perylene compounds being preferred.
  • the compounds described in paragraph 0166 of WO 2022/065215 can be used as organic black colorants.
  • perylene black such as Lumogen Black FK4280
  • perylene black described in paragraphs 0016 to 0020 of JP 2017-226821 A
  • black azo pigments described in JP 2022-121935 A may also be used as organic black colorants.
  • the infrared absorbing colorant is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength longer than 700 nm.
  • the infrared absorbing colorant is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of more than 700 nm to 1800 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of more than 700 nm to 1400 nm, even more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of more than 700 nm to 1200 nm, and particularly preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of more than 700 nm to 1000 nm.
  • the ratio A1 / A2 of the absorbance A1 at a wavelength of 500 nm of the infrared absorbing colorant to the absorbance A2 at the maximum absorption wavelength is preferably 0.08 or less, more preferably 0.04 or less.
  • the infrared absorbing colorant is preferably a pigment, more preferably an organic pigment.
  • Infrared-absorbing colorants include pyrrolopyrrole compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, quaterrylene compounds, merocyanine compounds, croconium compounds, oxonol compounds, iminium compounds, dithiol compounds, triarylmethane compounds, pyrromethene compounds, azomethine compounds, anthraquinone compounds, dibenzofuranone compounds, dithiolene metal complexes, metal oxides, and metal borides. Specific examples of these include the compounds described in paragraph 0114 of WO 2022/065215.
  • examples of infrared absorbing colorants include the compounds described in paragraph 0121 of WO 2022/065215, squarylium compounds described in JP 2020-075959 A, copper complexes described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0135217, croconic acid compounds described in JP 2021-195515 A, infrared absorbing dyes described in JP 2022-022070 A, and the compounds described in WO 2019/021767.
  • the content of the colorant in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 30 to 80% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, and more preferably 65% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 35% by mass or more, and more preferably 40% by mass or more.
  • the pigment content of the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 20 to 80% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 75% by mass or less, more preferably 65% by mass or less, and even more preferably 63% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 25% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, and even more preferably 35% by mass or more.
  • the pigment content in the colorant is preferably 20 to 100% by mass, more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, and even more preferably 70 to 100% by mass.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a chain transfer agent.
  • the chain transfer agent include a thiol compound, a thiocarbonylthio compound, and an aromatic ⁇ -methylalkenyl dimer, and a thiol compound is preferred.
  • the chain transfer agent include the compounds described in paragraphs 0093 to 0113 of WO 2019/188652.
  • the thiol compound used as a chain transfer agent is a compound having one or more thiol groups, preferably a compound having two or more thiol groups.
  • the upper limit of the number of thiol groups contained in the thiol compound is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, and even more preferably 4 or less. It is particularly preferable that the thiol compound be a compound having two thiol groups.
  • the thiol compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (SH-1): L S1 - (SH) n ...Formula (SH-1) (In the formula, SH represents a thiol group, L1 represents an n-valent group, and n represents an integer of 1 or more.)
  • Examples of the n-valent group represented by L S1 in formula (SH-1) include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, —O—, —S—, —NR S1 —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 —, or a group consisting of a combination thereof.
  • R S1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or acyclic.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent or may not have a substituent.
  • the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. Examples of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group include nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, and sulfur atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting L1 is preferably 3 to 100, and more preferably 6 to 50.
  • n represents an integer of 1 or greater.
  • the upper limit of n is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, and even more preferably 4 or less.
  • the lower limit of n is preferably 2 or greater.
  • thiol compounds include the compounds described in the Examples below and the compounds described in paragraphs 0100 to 0103 of WO 2019/188652.
  • Commercially available thiol compounds include PEMP (manufactured by SC Organic Chemical Co., Ltd.), Suncera M (manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Karenz MTBD1, Karenz MTPE1, Karenz MTNR1, and Karenz MTTPMB (all manufactured by Resonac Corporation).
  • PEMP manufactured by SC Organic Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Suncera M manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • Karenz MTBD1, Karenz MTPE1, Karenz MTNR1, and Karenz MTTPMB all manufactured by Resonac Corporation.
  • the thiol compounds described in JP 2020-109068 A can also be used as chain transfer agents.
  • the molecular weight of the chain transfer agent is preferably 200 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 800 or less, and even more preferably 600 or less, because this increases the SH valence per weight.
  • the content of the chain transfer agent in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.001 to 5% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 3% by mass or less, and more preferably 1% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.05% by mass or more, and more preferably 0.01% by mass or more. Only one type of chain transfer agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
  • the curable compound of the present invention preferably contains an amine compound. According to this embodiment, the efficiency of generating radicals from the photopolymerization initiator during exposure can be further improved, and the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound can be further promoted.
  • the molecular weight of the amine compound is preferably 100 to 1,000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 800 or less, and more preferably 500 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 150 or more, and more preferably 200 or more.
  • the amine compound is preferably a compound having 1 to 8 amino groups per molecule, more preferably a compound having 1 to 4 amino groups, and even more preferably a compound having 1 to 2 amino groups.
  • the amine compound is preferably colorless, i.e., the molar absorption coefficient of the amine compound at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is preferably less than 200 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 , and more preferably less than 100 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 .
  • the amine compound may be a primary, secondary, or tertiary amine, but a tertiary amine is preferred.
  • the three groups connected to the nitrogen atom are preferably selected from a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group. Of these, a combination of an alkyl group and an aryl group is most preferred.
  • the amine compound preferably has a carboxyl group, sulfonic acid group, phosphate group, or hydroxyl group in order to enhance alkaline developability and reduce residues.
  • the amine compound is preferably a compound represented by formula (B-1).
  • R a and R b each independently represent a monovalent organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may contain a heteroatom;
  • R c represents a monovalent organic group which may contain a heteroatom;
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • the organic groups represented by R a , R b , and R c include alkyl groups, aryl groups, and heteroaryl groups, and are preferably alkyl groups.
  • the alkyl groups, aryl groups, and heteroaryl groups may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, and a hydroxy group, and are preferably hydroxy groups.
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.
  • amine compounds include Michler's ketone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,5-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclopentane, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclohexanone, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)-4-methylcyclohexanone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)chalcone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)chalcone, and p-dimethylaminocinnamylidene.
  • Indanone p-dimethylaminobenzylideneindanone, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylbiphenylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)isonaphthothiazole, 1,3-bis(4'-dimethylaminobenzal)acetone, 1,3-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)acetone, 3,3'-carbonyl-bis(7-diethylaminocoumarin), 3-a
  • the aromatic hydrocarbons include cetyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-benzyloxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-methoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin,
  • the content of the amine compound is preferably 5 to 1,000 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the specific compound described above.
  • the upper limit is preferably 500 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 200 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or more. Only one type of amine compound may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain an acid anhydride. Even if the specific compound is hydrolyzed to a free OH form, the presence of the acid anhydride allows it to be restored to a photodecomposable oxime compound again. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in sensitivity over time.
  • Acid anhydrides include carboxylic acid anhydrides and sulfonic acid anhydrides, with carboxylic acid anhydrides being preferred.
  • Specific examples of acid anhydrides include acetic anhydride, propionic anhydride, isobutyric anhydride, butyric anhydride, 2-methylbutyric anhydride, pivalic anhydride, isovaleric anhydride, valeric anhydride, 2-methylvaleric anhydride, 3-methylvaleric anhydride, 4-methylvaleric anhydride, hexanoic anhydride, 2-methylhexanoic anhydride, 3-methylhexanoic anhydride, 4-methylhexanoic anhydride, 5-methylhexanoic anhydride, heptanoic anhydride, 2-methylheptanoic anhydride, 3-methylheptanoic anhydride, 4-methylheptanoic anhydride, 5-methylhept ...
  • suitable anhydrides include aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides such as 6-methylheptanoic anhydride, 3-phenylpropionic anhydride, phenylacetic anhydride, methacrylic anhydride, acrylic anhydride, trichloroacetic anhydride, trifluoroacetic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and glutaric anhydride; aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides such as benzoic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and naphthalic anhydride; and sulfocarboxylic acid anhydrides such as 2-sulfobenzoic anhydride.
  • aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides such as 6-methylheptanoic anhydride, 3-phenylpropionic anhydride, phenylacetic anhydride, methacrylic an
  • the content of the acid anhydride is preferably 1 to 200 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the specific compound described above.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 50 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 10 parts by mass or more. Only one type of acid anhydride may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a pigment derivative.
  • the pigment derivative is used, for example, as a dispersing aid.
  • a dispersing aid is a material that enhances the dispersibility of a coloring material such as a pigment in the photocurable composition.
  • Pigment derivatives include compounds having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a dye structure and a triazine structure, and an acid group or a basic group.
  • the dye structures include quinoline dye structures, benzimidazolone dye structures, benzisoindole dye structures, benzothiazole dye structures, iminium dye structures, squarylium dye structures, croconium dye structures, oxonol dye structures, pyrrolopyrrole dye structures, diketopyrrolopyrrole dye structures, azo dye structures, azomethine dye structures, phthalocyanine dye structures, naphthalocyanine dye structures, anthraquinone dye structures, quinacridone dye structures, dioxazine dye structures, perinone dye structures, perylene dye structures, thiazineindigo dye structures, thioindigo dye structures, isoindoline dye structures, isoindolinone dye structures, quinophthalone dye structures, dithiol dye structures, triarylmethane dye structures, and pyrromethene dye structures.
  • Examples of acid groups contained in the pigment derivative include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphate group, a boronic acid group, an imidic acid group, and salts thereof.
  • Examples of atoms or atomic groups constituting the salts include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K +, etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Ca2 + , Mg2 +, etc.), ammonium ions, imidazolium ions, pyridinium ions, and phosphonium ions.
  • the imidic acid group is preferably a group represented by -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 , -CONHSO 2 R X2 , -CONHCOR X3 or -SO 2 NHCOR X4, more preferably a group represented by -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 , -CONHSO 2 R X2 or -SO 2 NHCOR X4 , and even more preferably -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 or -CONHSO 2 R X2 .
  • R X1 to R X4 each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group and aryl group represented by R X1 to R X4 may have a substituent.
  • the substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom.
  • R X1 to R X4 each independently represent an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom, more preferably an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and still more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, and still more preferably 6.
  • Basic groups possessed by pigment derivatives include amino groups, pyridinyl groups and their salts, salts of ammonium groups, and phthalimidomethyl groups.
  • Atoms or atomic groups that constitute the salts include hydroxide ions, halogen ions, carboxylate ions, sulfonate ions, and phenoxide ions.
  • Examples of the amino group include a group represented by —NR x11 R x12 and a cyclic amino group.
  • R x11 and R x12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and are preferably alkyl groups. That is, the amino group is preferably a dialkylamino group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent.
  • cyclic amino groups include pyrrolidine groups, piperidine groups, piperazine groups, and morpholine groups. These groups may further have a substituent.
  • the pigment derivative may be a pigment derivative with excellent visible transparency (hereinafter also referred to as a transparent pigment derivative).
  • the maximum molar absorption coefficient ( ⁇ max) of the transparent pigment derivative in the wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 3000 L mol cm ⁇ 1 or less, more preferably 1000 L mol cm ⁇ 1 or less , and even more preferably 100 L mol cm ⁇ 1 or less.
  • the lower limit of ⁇ max is, for example , 1 L mol cm ⁇ 1 or more , and may be 10 L mol cm ⁇ 1 or more .
  • pigment derivatives include the compounds described in the examples below, the compounds described in paragraph 0124 of WO 2022/085485, the benzimidazolone compounds or salts thereof described in JP 2018-168244 A, the compounds having an isoindoline skeleton described in general formula (1) of Japanese Patent No. 6996282, the compounds described in JP 2019-172968 A, and the compounds described in the specification of Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 115124889.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, and more preferably 3 to 20 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the pigment. Furthermore, the total content of the pigment derivative and colorant is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 60% by mass or more, of the total solids content of the photocurable composition.
  • the upper limit is preferably 80% by mass or less, and more preferably 70% by mass or less. Only one type of pigment derivative may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may also contain a polyalkyleneimine.
  • the polyalkyleneimine is used, for example, as a dispersing aid for pigments.
  • a dispersing aid is a material for improving the dispersibility of coloring materials such as pigments in a photocurable composition.
  • the polyalkyleneimine is a polymer obtained by ring-opening polymerization of an alkyleneimine.
  • the polyalkyleneimine is preferably a polymer having a branched structure containing a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, and a tertiary amino group.
  • the alkyleneimine preferably has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, even more preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 carbon atoms.
  • the molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 200 or more, more preferably 250 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, even more preferably 10,000 or less, and particularly preferably 2,000 or less.
  • the molecular weight value of the polyalkyleneimine if the molecular weight can be calculated from the structural formula, the molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine is the value calculated from the structural formula. On the other hand, if the molecular weight of the specific amine compound cannot be calculated from the structural formula or if calculation is difficult, the number average molecular weight value measured by the boiling point elevation method is used.
  • the number average molecular weight value measured by the viscosity method is used. Furthermore, if it is not possible or difficult to measure by the viscosity method, the number average molecular weight value measured in terms of polystyrene using GPC (gel permeation chromatography) is used.
  • the amine value of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 5 mmol/g or more, more preferably 10 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 15 mmol/g or more.
  • alkyleneimines include ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, 1,2-butyleneimine, and 2,3-butyleneimine. Ethyleneimine or propyleneimine is preferred, and ethyleneimine is more preferred.
  • the polyalkyleneimine is particularly preferably polyethyleneimine.
  • the polyethyleneimine preferably contains primary amino groups in an amount of 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, and even more preferably 30 mol% or more, based on the total of primary amino groups, secondary amino groups, and tertiary amino groups.
  • Commercially available polyethyleneimines include Epomin SP-003, SP-006, SP-012, SP-018, SP-200, and P-1000 (all manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).
  • the content of polyalkyleneimine in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 4.5% by mass or less, more preferably 4% by mass or less, and even more preferably 3% by mass or less.
  • the content of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of pigment.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.6 parts by mass or more, more preferably 1 part by mass or more, and even more preferably 2 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 8 parts by mass or less. Only one type of polyalkyleneimine may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
  • the solvent include organic solvents.
  • the type of solvent is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the composition.
  • organic solvents include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For details of these, please refer to paragraph [0223] of WO 2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • ester-based solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and ketone-based solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, 2-pentanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol a
  • ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate examples include 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxybutanol, methyl ethyl ketone, gamma butyrolactone, sulfolane, anisole, 1,4-diacetoxybutane, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, butane-1,3-diyl diacetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, diacetone alcohol (also known as diacetone alcohol, 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), 2-methoxypropyl acetate, 2-methoxy-1-propanol, and isopropyl alcohol.
  • diacetone alcohol also known as diacetone alcohol, 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone
  • 2-methoxypropyl acetate 2-methoxy-1-propanol
  • the amount of aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) used as organic solvents for environmental reasons (for example, the amount may be 50 ppm by mass (parts per million) or less, 10 ppm by mass or less, or 1 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total amount of organic solvents).
  • aromatic hydrocarbons benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.
  • the amount may be 50 ppm by mass (parts per million) or less, 10 ppm by mass or less, or 1 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total amount of organic solvents).
  • the organic solvent it is preferable for the organic solvent to have a low metal content.
  • the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably 10 parts per billion (ppb) by mass or less. If necessary, organic solvents with metal contents at the ppt (parts per trillion) by mass level may be used. Such organic solvents are provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (The Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).
  • Methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include, for example, distillation (molecular distillation, thin-film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
  • the organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Furthermore, the organic solvent may contain only one type of isomer, or multiple types.
  • the peroxide content in the organic solvent is 0.8 mmol/L or less, and it is even more preferable that it contains substantially no peroxide.
  • the solvent content in the photocurable composition is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 90% by mass.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention is substantially free of environmentally restricted substances.
  • substantially free of environmentally restricted substances means that the content of environmentally restricted substances in the photocurable composition is 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 30 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 10 ppm by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 ppm by mass or less.
  • environmentally restricted substances include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene.
  • distillation methods can be used at any stage, including the stage of the raw materials, the stage of the product obtained by reacting the raw materials (e.g., a resin solution or a polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or the stage of the photocurable composition prepared by mixing these compounds.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a cyclic ether group.
  • the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group.
  • the epoxy group may be an alicyclic epoxy group.
  • the alicyclic epoxy group refers to a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter also referred to as an epoxy compound).
  • Examples of epoxy compounds include compounds having one or more epoxy groups per molecule, and compounds having two or more epoxy groups are preferred.
  • the epoxy compound is preferably a compound having 1 to 100 epoxy groups per molecule.
  • the upper limit of the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound can be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less.
  • the lower limit of the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more.
  • Examples of compounds having a cyclic ether group that can be used include the compounds described in paragraphs 0034 to 0036 of JP 2013-011869 A, paragraphs 0147 to 0156 of JP 2014-043556 A, paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP 2014-089408 A, the compounds described in JP 2017-179172 A, the xanthene-type epoxy resins described in JP 2021-195421 A, and the xanthene-type epoxy resins described in JP 2021-195422 A.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group may be a low molecular weight compound (e.g., a molecular weight of less than 2000, or even less than 1000) or a high molecular weight compound (macromolecule) (e.g., a molecular weight of 1000 or more, or in the case of a polymer, a weight average molecular weight of 1000 or more).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably 200 to 100,000, and more preferably 500 to 50,000.
  • the upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.
  • EHPE3150 manufactured by Daicel Corporation
  • EPICLON N-695 manufactured by DIC Corporation
  • Marproof G-0150M G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, and G-01758 (all manufactured by NOF Corporation, epoxy group-containing polymers).
  • the content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, and more preferably 10% by mass or less. Only one type of compound having a cyclic ether group may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • ultraviolet absorbers include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, triazine compounds, and dibenzoyl compounds. Specific examples of such compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0179 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, the reactive triazine ultraviolet absorbers described in JP-A-2021-178918, the ultraviolet absorbers described in JP-A-2022-007884, the compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass.
  • the ultraviolet absorber may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount thereof is preferably in the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), and N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salts (ammonium salts, cerous salts, etc.). Of these, p-methoxyphenol is preferred.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5 mass%.
  • One type of polymerization inhibitor may be used alone, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount preferably falls within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent.
  • the silane coupling agent include silane compounds having a hydrolyzable group, and preferably silane compounds having both a hydrolyzable group and another functional group.
  • the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent directly bonded to a silicon atom that can form a siloxane bond by at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction.
  • the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, and an acyloxy group, with an alkoxy group being preferred. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group.
  • Examples of functional groups other than the hydrolyzable group include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a thiol group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an amino group, a ureido group, a sulfide group, an isocyanate group, and a phenyl group, with an amino group, a (meth)acryloyl group, and an epoxy group being preferred.
  • Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include the compound described in paragraph 0177 of WO 2022/085485 and the compound described in JP 2019-183020 A.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more. Only one type of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount be in the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the surfactant is preferably a silicone-based surfactant or a fluorine-based surfactant, and more preferably a silicone-based surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include the compounds described in paragraph 0174 of WO 2022/085485.
  • Silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, and SF 8419.
  • OIL all manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc.
  • TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 all manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials
  • KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 all manufactured by BYK-Chemie.
  • compounds having the following structure can also be used as the silicone surfactant.
  • the surfactant content of the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.001% to 5.0% by mass, and more preferably 0.005 to 3.0% by mass. Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be used. If two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount be within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant.
  • antioxidants include phenolic antioxidants, amine-based antioxidants, phosphorus-based antioxidants, and sulfur-based antioxidants.
  • phenolic antioxidants include hindered phenol compounds.
  • the phenolic antioxidant is preferably a compound having a substituent at the position adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group (ortho position).
  • the substituent is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms.
  • the antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenol group and a phosphite ester group in the same molecule.
  • phosphorus-based antioxidants include tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-6-yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl)oxy]ethyl]amine, ethyl bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl)phosphite, and tris(2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl)phosphite.
  • antioxidants include, for example, ADK STAB AO-20, ADK STAB AO-30, ADK STAB AO-40, ADK STAB AO-50, ADK STAB AO-50F, ADK STAB AO-60, ADK STAB AO-60G, ADK STAB AO-80, ADK STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), and JP-650 (manufactured by Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • Antioxidants include the compounds described in paragraphs 0023 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, the compounds described in WO 2017/006600, the compounds described in WO 2017/164024, and the compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371.
  • the content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.01 to 20 mass %, more preferably 0.3 to 15 mass %. Only one type of antioxidant may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain, as needed, a thermal polymerization initiator, a thermal base generator, a photobase generator, an aluminum adhesion aid, a migration inhibitor, a light absorber, an organic titanium compound, a rust inhibitor, a sensitizer, a plasticizer, and other auxiliaries (e.g., conductive particles, fillers, defoamers, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling promoters, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.).
  • auxiliaries e.g., conductive particles, fillers, defoamers, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling promoters, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a metal oxide to adjust the refractive index of the resulting film.
  • metal oxides include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , and SiO 2 .
  • the primary particle size of the metal oxide is preferably 1 to 100 nm, more preferably 3 to 70 nm, and even more preferably 5 to 50 nm.
  • the metal oxide may have a core-shell structure. In this case, the core may be hollow.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a light resistance improver.
  • light resistance improvers include the compounds described in paragraph 0183 of WO 2022/085485.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention is substantially free of terephthalic acid esters.
  • substantially free means that the content of terephthalic acid esters in the total amount of the photocurable composition is 1,000 ppb by mass or less, more preferably 100 ppb by mass or less, and particularly preferably zero.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention have a melamine content of 10,000 ppm by mass or less.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention preferably has a free metal content of 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. Furthermore, the free halogen content is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less.
  • Methods for reducing free metals and halogens in the photocurable composition include washing with ion-exchanged water, filtration, ultrafiltration, and purification with ion-exchange resins.
  • perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids and their salts may be restricted.
  • the content of the above-mentioned compounds in the photocurable composition of the present invention is reduced, the content of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids (particularly perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids having a perfluoroalkyl group with 6 to 8 carbon atoms) and their salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acids (particularly perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acids having a perfluoroalkyl group with 6 to 8 carbon atoms) and their salts is preferably in the range of 0.01 ppb to 1000 ppb, more preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, and even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb, relative to the total solids content of the photocurable composition.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids and their salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acids and their salts.
  • a photocurable composition that is substantially free of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salts may be selected.
  • compounds that can replace restricted compounds include compounds that are exempt from restrictions due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salts, within the maximum allowable range.
  • the water content of the photocurable composition of the present invention is typically 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
  • the water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting its viscosity to adjust the film surface condition (flatness, etc.) and film thickness.
  • the viscosity value can be selected as needed, but is preferably 0.3 mPa ⁇ s to 50 mPa ⁇ s at 25°C, and more preferably 0.5 mPa ⁇ s to 20 mPa ⁇ s. Viscosity can be measured, for example, using a cone-plate type viscometer with the temperature adjusted to 25°C.
  • the container for storing the photocurable composition is not particularly limited, and any known container can be used. Also, the container described in paragraph 0187 of WO 2022/085485 can be used as the container.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above-mentioned components.
  • all components may be simultaneously dissolved and/or dispersed in a solvent to prepare the photocurable composition, or, if necessary, each component may be prepared as two or more appropriate solutions or dispersions, which are mixed at the time of use (application) to prepare the photocurable composition.
  • a process for dispersing the pigment When preparing a photocurable composition, it is preferable to include a process for dispersing the pigment.
  • mechanical forces used to disperse the pigment include compression, squeezing, impact, shear, and cavitation.
  • Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high-speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high-pressure wet atomization, and ultrasonic dispersion.
  • grinding the pigment in a sand mill (bead mill) it is preferable to use small-diameter beads, increase the bead packing rate, and perform the process under conditions that increase grinding efficiency.
  • the process and disperser for dispersing pigments can be suitably used, as described in "Dispersion Technology Encyclopedia,” published by Joho Kiko Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005, or "Dispersion Technology and Industrial Applications Focused on Suspension (Solid/Liquid Dispersion System) - Comprehensive Data Collection,” published by the Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978, as well as the process and disperser described in paragraph 0022 of JP 2015-157893 A.
  • the process for dispersing pigments can be performed by a salt milling process to refine the particles.
  • the materials, equipment, and processing conditions used in the salt milling process can be found in, for example, JP 2015-194521 A and JP 2012-046629 A.
  • materials for beads used for dispersion include zirconia, agate, quartz, titania, tungsten carbide, silicon nitride, alumina, stainless steel, and glass.
  • the beads can also be made of inorganic compounds with a Mohs hardness of 2 or higher.
  • the photocurable composition may contain 1 to 10,000 ppm of these beads.
  • the photocurable composition When preparing the photocurable composition, it is preferable to filter the photocurable composition for purposes such as removing foreign matter and reducing defects.
  • filters and filtration methods used for filtration include those described in paragraphs 0196 to 0199 of WO 2022/085485.
  • the film of the present invention is obtained from the photocurable composition of the present invention described above.
  • the film of the present invention can be used in optical filters such as color filters, infrared transmission filters, and infrared cut filters.
  • the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be adjusted appropriately depending on the purpose.
  • the film thickness is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the film of the present invention When the film of the present invention is used as a color filter, it is preferable that the film of the present invention has a green, red, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow hue. Furthermore, the film of the present invention can be preferably used as the colored pixels of a color filter. Examples of colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels.
  • the method for manufacturing pixels includes the steps of forming a composition layer on a support using the photocurable composition of the present invention, exposing the composition layer to light in a pattern, and developing and removing the unexposed areas of the composition layer. If necessary, a step of drying the composition layer (pre-baking step) and a step of heat-treating the developed pattern (pixels) (post-baking step) may also be provided.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention is used to form a composition layer on a support.
  • the support is not particularly limited and can be selected appropriately depending on the application. Examples include glass substrates and silicon substrates, with a silicon substrate being preferred.
  • the silicon substrate may also be formed with a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, or the like.
  • CCD charge-coupled device
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
  • a black matrix is sometimes formed on the silicon substrate to isolate each pixel.
  • the silicon substrate may also be provided with a base layer to improve adhesion with the upper layer, prevent diffusion of substances, or flatten the substrate surface.
  • the surface contact angle of the base layer is preferably 20 to 70° when measured with diiodomethane, and 30 to 80° when measured with water.
  • the photocurable composition can be applied using known methods. Examples include drop casting, slit coating, spraying, roll coating, spin coating, casting, slit-and-spin, pre-wetting (e.g., the method described in JP 2009-145395 A), various printing methods such as inkjet (e.g., on-demand, piezo, and thermal), nozzle jet printing, and other ejection-based printing, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, and metal mask printing, transfer methods using molds, and nanoimprinting.
  • inkjet e.g., on-demand, piezo, and thermal
  • nozzle jet printing ejection-based printing
  • flexographic printing screen printing
  • gravure printing reverse offset printing
  • metal mask printing transfer methods using molds, and nanoimprinting.
  • the composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). Prebaking is not necessary when producing a film using a low-temperature process. If prebaking is performed, the prebaking temperature is preferably 150°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower, and even more preferably 110°C or lower. The lower limit can be, for example, 50°C or higher, or 80°C or higher.
  • the prebaking time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, and even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Prebaking can be performed using a hot plate, oven, etc.
  • the composition layer is exposed to light in a pattern (exposure process).
  • the composition layer can be exposed to light in a pattern by using a stepper exposure machine or scanner exposure machine through a mask with a predetermined mask pattern. This allows the exposed portions to harden.
  • Light that can be used for exposure includes g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), i-line (wavelength 365 nm), KrF-line (wavelength 248 nm), and ArF-line (wavelength 193 nm).
  • the light used for exposure preferably has a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm, and is preferably excimer laser light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm. Long-wavelength light sources of 400 nm or more can also be used for exposure.
  • the composition layer In the exposure step, it is preferable to irradiate the composition layer with light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm (preferably excimer laser light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm) to expose it in a pattern.
  • light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm preferably excimer laser light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm
  • Pulse exposure is an exposure method in which light is applied and paused repeatedly in short cycles (for example, milliseconds or less).
  • the irradiation dose is preferably, for example, 0.03 to 2.5 J/ cm2 , and more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/ cm2 .
  • the oxygen concentration during exposure can be selected appropriately.
  • exposure can be performed, for example, in a low-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of 19 vol% or less (e.g., 15 vol%, 5 vol%, or substantially oxygen-free), or in a high-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of more than 21 vol% (e.g., 22 vol%, 30 vol%, or 50 vol%).
  • the exposure illuminance can also be set appropriately. For example, it is preferably 100 to 100,000 W/ m2 , and more preferably 500 to 50,000 W/ m2 . Generally, it is 10,000 to 50,000 W/ m2 , but may be 1,000 W/m2 or less to enhance optical contrast. In the present invention, the exposure time can be shortened even at such low illuminance, thereby improving yield.
  • the unexposed portions of the composition layer are developed and removed to form a pattern (pixels).
  • the unexposed portions of the composition layer can be developed and removed using a developer. This causes the unexposed portions of the composition layer in the exposure step to dissolve into the developer, leaving only the photocured portions.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably, for example, 20 to 30°C.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Furthermore, to improve residue removal, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and then supplying fresh developer may be repeated several times.
  • the developer may be an organic solvent or an alkaline developer, with alkaline developers being preferred.
  • the developer and post-development washing (rinsing) method described in paragraph 0214 of WO 2022/085485 can be used.
  • Additional exposure or post-baking is a post-development curing treatment to ensure complete curing.
  • the heating temperature for post-baking is preferably 100 to 300°C, and more preferably 200 to 270°C.
  • Post-baking can be performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), or high-frequency heater to heat the developed film to the above conditions.
  • a heating means such as a hot plate, convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), or high-frequency heater to heat the developed film to the above conditions.
  • the light used for exposure has a wavelength of 400 nm or less.
  • the additional exposure may also be performed using the method described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0122130.
  • the optical filter of the present invention includes the above-described film of the present invention.
  • Types of optical filters include color filters, infrared cut filters, and infrared transmission filters, and color filters are preferred.
  • the color filter preferably has the film of the present invention as its pixel, and more preferably has the film of the present invention as its color pixel.
  • the optical filter may have a protective layer provided on the surface of the film of the present invention.
  • a protective layer By providing a protective layer, various functions can be imparted, such as oxygen blocking, low reflectivity, hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity, and blocking of light of specific wavelengths (ultraviolet rays, infrared rays, etc.).
  • the thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • Methods for forming the protective layer include a method of applying a resin composition for forming the protective layer, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of attaching a molded resin with an adhesive.
  • components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, polyol resins, polyvinylidene chloride resins, melamine resins, urethane resins, aramid resins, polyamide resins, alkyd resins, epoxy resins, modified silicone resins, fluororesins, polyacrylonitrile resins, cellulose resins, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4 , and the protective layer may contain two or more of these components.
  • the protective layer in the case of a protective layer intended to block oxygen, the protective layer preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4.
  • the protective layer in the case of a protective layer intended to reduce reflection, the protective layer preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluororesin.
  • a protective layer by applying a resin composition When forming a protective layer by applying a resin composition, known methods such as spin coating, casting, screen printing, and inkjet printing can be used to apply the resin composition. Known organic solvents (e.g., propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.) can be used as the organic solvent contained in the resin composition.
  • known chemical vapor deposition methods thermal chemical vapor deposition, plasma chemical vapor deposition, photochemical vapor deposition
  • the chemical vapor deposition method can be used as the chemical vapor deposition method.
  • the protective layer may contain additives such as organic or inorganic fine particles, absorbers of specific wavelengths of light (e.g., ultraviolet light, infrared light, etc.), refractive index adjusters, antioxidants, adhesives, surfactants, etc., as needed.
  • organic and inorganic fine particles include polymeric fine particles (e.g., silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride, magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, etc.
  • Known absorbers of specific wavelengths of light can be used.
  • the content of these additives can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by weight, and more preferably 1 to 60% by weight, of the total weight of the protective layer.
  • the protective layer may be one described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP 2017-151176 A.
  • the optical filter may have a structure in which each pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partitions, for example in a grid pattern.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the above-described film of the present invention.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it has the film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device, but examples thereof include the following configurations.
  • the device has a substrate on which multiple photodiodes constituting the light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor or a CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor) and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like; a light-shielding film on the photodiodes and transfer electrodes with only the light-receiving portions of the photodiodes open; a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film to cover the entire light-shielding film and the light-receiving portions of the photodiodes; and a color filter on the device protective film.
  • a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor or a CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor
  • transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like
  • a light-shielding film on the photodiodes and
  • the device protective film may have a light-focusing means (e.g., a microlens, etc.; the same applies below) on the device protective film below the color filter (closer to the substrate), or a light-focusing means on the color filter.
  • the color filter may also have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partitions, for example, in a grid pattern. In this case, it is preferable that the partitions have a lower refractive index than each colored pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include those described in JP 2012-227478 A, JP 2014-179577 A, and WO 2018/043654 A.
  • an ultraviolet absorbing layer may be provided within the structure of the solid-state imaging element to improve light resistance.
  • Imaging devices equipped with the solid-state imaging element of the present invention can be used in digital cameras, electronic devices with imaging functions (such as mobile phones), as well as in-vehicle cameras and surveillance cameras.
  • the image display device of the present invention has the above-described film of the present invention.
  • image display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence display devices. Definitions of image display devices and details of each image display device are described, for example, in “Electronic Display Devices” (written by Akio Sasaki, published by Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd. in 1990) and “Display Devices” (written by Nobuaki Ibuki, published by Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd. in 1989).
  • Liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in “Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology” (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd. in 1994). There are no particular limitations on the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied, and the present invention can be applied to various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology.”
  • the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention includes a compound represented by the above formula (1-A) or formula (1-B).
  • Synthesis Example 8 Synthesis of Compound A-245 18.4 g of diphenyl sulfide was added to a three-neck flask and dissolved in 100 mL of chlorobenzene. After cooling to 5°C, 14.3 g of aluminum chloride was added, followed by the dropwise addition of 21.5 g of 4-(t-butoxy)benzoic acid chloride over 10 minutes. The reaction solution was heated to 25°C and stirred for an additional 2 hours. Next, the reaction solution was cooled again to 5°C, and 17.1 g of aluminum chloride was added, followed by the dropwise addition of 16.5 g of 3-cyclopentylpropanoyl chloride over 10 minutes. The reaction solution was heated to 25°C and stirred for an additional 2 hours. The resulting reaction solution was added to 100 mL of ice water and extracted with 200 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer was concentrated to obtain 35.0 g of intermediate (A-245a).
  • intermediate (A-245a) 35.0 g was dissolved in 100 mL of toluene, 30 mL of trifluoromethanemethanesulfonic acid was added, and the mixture was heated and stirred at 60°C for 5 hours to deprotect the tert-butyl group. The resulting reaction solution was washed with ethyl acetate and water, and the organic layer was concentrated, and then methanol was added to precipitate crystals, yielding 27.5 g of intermediate (A-245b).
  • intermediate (A-245b) 21.5 g was placed in a three-neck flask and dissolved in 100 mL of pyridine. 15.0 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride was added to this, and the mixture was stirred at 25°C for 10 hours. The resulting reaction solution was added to 200 mL of isopropyl alcohol and 200 mL of 1 M aqueous hydrochloric acid solution, and the resulting solid was collected by filtration. This crude product was recrystallized from acetonitrile to obtain 20.5 g of intermediate (A-245c).
  • Pigment Red 264 (red pigment) PR272 C.I. Pigment Red 272 (red pigment)
  • PR291 C.I. Pigment Red 291 (red pigment)
  • PO71 C.I. Pigment Orange 71 (orange pigment)
  • PB15:6 C.I. Pigment Blue 15:6 (blue pigment)
  • PV23 C.I.
  • Pigment Violet 23 (purple pigment)
  • P-1 Compound having the following structure (pyrrolopyrrole compound, infrared absorbing pigment)
  • P-2 Compound having the following structure (squarylium compound, infrared absorbing pigment)
  • P-3 Titanium black (TiOxNy) (black pigment, manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Corporation)
  • P-4 Titanium oxide (white pigment, TTO-51(C), manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Kaisha, Ltd.)
  • P-5 Compound having the following structure (magenta dye)
  • (resin) C2-1 Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • C2-2 Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • C2-3 Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • Photocurable compositions were produced by mixing the types of materials shown in the table below with 0.2 parts by mass of KF-6001 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) as a surfactant, 0.2 parts by mass of Adekastab AO-80 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) as an antioxidant, and 0.01 parts by mass of p-methoxyphenol as a polymerization inhibitor.
  • KF-6001 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Adekastab AO-80 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation
  • p-methoxyphenol p-methoxyphenol
  • Dispersions R1 to R12, G1 to G12, B1 to B7, IR1 to IR7, Bk1 to Bk4, and Wh1 the above-mentioned dispersions R1 to R12, G1 to G12, B1 to B7, IR1 to IR7, Bk1 to Bk4, and Wh1
  • (resin) B-1 Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 11,000; acid value: 69 mg KOH/g)
  • B-2 Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • B-3 Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 12,000; acid value: 80 mg KOH/g)
  • B-4 Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio; weight-average molecular weight: 26,000, polyamic acid resin)
  • B-5 Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio; weight average molecular weight 25,000, polyimide resin)
  • B-6 Resin having the following structure (the numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight 27,500, acid value 2 mg KOH/g, amine value 1 mg KOH/g, imidization rate 10%)
  • B-7 Resin having the following structure (the numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight 24,500, acid value 4 mg KOH/g, amine value 2 mg KOH/g, imidization rate 92%)
  • M-1 A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture of the compound on the left (a hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) and the compound on the right (a pentafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) in a molar ratio of 7:3)
  • M-2 Compound of the following structure
  • M-3 Compound having the following structure
  • M-4 Compound having the following structure
  • M-5 Compound having the following structure
  • M-6 CN9906NS (manufactured by Arkema, an aliphatic polyfunctional urethane acrylate having a tertiary amine structure (compound described in JP 2024-119784 A)
  • A-1 to A-339 Compounds A-1 to A-339 shown as specific examples of the specific compounds described above cA-1 and cA-2: Compounds having the following structures (comparative compounds) a-1 to a-14: Compounds having the following structures (other photopolymerization initiators) a-15: A mixture of 14 equal parts of TR-PBG-301, TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-305, TR-PBG-309, TR-PBG-3054, TR-PBG-3057, TR-PBG-314, TR-PBG-327, TR-PBG-345, TR-PBG-346, TR-PBG-358, TR-PBG-365, TR-PBG-380, and TR-PBG-610 (all manufactured by TRONLY) (another photopolymerization initiator) a-16: A mixture of equal amounts of three types of NCI-730, NCI-831E, and NCI-930 (all manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) (another photopoly
  • T-1 to T-8 Compounds having the following structure.
  • T-9 A mixture of equal amounts of a thermal polymerization initiator (Perbutyl C (peroxide) (manufactured by NOF Corporation)), a thermal base generator (U-CAT SA102 (carboxylic acid salt of DBU) (manufactured by San-Apro Co., Ltd.)), a rust inhibitor (benzotriazole), a light absorber (ADK STAB AO-80 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation)), and a polymerization inhibitor (di-t-butylhydroxytoluene (BHT)).
  • a thermal polymerization initiator Perbutyl C (peroxide) (manufactured by NOF Corporation)
  • U-CAT SA102 carboxylic acid salt of DBU) (manufactured by San-Apro Co., Ltd.)
  • a rust inhibitor benzotriazole
  • ADK STAB AO-80 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation
  • An underlayer-forming composition (CT-4000L, manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.) was applied to an 8-inch (20.32 cm) silicon wafer using a spin coater so that the thickness after post-baking would be 0.1 ⁇ m, and the wafer was heated at 220° C. for 300 seconds using a hot plate to form an underlayer, thereby obtaining a silicon wafer with an underlayer.
  • Each of the photocurable compositions obtained above was applied by spin coating onto the underlayer of a silicon wafer with an underlayer so that the film thickness after application would be 0.6 ⁇ m, and then heated using a hot plate at 110° C. for 2 minutes to form a composition layer.
  • the obtained composition layer was exposed to light (i-line) having a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask having a 0.45 ⁇ m square pattern using an i-line stepper exposure machine under exposure conditions of an illuminance of 20,000 W/m 2 and an exposure dose of 20 to 300 mJ/cm 2 (exposure condition 1), or an illuminance of 2,000 W/cm 2 and an exposure dose of 20 to 300 mJ/cm 2 (exposure condition 2).
  • the exposed composition layer was subjected to shower development at 23°C for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) as a developer.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • Ea/Eb The ratio (Ea/Eb) of the exposure dose Ea required for the pattern line width to reach 0.5 ⁇ m when exposed under exposure condition 1 to the exposure dose Eb required for the pattern line width to reach 0.5 ⁇ m when exposed under exposure condition 2 was calculated, and the exposure illuminance dependency was evaluated according to the following criteria: The closer the value of Ea/Eb is to 1, the smaller the exposure illuminance dependency of the exposure dose is.
  • Each photocurable composition obtained above was spin-coated onto the underlayer of the underlayer-equipped silicon wafer so that the film thickness after coating was 0.6 ⁇ m, and then heated at 110° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to form a composition layer.
  • the resulting composition layer was exposed to light (i-line) with a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask having a 0.45 ⁇ m square pattern using an i-line stepper exposure machine at an illuminance of 20,000 W/m 2 and the above-mentioned exposure amount Ea.
  • the exposed composition layer was shower-developed for 60 seconds at 23° C.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • Za/Zb The ratio (Za/Zb) of the residue area ratio Za when formed using developer 1 to the residue area ratio Zb when formed using developer 2 was calculated, and the developability was evaluated according to the following criteria. The closer Za/Zb is to 1, the smaller the developer concentration dependency and the more excellent the developability.
  • D: Za/Zb is 0.70 or more and less than 0.80, or 1.20 or more and less than 1.30.
  • Za/Zb is less than 0.70, or 1.30 or more.
  • Each photocurable composition obtained above was applied by spin coating onto the underlayer of the underlayer-equipped silicon wafer so that the film thickness after application was 0.6 ⁇ m, and then heated at 110°C for 2 minutes using a hot plate to form a composition layer.
  • the resulting composition layer was exposed to light (i-line) with a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask having a 0.45 ⁇ m square pattern using an i-line stepper exposure machine, with the illuminance being 2000 W/ m2 and the exposure dose varying within the range of 20 to 300 mJ/ cm2 .
  • the exposed composition layer was then shower-developed for 60 seconds at 23°C using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) as the developer.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • Water droplets adhering to the pattern surface were then removed with air, and the pattern was allowed to dry naturally to form a pattern (pixels).
  • the silicon wafer with the formed pixels was observed at 20,000x magnification using a scanning electron microscope (S-4800H, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Corporation). In the observed pixel, the exposure dose Ea required for the pattern line width to reach 0.5 ⁇ m was calculated.
  • Ea is less than 100 mJ/cm 2
  • Ea is 100 mJ/cm 2 or more and less than 200 mJ/cm 2
  • C Ea is 200 mJ/cm 2 or more and less than 500 mJ/cm 2
  • D Ea is 500 mJ/cm 2 or more and less than 1000 mJ/cm 2
  • Ea is 1000 mJ/cm 2 or more

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a photocurable composition containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound, wherein the photopolymerization initiator includes a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B). Also provided are a pixel production method, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging element, and an image display device using said photocurable composition. Further provided is a photopolymerization initiator including said compound.

Description

光硬化性組成物、画素の製造方法、膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および光重合開始剤Photocurable composition, pixel manufacturing method, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator

 本発明は、光重合開始剤と重合性化合物とを含む光硬化性組成物に関する。また、本発明は、光硬化性組成物を用いた画素の製造方法、膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置に関する。また、本発明は、光重合開始剤に関する。 The present invention relates to a photocurable composition containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound. The present invention also relates to a pixel manufacturing method, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the photocurable composition. The present invention also relates to a photopolymerization initiator.

 光重合開始剤と重合性化合物とを含む光硬化性組成物は、光を照射することによって重合硬化させることができるため、光学フィルタ、光硬化性インキ、感光性印刷版、各種フォトレジスト等に用いられている。 Photocurable compositions containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound can be polymerized and cured by exposure to light, and are therefore used in optical filters, photocurable inks, photosensitive printing plates, various photoresists, and more.

 特許文献1には、オキシム化合物を含む光重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と含む感光性着色組成物を用いて、フォトリソグラフィ法でパターン形成して画素を形成することが開示されている。 Patent Document 1 discloses that pixels are formed by forming a pattern using a photolithography method using a photopolymerization initiator containing an oxime compound and a photosensitive coloring composition containing a polymerizable compound.

特開2022-063556号公報Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-063556

 近年ではカラーフィルタなどの光学フィルタを備えた固体撮像素子についての高解像化も進められている。このため、カラーフィルタなどの光学フィルタについて、画素のサイズの更なる微細化が検討されている。 In recent years, efforts have been made to increase the resolution of solid-state imaging devices equipped with optical filters such as color filters. For this reason, further miniaturization of pixel size for optical filters such as color filters is being considered.

 露光時において、露光照度を下げることにより、露光部と未露光部とのコントラストを改善することはできるものの、露光照度を下げることによって感度が低下し、露光部における膜の硬化性が不足しやすい傾向にあった。 During exposure, lowering the exposure illuminance can improve the contrast between exposed and unexposed areas, but lowering the exposure illuminance also tends to reduce sensitivity and result in insufficient curing of the film in the exposed areas.

 よって、本発明の目的は、露光照度依存性が小さく、低照度で露光した場合であっても、感度に優れ、密着性に優れた画素を形成することのできる光硬化性組成物を提供することにある。また、本発明の目的は、画素の製造方法、膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および光重合開始剤を提供することにある。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a photocurable composition that has little exposure illuminance dependency and is capable of forming pixels with excellent sensitivity and adhesion even when exposed to low illuminance. Another object of the present invention is to provide a pixel manufacturing method, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a photopolymerization initiator.

 本発明者の検討によれば、後述する光硬化性組成物により上記目的を達成できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。よって、本発明は以下を提供する。 The inventors' research led to the discovery that the above objectives can be achieved using the photocurable composition described below, leading to the completion of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention provides the following:

 <1> 光重合開始剤と、重合性化合物とを含有する光硬化性組成物であって、
 上記光重合開始剤は、式(1-A)または式(1-B)で表される化合物を含む、光硬化性組成物;
 式(1-A)中、X1aは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基またはNRy1y2-を表し、Ry1はアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry2は水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry1とRy2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよく、
 Ar1aは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2aはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 naは0または1を表し、
 maは0または1を表し、
 sは1~3の整数を表す;
 式(1-B)中、X1bは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1bはt価の連結基を表し、
 Ar1bは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1bはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2bはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 nbは0または1を表し、
 mbは0または1を表し、
 tは2~4の整数を表す;
 式(X1-1)中、*は結合手を表し、
 X11およびX12は、それぞれ独立して芳香族炭化水素基を表し、
 L11およびL12はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-または-CO-を表し、RL1~RL3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、L11とL12は同時に単結合ではなく、
 L13は単結合または-CO-を表し、
 X13は単結合を表すか、または、ピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基を表し、X13が単結合の場合は、L13は単結合であり、
 aは0または1を表し、aが0の場合、L11は存在しない;
 ただし、L13およびX13が単結合で、X11およびX12がベンゼン環基で、L12が-NRL1-の場合、aは0であるか、または、aが1で、かつ、L11が、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-もしくは-CO-である。
 <2> 上記式(1-A)のnaは1であり、上記式(1-B)のnbは1である、<1>に記載の光硬化性組成物。
 <3> 上記式(1-A)のR2a、および、上記式(1-B)のR2bは、それぞれ独立して式(Z-1)で表される基である、<1>または<2>に記載の光硬化性組成物;
 式(Z-1)中、*は結合手を表し、
 LZ1は単結合またはアルキレン基を表し、
 LZ2~LZ4は、それぞれ独立して、-CRLZ1LZ2-、-O-、-S-または-NRLZ3-を表し、RLZ1~RLZ3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 RZ1およびRZ2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、RZ1とRZ2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよい;
 ただし、LZ2~LZ4のうち少なくとも2つは-CRLZ1LZ2-である。
 <4> 上記式(1-A)のR2a、および、上記式(1-B)のR2bは、それぞれ独立して式(Z-2)で表される基である、<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の光硬化性組成物;
 式(Z-2)中、*は結合手を表し、
 LZ11は単結合または炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、
 RZ11~RZ14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、
 LZ11は、RZ11またはRZ12と結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 LZ12は、-(CRLZ11LZ12-を表し、RLZ11およびRLZ12は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、pは1~5の整数を表す。
 <5> 更に、色材を含む、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の光硬化性組成物。
 <6> 更に、樹脂を含む、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の光硬化性組成物。
 <7> 上記樹脂は、架橋性基を有する樹脂を含む、<6>に記載の光硬化性組成物。
 <8> 上記樹脂は、グラフト樹脂を含む、<6>または<7>に記載の光硬化性組成物。
 <9> 上記樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミック酸樹脂およびポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、<6>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の光硬化性組成物。
 <10> 上記樹脂は、式(B-1)で表される部分構造、及び、式(B-2)で表される部分構造の少なくとも一方を有する、<6>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の光硬化性組成物;
 式(B-1)中、XB1は4+m価の有機基を表し、YB1は2+n価の有機基を表し、RB1およびRB2はそれぞれ独立して重合性基を含む基を表し、nは0~6の整数を表し、mは0~6の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である;
 式(B-2)中、XB1は4+m価の有機基を表し、YB1は2+n価の有機基を表し、Ax1およびAx2はそれぞれ独立して1価の有機基を表し、RB1およびRB2はそれぞれ独立して重合性基を含む基を表し、nは0~6の整数を表し、mは0~6の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数であり、ただし、Ax1及びAx2の少なくとも一方が重合性基を有する場合は、n+mは0であってもよい。
 <11> 更に、連鎖移動剤を含む、<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の光硬化性組成物。
 <12> <1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の光硬化性組成物を用いて支持体上に組成物層を形成する工程と、
 上記組成物層に波長150~400nmの光を照射してパターン状に露光する工程と、
 上記組成物層の未露光部を現像除去する工程と、を含む、画素の製造方法。
 <13> <1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の光硬化性組成物を硬化して得られる膜。
 <14> <13>に記載の膜を含む固体撮像素子。
 <15> <13>に記載の膜を含む画像表示装置。
 <16> 式(1-A)または式(1-B)で表される化合物を含む光重合開始剤;
 式(1-A)中、X1aは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基またはNRy1y2-を表し、Ry1はアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry2は水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry1とRy2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよく、
 Ar1aは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2aはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 naは0または1を表し、
 maは0または1を表し、
 sは1~3の整数を表す;
 式(1-B)中、X1bは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1bはt価の連結基を表し、
 Ar1bは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1bはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2bはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 nbは0または1を表し、
 mbは0または1を表し、
 tは2~4の整数を表す;
 式(X1-1)中、*は結合手を表し、
 X11およびX12は、それぞれ独立して芳香族炭化水素基を表し、
 L11およびL12はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-または-CO-を表し、RL1~RL3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、L11とL12は同時に単結合ではなく、
 L13は単結合または-CO-を表し、
 X13は単結合を表すか、または、ピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基を表し、X13が単結合の場合は、L13は単結合であり、
 aは0または1を表し、aが0の場合、L11は存在しない;
 ただし、L13およびX13が単結合で、X11およびX12がベンゼン環基で、L12が-NRL1-の場合、aは0であるか、または、aが1で、かつ、L11が、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-もしくは-CO-である。
<1> A photocurable composition containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound,
The photopolymerization initiator is a photocurable composition containing a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B);
In formula (1-A), X 1a represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —, R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
Ar 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R2a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
na represents 0 or 1;
ma represents 0 or 1;
s represents an integer of 1 to 3;
In formula (1-B), X 1b represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1b represents a t-valent linking group;
Ar 1b represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R 2b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
nb represents 0 or 1;
mb represents 0 or 1;
t represents an integer of 2 to 4;
In formula (X1-1), * represents a bond.
X11 and X12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group;
L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —S—, —NR L1 —, —CR L2 R L3 —, or —CO—; R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group; L 11 and L 12 are not simultaneously single bonds;
L13 represents a single bond or —CO—;
X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond;
a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L 11 is absent;
However, when L 13 and X 13 are single bonds, X 11 and X 12 are benzene ring groups, and L 12 is -NR L1 -, a is 0, or a is 1 and L 11 is -O-, -S-, -NR L1 -, -CR L2 R L3 -, or -CO-.
<2> The photocurable composition according to <1>, wherein na in the formula (1-A) is 1 and nb in the formula (1-B) is 1.
<3> The photocurable composition according to <1> or <2>, in which R 2a in the formula (1-A) and R 2b in the formula (1-B) are each independently a group represented by formula (Z-1);
In formula (Z-1), * represents a bond.
L Z1 represents a single bond or an alkylene group;
L Z2 to L Z4 each independently represent —CR LZ1 R LZ2 —, —O—, —S— or —NR LZ3 —, and R LZ1 to R LZ3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group;
R Z1 and R Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R Z1 and R Z2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
However, at least two of L Z2 to L Z4 are -CR LZ1 R LZ2 -.
<4> The photocurable composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, in which R 2a in the formula (1-A) and R 2b in the formula (1-B) are each independently a group represented by formula (Z-2).
In formula (Z-2), * represents a bond.
L Z11 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R Z11 to R Z14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
L Z11 may be bonded to R Z11 or R Z12 to form a ring;
L Z12 represents —(CR LZ11 R LZ12 ) p —, R LZ11 and R LZ12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and p represents an integer of 1 to 5.
<5> The photocurable composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, further comprising a colorant.
<6> The photocurable composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, further comprising a resin.
<7> The photocurable composition according to <6>, wherein the resin includes a resin having a crosslinkable group.
<8> The photocurable composition according to <6> or <7>, wherein the resin includes a graft resin.
<9> The photocurable composition according to any one of <6> to <8>, wherein the resin includes at least one selected from a (meth)acrylic resin, a polyester resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin, a polyimide resin, a polyamic acid resin, and a polybenzoxazole resin.
<10> The photocurable composition according to any one of <6> to <9>, wherein the resin has at least one of a partial structure represented by formula (B-1) and a partial structure represented by formula (B-2).
In formula (B-1), X represents a 4+m-valent organic group, Y represents a 2+n-valent organic group, R and R each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group, n represents an integer of 0 to 6, m represents an integer of 0 to 6, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more;
In formula (B-2), X represents a 4+m-valent organic group, Y represents a 2 +n-valent organic group, A and A each independently represent a monovalent organic group, R and R each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group, n represents an integer of 0 to 6, m represents an integer of 0 to 6, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more, provided that when at least one of A and A has a polymerizable group, n+m may be 0.
<11> The photocurable composition according to any one of <1> to <10>, further comprising a chain transfer agent.
<12> A step of forming a composition layer on a support using the photocurable composition according to any one of <1> to <11>;
a step of patternwise exposing the composition layer to light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm;
and developing and removing the unexposed portion of the composition layer.
<13> A film obtained by curing the photocurable composition according to any one of <1> to <11>.
<14> A solid-state imaging device comprising the film according to <13>.
<15> An image display device comprising the film according to <13>.
<16> A photopolymerization initiator containing a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B);
In formula (1-A), X 1a represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —, R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
Ar 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R2a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
na represents 0 or 1;
ma represents 0 or 1;
s represents an integer of 1 to 3;
In formula (1-B), X 1b represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1b represents a t-valent linking group;
Ar 1b represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R 2b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
nb represents 0 or 1;
mb represents 0 or 1;
t represents an integer of 2 to 4;
In formula (X1-1), * represents a bond.
X11 and X12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group;
L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —S—, —NR L1 —, —CR L2 R L3 —, or —CO—; R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group; L 11 and L 12 are not simultaneously single bonds;
L13 represents a single bond or —CO—;
X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond;
a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L 11 is absent;
However, when L 13 and X 13 are single bonds, X 11 and X 12 are benzene ring groups, and L 12 is -NR L1 -, a is 0, or a is 1 and L 11 is -O-, -S-, -NR L1 -, -CR L2 R L3 -, or -CO-.

 本発明によれば、露光照度依存性が小さく、低照度で露光した場合であっても、感度に優れ、密着性に優れた画素を形成することのできる光硬化性組成物を提供することができる。また、本発明によれば、画素の製造方法、膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および光重合開始剤を提供することができる。 The present invention can provide a photocurable composition that has little exposure illuminance dependency and can form pixels with excellent sensitivity and adhesion even when exposed to low illuminance. The present invention can also provide a pixel manufacturing method, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a photopolymerization initiator.

 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も露光に含める。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値である。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
 本明細書において、顔料とは、溶剤に対して溶解しにくい色材を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
The present invention will be described in detail below.
In this specification, the word "to" is used to mean that the numerical values before and after it are included as the lower limit and upper limit.
In the description of groups (atomic groups) in this specification, when a notation does not specify whether the group is substituted or unsubstituted, it encompasses both unsubstituted groups (atomic groups) and substituted groups (atomic groups). For example, the term "alkyl group" encompasses not only unsubstituted alkyl groups (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also substituted alkyl groups (substituted alkyl groups).
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Examples of light used for exposure include the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and other actinic rays or radiation.
In this specification, "(meth)acrylate" refers to either or both of acrylate and methacrylate, "(meth)acrylic" refers to either or both of acrylic and methacrylic, and "(meth)acryloyl" refers to either or both of acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In this specification, in the structural formulae, Me represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In this specification, the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography) in terms of polystyrene.
In this specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
In this specification, a pigment means a coloring material that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
In this specification, the term "process" includes not only an independent process but also a process that cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes as long as the intended effect of the process is achieved.

<光硬化性組成物>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、
 光重合開始剤と、重合性化合物とを含有する光硬化性組成物であって、
 上記光重合開始剤は、式(1-A)または式(1-B)で表される化合物を含む、ことを特徴とする。
<Photocurable composition>
The photocurable composition of the present invention comprises
A photocurable composition containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound,
The photopolymerization initiator is characterized by containing a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B).

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、露光照度依存性が小さく、低照度で露光した場合であっても、感度に優れ、密着性に優れた画素を形成することができる。このような効果が得られる理由は、以下によるものであると推測される。
 本発明の光硬化性組成物に含まれる光重合開始剤は、式(1-A)または式(1-B)で表される化合物を含むものである。これらの化合物は、芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基(式(1-A)のAr1a、式(1-B)のAr1b)にアシルオイルオキシ構造(式(1-A)の「Y1a-COO-」、式(1-B)の「Y1b-COO-」)が結合した構造を有しているので、露光時において、上記アシルオイルオキシ構造の部分において光フリース転移が起こり、アシルラジカルおよび芳香族性ヒドロキシ基が生成すると推測される。芳香族性ヒドロキシ基は、ハメットσ値からもわかるように強い電子供与性を示す。上記化合物において、式(1-A)のX1aおよび式(1-B)のX1bは、それぞれ式(X1-1)で表される基であることにより、上記光フリース転移によって生じた芳香族性ヒドロキシ基によって、遷移双極子モーメントが増大し、高い吸収遷移を有すると推測される。このため、露光部においては、光重合開始剤の光吸収をより高めることができ、低照度で露光した場合であっても、ラジカルを効率よく発生させることができると推測される。
 一方、非露光部においては、上記光フリース転移が生じないので、上記化合物の光吸収は変化しないと推測される。このため、露光部と非露光部のラジカル発生量のコントラストをつけることができると推測される。
 このような理由により、本発明の光硬化性組成物は、露光照度依存性が小さく、低照度で露光した場合であっても、感度に優れ、密着性に優れた画素を形成することができると推測される。
The photocurable composition of the present invention has little dependence on exposure illuminance, and even when exposed to low illuminance, it can form pixels with excellent sensitivity and adhesion. The reason for this effect is presumed to be as follows.
The photopolymerization initiator contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a compound represented by formula (1-A ) or formula (1-B). These compounds have a structure in which an acyloyloxy structure ("Y 1a -COO-" in formula (1-A) and "Y 1b -COO-" in formula (1-B)) is bonded to an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group (Ar 1a in formula (1-A) and Ar 1b in formula (1-B)). It is therefore presumed that upon exposure to light, a photo-Fries rearrangement occurs at the acyloyloxy structure, producing an acyl radical and an aromatic hydroxy group. The aromatic hydroxy group exhibits strong electron-donating properties, as can be seen from the Hammett σ value. In the above compound, X 1a in formula (1-A) and X 1b in formula (1-B) are each a group represented by formula (X1-1), and it is presumed that the aromatic hydroxy group generated by the photo-Fries transition increases the transition dipole moment and results in a high absorption transition. Therefore, it is presumed that the light absorption of the photopolymerization initiator can be further increased in the exposed area, and that radicals can be efficiently generated even when exposed to low illuminance.
On the other hand, in the non-exposed area, the optical Fries transition does not occur, and therefore the light absorption of the compound is presumably unchanged, which is presumably why a contrast can be created between the amount of radicals generated in the exposed and non-exposed areas.
For these reasons, it is presumed that the photocurable composition of the present invention has little exposure illuminance dependency, and can form pixels with excellent sensitivity and adhesion even when exposed to low illuminance.

 また、光硬化性組成物は、現像性に優れており、現像残渣の発生をより抑制することができる。特にアルカリ現像液を用いて現像した場合において、現像残渣の発生をより抑制することができ、低アルカリ濃度のアルカリ現像液を用いた場合であっても、現像残渣の発生を抑制することができる。このため、アルカリ現像液のアルカリ濃度にばらつきがあった場合であっても、現像残渣の発生を抑制することができる。上述のように、露光部においては、上記化合物は光フリース転移によって、上記芳香族性ヒドロキシ基が生成されると推測される。光フリース転移によって生じた上記芳香族性ヒドロキシ基により、光重合開始剤の分解物のアルカリ現像液への溶解性が向上したため、このような効果が得られたと推測される。 Furthermore, the photocurable composition has excellent developability and can further suppress the generation of development residues. In particular, when developed using an alkaline developer, the generation of development residues can be further suppressed, and even when an alkaline developer with a low alkaline concentration is used, the generation of development residues can be suppressed. Therefore, even when the alkaline concentration of the alkaline developer varies, the generation of development residues can be suppressed. As described above, it is presumed that the aromatic hydroxy group is generated in the exposed area of the compound by the photo-Friess transition. It is presumed that the aromatic hydroxy group generated by the photo-Friess transition improves the solubility of the decomposition products of the photopolymerization initiator in the alkaline developer, thereby achieving this effect.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、更に色材を含むことが好ましい。色材を含む光硬化性組成物は、光学フィルタ用の光硬化性組成物として好ましく用いられる。光学フィルタとしては、カラーフィルタ、赤外線透過フィルタ、赤外線カットフィルタなどが挙げられ、カラーフィルタであることが好ましい。 The photocurable composition of the present invention preferably further contains a colorant. Photocurable compositions containing a colorant are preferably used as photocurable compositions for optical filters. Examples of optical filters include color filters, infrared transmission filters, and infrared cut filters, with color filters being preferred.

 カラーフィルタとしては、特定の波長の光を透過させる着色画素を有するフィルタが挙げられる。着色画素としては、赤色画素、緑色画素、青色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素、黄色画素などが挙げられる。カラーフィルタの着色画素は、有彩色色材を含む光硬化性組成物を用いて形成することができる。 An example of a color filter is a filter having colored pixels that transmit light of a specific wavelength. Examples of colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels. The colored pixels of a color filter can be formed using a photocurable composition containing a chromatic colorant.

 赤外線カットフィルタの極大吸収波長は、波長700~1800nmの範囲に存在することが好ましく、波長700~1300nmの範囲に存在することがより好ましく、波長700~1000nmの範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。また、赤外線カットフィルタの波長400~650nmの全範囲での透過率は70%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、90%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、波長700~1800nmの範囲の少なくとも1点での透過率は20%以下であることが好ましい。また、赤外線カットフィルタの極大吸収波長における吸光度Amaxと、波長550nmにおける吸光度A550との比(吸光度Amax/吸光度A550)は、20~500であることが好ましく、50~500であることがより好ましく、70~450であることが更に好ましく、100~400であることが特に好ましい。赤外線カットフィルタは、赤外線吸収色材を含む光硬化性組成物を用いて形成することができる。 The infrared cut filter's maximum absorption wavelength is preferably in the wavelength range of 700 to 1800 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 700 to 1300 nm, and even more preferably in the wavelength range of 700 to 1000 nm. The transmittance of the infrared cut filter over the entire wavelength range of 400 to 650 nm is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more. The transmittance at at least one point in the wavelength range of 700 to 1800 nm is preferably 20% or less. The ratio of the absorbance Amax at the infrared cut filter's maximum absorption wavelength to the absorbance A550 at a wavelength of 550 nm (absorbance Amax/absorbance A550) is preferably 20 to 500, more preferably 50 to 500, even more preferably 70 to 450, and particularly preferably 100 to 400. The infrared cut filter can be formed using a photocurable composition containing an infrared-absorbing colorant.

 赤外線透過フィルタは、赤外線の少なくとも一部を透過させるフィルタである。赤外線透過フィルタは、可視光の少なくとも一部を遮光し、赤外線の少なくとも一部を透過させるフィルタであることが好ましい。赤外線透過フィルタとしては、波長400~640nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長1100~1300nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である分光特性を満たしているフィルタなどが好ましく挙げられる。赤外線透過フィルタは、以下の(1)~(5)のいずれかの分光特性を満たしているフィルタであることが好ましい。
 (1):波長400~640nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長800~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
 (2):波長400~750nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長900~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
 (3):波長400~830nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長1000~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
 (4):波長400~950nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長1100~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
 (5):波長400~1050nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長1200~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
The infrared transmission filter is a filter that transmits at least a portion of infrared light. The infrared transmission filter is preferably a filter that blocks at least a portion of visible light and transmits at least a portion of infrared light. Preferred examples of the infrared transmission filter include filters that satisfy the spectral characteristics of a maximum transmittance of 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less) in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm and a minimum transmittance of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1300 nm. The infrared transmission filter is preferably a filter that satisfies any of the following spectral characteristics (1) to (5).
(1): A filter having a maximum transmittance of 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less) in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm, and a minimum transmittance of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 800 to 1500 nm.
(2): A filter having a maximum transmittance of 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less) in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm, and a minimum transmittance of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 900 to 1500 nm.
(3): A filter having a maximum transmittance of 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less) in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm, and a minimum transmittance of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1000 to 1500 nm.
(4): A filter having a maximum transmittance of 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less) in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm, and a minimum transmittance of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1500 nm.
(5): A filter having a maximum transmittance of 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less) in the wavelength range of 400 to 1050 nm, and a minimum transmittance of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1200 to 1500 nm.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、遮光膜などにも用いることができる。 The photocurable composition of the present invention can also be used as a light-shielding film, etc.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物の固形分濃度は、5~30質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、7.5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、25質量%以下が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましく、15質量%以下が更に好ましい。 The solids concentration of the photocurable composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 30% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、波長150~400nmの光で露光した場合において、高い感度が得られる。このため、本発明の光硬化性組成物は、波長150~400nmの光での露光用の硬化性組成物として好ましく用いられる。上記波長150~400nmの光としては、i線(波長365nm)、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられ、i線(波長365nm)またはKrF線(波長248nm)であることが好ましい。波長150~400nmの光は、波長150~400nmのエキシマレーザ光であることが好ましい。 The photocurable composition of the present invention exhibits high sensitivity when exposed to light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm. Therefore, the photocurable composition of the present invention is preferably used as a curable composition for exposure to light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm. Examples of light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm include i-line (wavelength 365 nm), KrF line (wavelength 248 nm), and ArF line (wavelength 193 nm), with i-line (wavelength 365 nm) or KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) being preferred. The light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm is preferably excimer laser light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm.

 以下、本発明の光硬化性組成物に用いられる各成分について説明する。 The following describes each component used in the photocurable composition of the present invention.

<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は光重合開始剤を含有する。光重合開始剤は光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<<Photopolymerization initiator>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator, which is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.

(特定化合物)
 本発明の光硬化性組成物において、光重合開始剤には、式(1-A)または式(1-B)で表される化合物を含むものが用いられる。以下、式(1-A)で表される化合物と式(1-B)で表される化合物とを合わせて特定化合物ともいう。
(Specific compound)
In the photocurable composition of the present invention, the photopolymerization initiator used contains a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B). Hereinafter, the compound represented by formula (1-A) and the compound represented by formula (1-B) are collectively referred to as specific compounds.

 式(1-A)中、X1aは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基またはNRy1y2-を表し、Ry1はアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry2は水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry1とRy2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよく、
 Ar1aは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2aはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 naは0または1を表し、
 maは0または1を表し、
 sは1~3の整数を表す;
 式(1-B)中、X1bは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1bはt価の連結基を表し、
 Ar1bは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1bはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2bはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 nbは0または1を表し、
 mbは0または1を表し、
 tは2~4の整数を表す。
In formula (1-A), X 1a represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —, R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
Ar 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R2a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
na represents 0 or 1;
ma represents 0 or 1;
s represents an integer of 1 to 3;
In formula (1-B), X 1b represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1b represents a t-valent linking group;
Ar 1b represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R 2b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
nb represents 0 or 1;
mb represents 0 or 1;
t represents an integer of 2 to 4;

 -X1aおよびX1bについて-
 式(1-A)のX1aおよび式(1-B)のX1bは、式(X1-1)で表される基を表す。
 式(X1-1)中、*は結合手を表し、
 X11およびX12は、それぞれ独立して芳香族炭化水素基を表し、
 L11およびL12はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-または-CO-を表し、RL1~RL3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、L11とL12は同時に単結合ではなく、
 L13は単結合または-CO-を表し、
 X13は単結合を表すか、または、ピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基を表し、X13が単結合の場合は、L13は単結合であり、
 aは0または1を表し、aが0の場合、L11は存在しない;
 ただし、L13およびX13が単結合で、X11およびX12がベンゼン環基で、L12が-NRL1-の場合、aは0であるか、または、aが1で、かつ、L11が、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-もしくは-CO-である。
- Regarding X 1a and X 1b -
X 1a in formula (1-A) and X 1b in formula (1-B) represent a group represented by formula (X1-1).
In formula (X1-1), * represents a bond.
X11 and X12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group;
L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —S—, —NR L1 —, —CR L2 R L3 —, or —CO—; R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group; L 11 and L 12 are not simultaneously single bonds;
L13 represents a single bond or —CO—;
X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond;
a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L 11 is absent;
However, when L 13 and X 13 are single bonds, X 11 and X 12 are benzene ring groups, and L 12 is -NR L1 -, a is 0, or a is 1 and L 11 is -O-, -S-, -NR L1 -, -CR L2 R L3 -, or -CO-.

 式(X1-1)のX11およびX12は、それぞれ独立して芳香族炭化水素基を表す。
 X11およびX12が表す芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~18がより好ましい。芳香族炭化水素基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。芳香族炭化水素基の具体例としては、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基およびアントラセン環基が挙げられ、ベンゼン環基またはナフタレン環基であることが好ましい。
In formula (X1-1), X 11 and X 12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by X11 and X12 is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 18. The aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a single ring or a condensed ring. Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and an anthracene ring group, and a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group is preferred.

 X11およびX12が表す芳香族炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基が挙げられる。これらの基の詳細については、後述するY1aの項目で説明したものが挙げられる。 The aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by X11 and X12 may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and a heteroaryloxy group. Details of these groups include those described in the section on Y1a below.

 式(X1-1)のL11およびL12はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-または-CO-を表し、RL1~RL3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表す。RL1~RL3が表すこれらの基の詳細については、後述するY1aの項目で説明したものが挙げられる。 In formula (X1-1), L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, -O-, -S-, -NR L1 -, -CR L2 R L3 -, or -CO-, and R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group. Details of these groups represented by R L1 to R L3 include those described in the section on Y 1a below.

 式(X1-1)のL11およびL12は、それぞれ独立して、単結合、-O-、-S-または-CRL2L3-であることが好ましい。 In formula (X1-1), L 11 and L 12 are preferably each independently a single bond, —O—, —S— or —CR L2 R L3 —.

 式(X1-1)のaは0または1を表し、aが0の場合、L11は存在しない。すなわち、式(X1-1)のaが0の場合、式(X1-1)で表される基は、式(X1-1a)で表される基であり、式(X1-1)のaが1の場合、式(X1-1)で表される基は、式(X1-1b)で表される基である。
In formula (X1-1), a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L11 does not exist. That is, when a in formula (X1-1) is 0, the group represented by formula (X1-1) is a group represented by formula (X1-1a), and when a in formula (X1-1) is 1, the group represented by formula (X1-1) is a group represented by formula (X1-1b).

 式(X1-1)のaが0の場合、L12は単結合、-O-、-S-または-CRL2L3-であることが好ましく、-O-または-S-であることがより好ましい。 When a in formula (X1-1) is 0, L 12 is preferably a single bond, —O—, —S— or —CR L2 R L3 —, and more preferably —O— or —S—.

 式(X1-1)のaが1の場合、L11は単結合であることが好ましい。また、L12は-O-、-S-または-CRL2L3-であることが好ましい。
 L11とL12の好ましい組み合わせとしては、以下に示す態様が挙げられる。
 L11が単結合で、L12が-O-である態様。
 L11が単結合で、L12が-S-である態様。
 L11が単結合で、L12が-CRL2L3-(特に好ましくは、RL2およびRL3がそれぞれ独立して炭素数1~8のアルキル基)である態様。
When a in formula (X1-1) is 1, L 11 is preferably a single bond, and L 12 is preferably —O—, —S— or —CR L2 R L3 —.
Preferred combinations of L 11 and L 12 include the following embodiments.
An embodiment in which L 11 is a single bond and L 12 is —O—.
An embodiment in which L 11 is a single bond and L 12 is —S—.
An embodiment in which L 11 is a single bond and L 12 is —CR L2 R L3 — (particularly preferably, R L2 and R L3 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms).

 式(X1-1)のL13は単結合または-CO-を表し、-CO-であることが好ましい。なお、X13が単結合の場合は、L13は単結合である。 In formula (X1-1), L 13 represents a single bond or —CO—, and preferably —CO—. When X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is also a single bond.

 式(X1-1)のX13は単結合を表すか、または、ピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基を表し、ピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基であることが好ましく、インドール環を有する基であることがより好ましい。ピロール環を有する基としては、式(X3-1)で表される基が挙げられる。インドール環を有する基としては、式(X3-2)で表される基が挙げられる。
X13 in formula (X1-1) represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, preferably a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and more preferably a group having an indole ring. Examples of groups having a pyrrole ring include groups represented by formula (X3-1). Examples of groups having an indole ring include groups represented by formula (X3-2).

 式中、*および波線は、それぞれ結合手を表し、*は、式(X1-1)のL13との結合手であり、
 RX31およびRX32は、それぞれ独立して、置換基を表し、
 LX31およびLX32は、それぞれ独立して、単結合または連結基を表し、
 xは0~3の整数を表し、yは、0~5の整数を表す。
In the formula, * and the wavy line each represent a bond, and * represents a bond to L13 in formula (X1-1),
R and R each independently represent a substituent.
L and L each independently represent a single bond or a linking group;
x represents an integer of 0 to 3; y represents an integer of 0 to 5;

 式(X3-1)のRX31および式(X3-2)のRX32が表す置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールオキシ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、アミノ基、アシル基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキシ基、チオール基、カルボキシ基およびハロゲン原子が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。 Examples of the substituent represented by R X31 in formula (X3-1) and R X32 in formula (X3-2) include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an aryloxy group, an arylthio group, a heteroaryloxy group, a heteroarylthio group, an amino group, an acyl group, a cyano group, a nitro group, a hydroxy group, a thiol group, a carboxy group, and a halogen atom, and an alkyl group is preferable.

 式(X3-1)のLX31および式(X3-2)のLX32は、それぞれ独立して、単結合または連結基を表し、連結基であることが好ましい。
 LX31およびLX32が表す連結基は、芳香族炭化水素基であることが好ましい。芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~18がより好ましい。芳香族炭化水素基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。芳香族炭化水素基の具体例としては、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基およびアントラセン環基が挙げられ、ベンゼン環基またはナフタレン環基であることが好ましい。
 上記芳香族炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基が挙げられる。これらの基の詳細については、後述するY1aの項目で説明したものが挙げられる。
L 1 X31 in formula (X3-1) and L 1 X32 in formula (X3-2) each independently represent a single bond or a linking group, and are preferably a linking group.
The linking groups represented by L X31 and L X32 are preferably aromatic hydrocarbon groups. The aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms. The aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and an anthracene ring group, and a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group is preferred.
The aromatic hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and a heteroaryloxy group. Details of these groups include those described in the section on Y 1a below.

 式(X3-1)のxは0~3の整数を表し、0または1であることが好ましく、0であることがより好ましい。 In formula (X3-1), x represents an integer of 0 to 3, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.

 式(X3-2)のyは0~5の整数を表し、0または1であることが好ましく、0であることがより好ましい。 In formula (X3-2), y represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.

 式(X1-1)で表される基の具体例としては、以下に示す基が挙げられ、式(X1-1-1)、式(X1-1-2)、式(X1-1-3)または式(X1-1-4)で表される基であることが好ましい。
Specific examples of the group represented by formula (X1-1) include the groups shown below, and groups represented by formula (X1-1-1), formula (X1-1-2), formula (X1-1-3) or formula (X1-1-4) are preferred.

 上記式中、*は結合手を表し、
 Ra1~Ra32およびRb1~Rb32、それぞれ独立して置換基を表し、
 Rar1~Rar25は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 k1~k32はそれぞれ独立して0~3の整数を表し、
 n1~n32はそれぞれ独立して0~3の整数を表し、
 L13は単結合または-CO-を表し、
 X13は単結合を表すか、または、ピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基を表し、X13が単結合の場合は、L13は単結合であり、
 式(X1-1-1)においては、L13は-CO-であるか、または、X13はピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基である。
In the above formula, * represents a bond.
R a1 to R a32 and R b1 to R b32 each independently represent a substituent;
R ar1 to R ar25 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group;
k1 to k32 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3,
n1 to n32 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3;
L13 represents a single bond or —CO—;
X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond;
In formula (X1-1-1), L 13 is —CO—, or X 13 is a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring.

 L13およびX13の好ましい態様については上述の通りである。
 Ra1~Ra32およびRb1~Rb32が表す置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基が挙げられる。これらの基の詳細については、後述するY1aの項目で説明したものが挙げられる。
The preferred embodiments of L 13 and X 13 are as described above.
Examples of the substituents represented by R a1 to R a32 and R b1 to R b32 include alkyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, and heteroaryloxy groups. Details of these groups include those described in the section on Y 1a below.

 -Y1aについて-
 式(1-A)のY1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基またはNRy1y2-を表し、Ry1はアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry2は水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry1とRy2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよい。
- Regarding Y 1a -
In formula (1-A), Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —, where R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring.

 上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5であることが更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。R1aおよびR1bが表すアルキル基は、メチル基であることが特に好ましい。
 上記アルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルコキシ基は、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
 上記アリール基およびアリールオキシ基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6または7が特に好ましい。
 上記ヘテロアリール基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が挙げられる。ヘテロアリール基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。
 上記NRy1y2-において、Ry1とRy2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよい。上記環を形成する際における連結基としては、-O-、-S-、-NRL101-、-CRL102L103-が挙げられる。RL101~RL103は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。RL101~RL103が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。RL101~RL103が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6または7が特に好ましい。
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 5. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group represented by R 1a and R 1b is particularly preferably a methyl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkoxy group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
The aryl group and aryloxy group preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 or 7 carbon atoms.
The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. Types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2. The heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
In the above NR y1 R y2 -, R y1 and R y2 may be bonded via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring. Examples of the linking group when forming the ring include -O-, -S-, -NR L101 -, and -CR L102 R L103 -. R L101 to R L103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom. The alkyl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear. The aryl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6 or 7.

 式(1-A)のY1aは、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基またはアリールオキシ基であることが好ましく、アルキル基、アリール基またはアルコキシ基であることがより好ましく、アルキル基またはアルコキシ基であることが更に好ましく、アルキル基であることが特に好ましい。 Y 1a in formula (1-A) is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, more preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an alkoxy group, still more preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group.

-Y1bについて-
 式(1-B)のY1bはt価の連結基を表す。
 Y1bが表すt価の連結基としては、炭化水素基、複素環基、2以上の炭化水素基を単結合または連結基を介して連結した基、2以上の複素環を単結合または連結基を介して連結した基、および、炭化水素基と複素環基を単結合または連結基を介して連結した基が挙げられ、炭化水素基、または、2以上の炭化水素基を単結合もしくは連結基を介して連結した基であることが好ましい。
 上記炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、芳香族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、環状であってもよく、非環状であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基を有していなくてもよい。環状の脂肪族炭化水素基、および、芳香族炭化水素基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。
 上記複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基は、芳香族複素環基であってもよい。複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子などが挙げられる。
 上記炭化水素基同士、複素環基同士、または、炭化水素基と複素環基とを結合する連結基としては、-CH-、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、-NR-及びこれらの2以上を組み合わせた基などが挙げられる。Rは、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子であることが好ましい。
- Regarding Y 1b -
Y 1b in formula (1-B) represents a t-valent linking group.
Examples of the t-valent linking group represented by Y 1b include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, a group in which two or more hydrocarbon groups are linked via a single bond or a linking group, a group in which two or more heterocycles are linked via a single bond or a linking group, and a group in which a hydrocarbon group and a heterocyclic group are linked via a single bond or a linking group, and a hydrocarbon group or a group in which two or more hydrocarbon groups are linked via a single bond or a linking group is preferred.
The hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or acyclic. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent or may not have a substituent. The cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
The heterocyclic group may be a single ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be an aromatic heterocyclic group. Examples of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
Examples of linking groups that link the above hydrocarbon groups together, the heterocyclic groups together, or the hydrocarbon group and the heterocyclic group include -CH2- , -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, -SO-, -SO2- , -NRx- , and groups combining two or more of these. Rx represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom.

 -Ar1aおよびAr1bについて-
 式(1-A)のAr1aおよび式(1-B)のAr1bは、それぞれ独立して芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表す。
—Regarding Ar 1a and Ar 1b—
Ar 1a in formula (1-A) and Ar 1b in formula (1-B) each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.

 Ar1aおよびAr1bが表す芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、10~18がより好ましい。芳香族炭化水素基は、単環であってもよいが、縮合環であることが好ましい。
Ar1aおよびAr1bが表す芳香族炭化水素基の具体例としては、
ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、アントラセン環基、フェナントレン環基、ベンゾフェナントレン環基およびピレン環基等が挙げられ、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基またはアントラセン環基であることが好ましく、ナフタレン環基またはアントラセン環基であることがより好ましい。
 Ar1aおよびAr1bが表す芳香族複素環基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。芳香族複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が挙げられる。芳香族複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。芳香族複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。芳香族複素環基の具体例としては、フラン環基、チオフェン環基、ベンゾフラン環基、ベンゾチオフェン環基、ピロール環基、インドール環基、ピリジン環基、キノキサリン環基、イミダゾール環基およびベンゾイミダゾール環基などが挙げられ、ベンゾフラン環基であることが好ましい。
The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by Ar 1a and Ar 1b is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 10 to 18. The aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring, but is preferably a fused ring.
Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by Ar 1a and Ar 1b include:
Examples include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, a phenanthrene ring group, a benzophenanthrene ring group, and a pyrene ring group. A benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, or an anthracene ring group is preferred, and a naphthalene ring group or an anthracene ring group is more preferred.
The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group represented by Ar 1a and Ar 1b is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. Examples of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group include nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, and sulfur atoms. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2. The aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. Specific examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group include a furan ring group, a thiophene ring group, a benzofuran ring group, a benzothiophene ring group, a pyrrole ring group, an indole ring group, a pyridine ring group, a quinoxaline ring group, an imidazole ring group, and a benzimidazole ring group, and a benzofuran ring group is preferred.

 上記芳香族炭化水素基および芳香族複素環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基およびアリールチオ基などが挙げられ、アルキル基、アルコキシ基またはアルキルチオ基であることが好ましい。 The above aromatic hydrocarbon groups and aromatic heterocyclic groups may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, and an arylthio group, with an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkylthio group being preferred.

 -R1aおよびR1bについて-
 式(1-A)のR1aおよび式(1-B)のR1bは、それぞれ独立してアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基またはアリールオキシ基であることが好ましく、アルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 R1aおよびR1bが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5であることが更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。R1aおよびR1bが表すアルキル基は、メチル基であることが特に好ましい。
 R1aおよびR1bが表すアルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルコキシ基は、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
 R1aおよびR1bが表すアリール基およびアリールオキシ基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6または7が特に好ましい。
 R1aおよびR1bが表すヘテロアリール基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が挙げられる。ヘテロアリール基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基およびヘテロアリールオキシ基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。
—Regarding R 1a and R 1b—
R 1a in formula (1-A) and R 1b in formula (1-B) each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group, preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, and more preferably an alkyl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 1a and R 1b is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 5. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group represented by R 1a and R 1b is particularly preferably a methyl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group represented by R 1a and R 1b is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkoxy group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
The aryl group and aryloxy group represented by R 1a and R 1b preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 or 7 carbon atoms.
The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group represented by R 1a and R 1b is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. Types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2. The heteroaryl group and heteroaryloxy group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.

 -R2aおよびR2bについて-
 式(1-A)のR2aおよび式(1-B)のR2bは、それぞれ独立してアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、アルキル基またはアリール基であることが好ましく、アルキル基であることがより好ましい。
—Regarding R 2a and R 2b—
R 2a in formula (1-A) and R 2b in formula (1-B) each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably an alkyl group.

 R2aおよびR2bは、感度の観点から、無置換の直鎖のアルキル基、分岐構造を有するアルキル基、環構造を有するアルキル基、又は、下記A群から選択される少なくとも1つの置換基を有するアルキル基であることが好ましく、分岐構造を有するアルキル基、または、環構造を有するアルキル基であることがより好ましく、環構造を有するアルキル基であることが更に好ましい。環構造を有するアルキル基は、環状アルキル基を置換基として有するアルキル基であることが好ましく、3~7員環の環状アルキル基を置換基として有するアルキル基であることがより好ましく、5~7員環の環状アルキル基を置換基として有するアルキル基であることが更に好ましく、5員環または6員環の環状アルキル基を置換基として有するアルキル基であることが特に好ましく、6員環の環状アルキル基を置換基として有するアルキル基であることが最も好ましい。 From the viewpoint of sensitivity, R 2a and R 2b are preferably an unsubstituted linear alkyl group, an alkyl group having a branched structure, an alkyl group having a cyclic structure, or an alkyl group having at least one substituent selected from the following Group A, more preferably an alkyl group having a branched structure or an alkyl group having a cyclic structure, and even more preferably an alkyl group having a cyclic structure. The alkyl group having a cyclic structure is preferably an alkyl group having a cyclic alkyl group as a substituent, more preferably an alkyl group having a 3- to 7-membered cyclic alkyl group as a substituent, even more preferably an alkyl group having a 5- to 7-membered cyclic alkyl group as a substituent, particularly preferably an alkyl group having a 5- or 6-membered cyclic alkyl group as a substituent, and most preferably an alkyl group having a 6-membered cyclic alkyl group as a substituent.

 上記分岐構造の位置は、感度の観点から、オキシム基のγ位であることが好ましく、上記γ位には、水素原子(γ水素)が1つ存在することがより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of sensitivity, the position of the branched structure is preferably the γ-position of the oxime group, and it is more preferable that one hydrogen atom (γ-hydrogen) be present at the γ-position.

 R2aおよびR2bは、感度の観点から、ヘテロ原子を有する基を置換基として有するアルキル基であることも好ましい。ヘテロ原子を有する基は、酸素原子、硫黄原子又は窒素原子を有する基であることが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of sensitivity, R2a and R2b are also preferably alkyl groups having a group having a heteroatom as a substituent. The group having a heteroatom is preferably a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom.

 (A群)
 シアノ基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アザアシルアシロイル基、-N(R、-SR、-COOH、-OR、-O-COR、-O-CO-OR、-CONR、-NR-CO-R、-O-CO-NR、-NR-CO-OR、-NR-CO-NR、-SO-R、-SO-R、-O-SO-R、-SO-NR、-NR-SO-R、-CO-NR-COR、-CO-NR-SO-R、-SO-NR-CO-R、-SO-NR-SO-R、-Si(R(OR、複素環基、及び、-O(RO)-R
 ここで、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基又はヘテロアリール基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基又はヘテロアリール基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、アルキレン基、アリーレン基又はこれらを2以上組み合わせた基を表し、L及びKはそれぞれ独立に、0~3の整数を表し、L+K=3を満たし、Jは1~100の整数を表す。
(Group A)
Cyano group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, azaacyloyl group, —N(R a ) 2 , —SR a , —COOH, —OR a , —O—COR c , —O—CO—OR c , —CONR a R b , —NR a —CO—R b , —O—CO—NR a R b , —NR a —CO—OR b , —NR a —CO—NR a R b , —SO—R c , —SO 2 —R c , —O—SO 2 —R c , —SO 2 —NR a R b , —NR a —SO 2 —R a , —CO—NR a —COR b , —CO—NR a —SO 2 —R b , -SO 2 -NR a -CO-R b , -SO 2 -NR a -SO 2 -R c , -Si(R a ) L (OR b ) K , heterocyclic group, and -O(R d O) J -R a
Here, R a and R b each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group; R c each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group; R d each independently represent an alkylene group, an arylene group, or a group combining two or more thereof; L and K each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3, satisfying L+K=3; and J represents an integer of 1 to 100.

 上記Rはそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基又はヘテロアリール基であることが好ましく、アルキル基であることがより好ましく、環状アルキル基であることが特に好ましい。
 上記Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はアルキル基であることが好ましく、アルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 上記Rは、アルキル基又はアリール基であることが好ましく、アルキル基であることが好ましい。
 上記Rはそれぞれ独立に、アルキレン基であることが好ましく、エチレン基又はプロピレン基であることがより好ましい。
Each of the R a's is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, more preferably an alkyl group, and particularly preferably a cyclic alkyl group.
Each R b is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group.
The above Rc is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group.
Each Rd is preferably an alkylene group, more preferably an ethylene group or a propylene group.

 上記R~Rのうちの2つ以上が単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成していてもよい。上記環を形成する際における連結基としては、-O-、-S-、-NRL101-、-CRL102L103-が挙げられる。RL101~RL103は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。RL101~RL103が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。RL101~RL103が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6または7が特に好ましい。 Two or more of the R a to R c may be bonded via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring. Examples of the linking group when forming the ring include -O-, -S-, -NR L101 -, and -CR L102 R L103 -. R L101 to R L103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. The alkyl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The aryl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6 or 7.

 R2aおよびR2bが上記A群から選択される少なくとも1つの置換基を有するアルキル基である場合、アルキル基が有する上記A群の置換基は、アルケニル基、アザアシルアシロイル基、または-SRであることが好ましい。また、-SRにおけるRは、アリール基であることが好ましい。 When R 2a and R 2b are alkyl groups having at least one substituent selected from Group A, the substituent from Group A on the alkyl group is preferably an alkenyl group, an azaacyloyl group, or -SR a . Furthermore, R a in -SR a is preferably an aryl group.

 R2aおよびR2bは、それぞれ独立して式(Z-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。
 式(Z-1)中、*は結合手を表し、
 LZ1は単結合またはアルキレン基を表し、
 LZ2~LZ4は、それぞれ独立して、-CRLZ1LZ2-、-O-、-S-または-NRLZ3-を表し、RLZ1~RLZ3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 RZ1およびRZ2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、RZ1とRZ2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよい;
 ただし、LZ2~LZ4のうち少なくとも2つは-CRLZ1LZ2-である。
It is preferable that R 2a and R 2b each independently represent a group represented by formula (Z-1).
In formula (Z-1), * represents a bond.
L Z1 represents a single bond or an alkylene group;
L Z2 to L Z4 each independently represent —CR LZ1 R LZ2 —, —O—, —S— or —NR LZ3 —, and R LZ1 to R LZ3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group;
R Z1 and R Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R Z1 and R Z2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
However, at least two of L Z2 to L Z4 are -CR LZ1 R LZ2 -.

 式(Z-1)のLZ1が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましく、1または2であることがより一層好ましく、1であることが特に好ましい。
 LZ1は単結合、または、メチレン基であることが好ましく、単結合であることがより好ましい。
The alkylene group represented by L Z1 in formula (Z-1) preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, even more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 carbon atom.
L Z1 is preferably a single bond or a methylene group, more preferably a single bond.

 式(Z-1)のLZ2~LZ4は、それぞれ独立して、-CRL1L2-、-O-、-S-または-NRL3-を表し、RL1~RL3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表す。
 RL1~RL3が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
 RL1~RL3が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6または7が特に好ましい。
 RL1~RL3が表すヘテロアリール基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が挙げられる。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。
 RL1~RL3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。
In formula (Z-1), L Z2 to L Z4 each independently represent —CR L1 R L2 —, —O—, —S— or —NR L3 —, and R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R L1 to R L3 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
The aryl group represented by R L1 to R L3 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 or 7 carbon atoms.
The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group represented by R L1 to R L3 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. Types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2. The heteroaryl group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
R L1 to R L3 are each preferably independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.

 式(Z-1)において、LZ2~LZ4のうち少なくとも2つは-CRL1L2-である。
 好ましい一態様としてLZ2が、-CRL1L2-である態様が挙げられる。この態様において、LZ2が表す-CRL1L2-におけるRL1およびRL2は水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。
 別の好ましい一態様として、LZ3およびLZ4が、それぞれ独立して-CRL1L2-である態様が挙げられる。この態様において、LZ3およびLZ4が表す-CRL1L2-におけるRL1およびRL2は水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。
In formula (Z-1), at least two of L Z2 to L Z4 are —CR L1 R L2 —.
A preferred embodiment is one in which L Z2 is —CR L1 R L2 —. In this embodiment, R L1 and R L2 in —CR L1 R L2 — represented by L Z2 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
Another preferred embodiment is one in which L Z3 and L Z4 are each independently -CR L1 R L2 -. In this embodiment, R L1 and R L2 in -CR L1 R L2 - represented by L Z3 and L Z4 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.

 式(Z-1)のLZ2~LZ4は、それぞれ独立して、-CRL1L2-であることが特に好ましい。 It is particularly preferable that L Z2 to L Z4 in formula (Z-1) are each independently —CR L1 R L2 —.

 式(Z-1)において、LZ1が単結合またはメチレン基であり、LZ2が-CRL1L2-であることが好ましく、LZ1が単結合で、LZ2が-CRL1L2-であることがより好ましい。 In formula (Z-1), it is preferable that L Z1 is a single bond or a methylene group and L Z2 is —CR L1 R L2 —, and it is more preferable that L Z1 is a single bond and L Z2 is —CR L1 R L2 —.

 式(Z-1)のRZ1およびRZ2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表す。
 RZ1およびRZ2が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
 RZ1およびRZ2が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6または7が特に好ましい。
 RZ1およびRZ2が表すヘテロアリール基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が挙げられる。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。
 RZ1およびRZ2は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましい。
In formula (Z-1), R 1 Z1 and R 2 Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R Z1 and R Z2 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
The aryl group represented by R 1 Z1 and R 1 Z2 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 or 7 carbon atoms.
The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group represented by R Z1 and R Z2 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. Types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2. The heteroaryl group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
It is preferred that R 1 Z1 and R 1 Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.

 式(Z-1)のRZ1とRZ2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよい。上記環を形成する際における連結基としては、-O-、-S-、-NRL101-、-CRL102L103-が挙げられる。RL101~RL103は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。RL101~RL103が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。RL101~RL103が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6または7が特に好ましい。形成される環は3~8員環であることが好ましく、4~7員環であることがより好ましく、5員環または6員環であることが更に好ましい。形成される環は非芳香族環であることが好ましく、脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましい。形成される環は、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが特に好ましい。 R Z1 and R Z2 in formula (Z-1) may be bonded via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring. Examples of the linking group when forming the ring include -O-, -S-, -NR L101 -, and -CR L102 R L103 -. R L101 to R L103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. The alkyl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The aryl group represented by R L101 to R L103 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6 or 7. The ring formed is preferably a 3- to 8-membered ring, more preferably a 4- to 7-membered ring, and even more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The ring formed is preferably a non-aromatic ring, more preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. The ring formed is particularly preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.

 式(Z-1)で表される基の好ましい一態様として、
 LZ1が単結合、または、メチレン基であり、
 LZ2~LZ4が、それぞれ独立して、-CRL1L2-であり、RL1およびRL2は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基であり、
 RZ1およびRZ2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子またはアルキル基である態様が挙げられる。
 この態様において、RL1、RL2、RZ1およびRZ2は、それぞれ水素原子であることが好ましい。
A preferred embodiment of the group represented by formula (Z-1) is
L Z1 is a single bond or a methylene group;
L Z2 to L Z4 are each independently —CR L1 R L2 —, and R L1 and R L2 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
An embodiment in which R 1 Z1 and R 2 Z2 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group is given.
In this embodiment, R L1 , R L2 , R Z1 and R Z2 are each preferably a hydrogen atom.

 式(Z-1)で表される基の別の好ましい一態様として、
 LZ1が単結合、または、メチレン基であり、
 LZ2~LZ4が、それぞれ独立して、-CRL1L2-であり、RL1およびRL2は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基であり、
 RZ1とRZ2は、単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成している態様が挙げられる。
 この態様において、RL1およびRL2は、それぞれ水素原子であることが好ましい。
 RZ1とRZ2が結合して形成される環は、脂肪族炭化水素環であることが好ましく、3~8員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましく、4~7員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが更に好ましく、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが特に好ましい。
Another preferred embodiment of the group represented by formula (Z-1) is
L Z1 is a single bond or a methylene group;
L Z2 to L Z4 are each independently —CR L1 R L2 —, and R L1 and R L2 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
An embodiment in which R 2 Z1 and R 2 Z2 are bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring is given.
In this embodiment, R L1 and R L2 are each preferably a hydrogen atom.
The ring formed by bonding R and R is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, more preferably a 3- to 8-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, even more preferably a 4- to 7-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and particularly preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.

 R2aおよびR2bは、それぞれ独立して式(Z-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。
 式(Z-2)中、*は結合手を表し、
 LZ11は単結合または炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、
 RZ11~RZ14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、
 LZ11は、RZ11またはRZ12と結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 LZ12は、-(CRLZ11LZ12-を表し、RLZ11およびRLZ12は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、pは1~5の整数を表す。
It is preferable that R 2a and R 2b each independently represent a group represented by formula (Z-2).
In formula (Z-2), * represents a bond.
L Z11 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R Z11 to R Z14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
L Z11 may be bonded to R Z11 or R Z12 to form a ring;
L Z12 represents —(CR LZ11 R LZ12 ) p —, R LZ11 and R LZ12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and p represents an integer of 1 to 5.

 LZ11は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基であることが好ましい。 L Z11 is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.

 RZ11~RZ14、RLZ11およびRLZ12が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
 RZ11~RZ14、RLZ11およびRLZ12は水素原子であることが好ましい。
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl groups represented by R Z11 to R Z14 , R LZ11 and R LZ12 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
R Z11 to R Z14 , R LZ11 and R LZ12 are preferably hydrogen atoms.

 pは1~5の整数を表し、3または4であることが好ましく、3であることが更に好ましい。 p represents an integer from 1 to 5, preferably 3 or 4, and more preferably 3.

 式(Z-2)において、LZ11は、RZ11またはRZ12と結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環は、3~8員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましく、4~7員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが更に好ましく、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが特に好ましい。 In formula (Z-2), L Z11 may be bonded to R Z11 or R Z12 to form a ring. The ring formed is more preferably a 3- to 8-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, further preferably a 4- to 7-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and particularly preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.

 -naおよびnbについて-
 式(1-A)のnaおよび式(1-B)のnbは、それぞれ独立して0または1を表し、1であることが好ましい。
-About na and nb-
na in formula (1-A) and nb in formula (1-B) each independently represent 0 or 1, and are preferably 1.

 -maおよびmbについて-
 式(1-A)のmaおよび式(1-B)のmbは、それぞれ独立して0または1を表し、1であることが好ましい。
-About ma and mb-
ma in formula (1-A) and mb in formula (1-B) each independently represent 0 or 1, and are preferably 1.

 -sについて-
 式(1-A)のsは1~3の整数を表し、1または2であることが好ましく、1であることがより好ましい。
-About s-
In formula (1-A), s represents an integer of 1 to 3, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.

 -tについて-
 式(1-B)のtは2~4の整数を表し、現像残渣の発生をより抑制できるという理由から、2または3が好ましく、2がより好ましい。
-About t-
In formula (1-B), t represents an integer of 2 to 4, and is preferably 2 or 3, more preferably 2, because this allows for further suppression of development residues.

 特定化合物は、露光照度依存性をより小さくできるという理由から、式(1-A)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The specific compound is preferably a compound represented by formula (1-A) because it can reduce the exposure illuminance dependency.

 特定化合物の分子量は、200~2000であることが好ましい。上限は、1500以下であることが好ましく、1000以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、300以上であることが好ましく、400以上であることがより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the specific compound is preferably 200 to 2000. The upper limit is preferably 1500 or less, and more preferably 1000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 300 or more, and more preferably 400 or more.

 特定化合物の波長248nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、5000L・mol-1・cm-1以上が好ましく、10000L・mol-1・cm-1以上がより好ましく、20000L・mol-1・cm-1以上が更に好ましく、30000L・mol-1・cm-1以上が特に好ましい。波長248nmにおけるモル吸光係数の上限は、特に制限はされないが、200000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることが好ましい。
 特定化合物の波長365nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、500L・mol-1・cm-1以上が好ましく、1000L・mol-1・cm-1以上がより好ましく、2000L・mol-1・cm-1以上が更に好ましく、3000L・mol-1・cm-1以上が特に好ましい。波長365nmにおけるモル吸光係数の上限は、特に制限はされないが、200000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることが好ましい。
 特定化合物は、吸収の長波端(モル吸光係数が100L・mol-1・cm-1未満となる最も長い波長)は、450nm以下であることが好ましく、400nm以下であることが好ましく、380nm以下であることが好ましい。吸収の長波端が上記領域であることで、黄色灯かぶりを防ぎ、合成時の光安定性に優れる。また、特定化合物が黄色を呈しないことで、カラーフィルタ等の光学フィルタに適用した際に、色再現性が良好となる。
From the viewpoint of sensitivity, the molar absorption coefficient of the specific compound at a wavelength of 248 nm is preferably 5,000 L mol cm or more, more preferably 10,000 L mol cm or more , even more preferably 20,000 L mol cm or more , and particularly preferably 30,000 L mol cm or more . There is no particular upper limit to the molar absorption coefficient at a wavelength of 248 nm, but it is preferably 200,000 L mol cm or less .
From the viewpoint of sensitivity, the molar absorption coefficient of the specific compound at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 500 L mol cm or more , more preferably 1000 L mol cm or more , even more preferably 2000 L mol cm or more , and particularly preferably 3000 L mol cm or more . There is no particular upper limit to the molar absorption coefficient at a wavelength of 365 nm, but it is preferably 200,000 L mol cm or less .
The specific compound preferably has a long wavelength absorption end (the longest wavelength at which the molar absorption coefficient is less than 100 L mol cm ) of 450 nm or less, more preferably 400 nm or less, and even more preferably 380 nm or less. Having the long wavelength absorption end in the above range prevents yellow light fogging and provides excellent light stability during synthesis. Furthermore, since the specific compound does not exhibit a yellow color, good color reproducibility is achieved when applied to optical filters such as color filters.

 特定化合物のモル吸光係数の測定方法は、以下の方法により測定するものとする。
 特定化合物を12.5mg精秤し、100mLメスフラスコに投入する。これにアセトニトリルを加え完溶させる。この溶液をホールピペットで2mL取り出し25mLメスフラスコでメスアップする。これを測定サンプルとする。1cm四方の5mL石英ガラスセルに測定サンプルを加え、空気下で吸光度の測定を行い、モル吸光係数を算出する。測定装置としては、紫外可視近赤外分光光度計(UH4150、(株)日立ハイテク製)などが挙げられる。
The molar absorption coefficient of a specific compound is measured by the following method.
Accurately weigh out 12.5 mg of a specific compound and place it in a 100 mL volumetric flask. Add acetonitrile to this and dissolve completely. Take 2 mL of this solution with a volumetric pipette and make up to 25 mL in a volumetric flask. This is the measurement sample. Add the measurement sample to a 1 cm square 5 mL quartz glass cell, measure the absorbance in air, and calculate the molar extinction coefficient. Examples of measurement devices include an ultraviolet-visible-near-infrared spectrophotometer (UH4150, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Corporation).

 特定化合物においてE体及びZ体の幾何異性体が存在する場合、特定化合物は、E体の幾何異性体であってもよく、Z体の幾何異性体であってもよく、E体とZ体の幾何異性体の混合物であってもよい。 If a specific compound has E and Z geometric isomers, the specific compound may be the E geometric isomer, the Z geometric isomer, or a mixture of the E and Z geometric isomers.

 特定化合物の極大吸収波長は、波長230~380nmの範囲に存在することが好ましい。極大吸収波長の個数は1個でもよいし、2個以上でもよい。極大吸収波長が2個以上存在する場合、各極大吸収波長は20nm以上離れていることが好ましく、50nm以上離れていることがより好ましい。 The maximum absorption wavelength of the specific compound preferably exists in the wavelength range of 230 to 380 nm. The number of maximum absorption wavelengths may be one or two or more. If there are two or more maximum absorption wavelengths, the maximum absorption wavelengths are preferably at least 20 nm apart, and more preferably at least 50 nm apart.

 特定化合物の融点は、溶剤への溶解性の観点から、50~150℃であることが好ましく、60℃~130℃であることがより好ましく、70℃~120℃であることが更に好ましい。 From the viewpoint of solubility in solvents, the melting point of the specific compound is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 60 to 130°C, and even more preferably 70 to 120°C.

 特定化合物が粒子である場合、特定化合物の動的光散乱法(DLS)による50%積算値は、取り扱い性および溶剤への溶解性の観点から0.001~1000μmであることが好ましく、0.01~100μmであることがより好ましく、0.1~10μmであることが更に好ましい。 If the specific compound is in the form of particles, the 50% cumulative value of the specific compound as measured by dynamic light scattering (DLS) is preferably 0.001 to 1000 μm, more preferably 0.01 to 100 μm, and even more preferably 0.1 to 10 μm, from the standpoint of ease of handling and solubility in solvents.

 特定化合物は、以下の(1)~(3)に示す方法により合成することができる。
 (1)アシルオイルオキシ基を有する酸クロリドまたは酸無水物等を、ルイス酸(AlCl、SnCl、BCl、AlBr、FeCl、GaCl、SbCl、InCl、SnBr、AsCl、ZnCl、CdCl、HgCl等)存在下でフリーデルクラフト反応を行った後、オキシム化またはケトオキシム化することにより合成できる。オキシム化またはケトオキシム化は定法により行うことができる。
 (2)メトキシ基を有する酸クロリドまたは酸無水物等を、ルイス酸存在下でフリーデルクラフト反応を行い、その後BBrで脱メチル化することでOHフリー体を合成する。得られたOHフリー体を塩基存在下でアシル化することで合成できる。なお、アシル化は、オキシム化またはケトオキシム化ののち、あるいは、オキシムエステル化段階で同時にアシル化してもよい。
 (3)3級アルコキシ基(例えばtert-ブトキシ基など)を有する酸クロリドまたは酸無水物等を、ルイス酸存在下でフリーデルクラフト反応を行い、その後ブレンステッド酸(pKa<0が好ましい。例えば、メタンスルホン酸、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸、カンファースルホン酸、硫酸等)で脱アルキル化することでOHフリー体を合成する。得られたOHフリー体を塩基存在下でアシル化することで合成できる。なお、アシル化は、オキシム化またはケトオキシム化ののち、あるいは、オキシムエステル化段階で同時にアシル化してもよい。
The specific compound can be synthesized by the following methods (1) to (3).
(1) They can be synthesized by subjecting an acid chloride or acid anhydride having an acyloyloxy group to a Friedel-Crafts reaction in the presence of a Lewis acid ( AlCl3 , SnCl4 , BCl3 , AlBr3 , FeCl3 , GaCl3 , SbCl5 , InCl3 , SnBr4 , AsCl5 , ZnCl2 , CdCl2 , HgCl2, etc.), followed by conversion to an oxime or ketoxime. The conversion to an oxime or ketoxime can be carried out by a conventional method.
(2) A methoxy-containing acid chloride or acid anhydride is subjected to a Friedel-Crafts reaction in the presence of a Lewis acid, followed by demethylation with BBr3 to synthesize an OH-free form. The resulting OH-free form can then be acylated in the presence of a base. Acylation can be carried out after oxime or ketoxime formation, or simultaneously with the oxime esterification step.
(3) An acid chloride or acid anhydride having a tertiary alkoxy group (such as a tert-butoxy group) is subjected to a Friedel-Crafts reaction in the presence of a Lewis acid, followed by dealkylation with a Brønsted acid (preferably with a pKa of <0; for example, methanesulfonic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, sulfuric acid, etc.) to synthesize an OH-free form. The resulting OH-free form can be acylated in the presence of a base. Acylation may be carried out after oxime formation or ketoxime formation, or may be carried out simultaneously in the oxime esterification stage.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物には、前駆体であるオキシム体、オキシム化する前のケトン体を含有していてもよい。これらが含まれている場合、オキシム体およびケトン体のそれぞれの含有量は、特定化合物の質量の0.001~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.001~8質量%であることがより好ましく、0.001~5質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a precursor oxime body and a ketone body prior to oximation. If these are contained, the content of each of the oxime body and ketone body is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.001 to 8% by mass, and even more preferably 0.001 to 5% by mass of the specific compound.

 特定化合物の具体例としては、以下に示す化合物A-1~A-339が挙げられる。 Specific examples of specific compounds include compounds A-1 to A-339 shown below.

 上記表中のAr1a、X1a、R2a、Y1b、Ar1b、X1bおよびR2bの欄に略語で記載した構造はそれぞれ以下の通りである。以下に示す構造式中の*および波線はそれぞれ結合手を表す。
 Y1a、R1aおよびR1bの欄に記載のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、iPrはイソプロピル基を表し、tBuはtert-ブチル基を表し、MOMはメトキシメチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表し、Frはフラニル基を表し、OMeはメトキシ基を表し、OPhはフェノキシ基を表し、NHHexはN-ヘキシル基を表し、NHPhはN-フェニル基を表す。
The structures described by abbreviations in the columns of Ar 1a , X 1a , R 2a , Y 1b , Ar 1b , X 1b and R 2b in the above table are as follows: * and wavy lines in the structural formulas shown below each represent a bond.
In the columns for Y 1a , R 1a , and R 1b, Me represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, iPr represents an isopropyl group, tBu represents a tert-butyl group, MOM represents a methoxymethyl group, Ph represents a phenyl group, Fr represents a furanyl group, OMe represents a methoxy group, OPh represents a phenoxy group, NHHex represents an N-hexyl group, and NHPh represents an N-phenyl group.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、上述した特定化合物を1種のみ用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用することで、露光光源がKrF線であっても、i線であっても解像性と感度のバランスをより良好にできるという効果が得られる。 The photocurable composition of the present invention may use only one of the specific compounds described above, or two or more of them in combination. Using two or more of them in combination has the effect of achieving a better balance between resolution and sensitivity, whether the exposure light source is KrF line or i-line.

 上記特定化合物に含んでいてもよい不純物について説明する。
 特定化合物に含まれる水分の含有量は、特定化合物100質量部に対して10質量部以下であることが好ましく、5質量部以下であることがよい好ましく、3質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量部以下であることが特に好ましい。下限は0質量部とすることができ、0.0001質量部とすることもでき、0.001質量部とすることもでき、0.01質量部とすることもできる。
 特定化合物に含まれる有機溶剤の含有量は、特定化合物100質量部に対して10質量部以下であることが好ましく、5質量部以下であることがよい好ましく、3質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量部以下であることが特に好ましい。下限は0質量部とすることができ、0.0001質量部とすることもでき、0.001質量部とすることもでき、0.01質量部とすることもできる。
 特定化合物に含まれる有機酸および有機酸無水物の含有量は、特定化合物100質量部に対して10質量部以下であることが好ましく、5質量部以下であることがよい好ましく、3質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量部以下であることが特に好ましい。下限は0質量部とすることができ、0.0001質量部とすることもでき、0.001質量部とすることもでき、0.01質量部とすることもできる。有機酸としては例えば、ギ酸、酢酸、プロピオン酸、ピバル酸、コハク酸、フタル酸、安息香酸等が挙げられる。有機酸無水物としては例えばこれらの無水物が挙げられる。
 特定化合物に含まれる有機塩基の含有量は、特定化合物100質量部に対して10質量部以下であることが好ましく、5質量部以下であることがよい好ましく、3質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量部以下であることが特に好ましい。下限は0質量部とすることができ、0.0001質量部とすることもでき、0.001質量部とすることもでき、0.01質量部とすることもできる。有機塩基としては例えば、トリエチルアミン、ジメチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ピリジン、ピペリジン、ピロリジン、モルホリンまたは特定化合物製造時に使用したアミン類等が挙げられる。
 特定化合物に含まれるハロゲンの含有量は、特定化合物100質量部に対して5質量部以下であることが好ましく、3質量部以下であることがより好ましく、1質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は0質量部とすることができ、0.0001質量部とすることもでき、0.001質量部とすることもでき、0.01質量部とすることもできる。ハロゲンとしてはCl、Br、F、I等が挙げられ、これらのハロゲン原子を有する有機化合物であってもよい。またこれらのハロゲンのイオンであってもよい。
 特定化合物に含まれる残留金属の含有量は、特定化合物100質量部に対して0.1質量部以下であることが好ましく、0.01質量部以下であることがより好ましく、0.001質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。0.0001質量部未満であることがより一層好ましく、検出限界以下であることが特に好ましい。残留金属の種類としては特に限定されないが、例えば、Li,Na,Mg,Al,K,Ca,Cr,Mn,Fe,Co,Ni,Cu,Zn,Cd,Pb,Ti,V,As,Ag,Sn,Ba,W,Au,Zr等が挙げられる。
The impurities that may be contained in the specific compound will be described below.
The content of water contained in the specific compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, further preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound. The lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass.
The content of the organic solvent contained in the specific compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, further preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound. The lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass.
The content of the organic acid and organic acid anhydride contained in the specific compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, more preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound. The lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass. Examples of organic acids include formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, succinic acid, phthalic acid, and benzoic acid. Examples of organic acid anhydrides include anhydrides of these.
The content of the organic base contained in the specific compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound. The lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass. Examples of organic bases include triethylamine, dimethylamine, diethylamine, pyridine, piperidine, pyrrolidine, morpholine, and amines used in producing the specific compound.
The content of halogen contained in the specific compound is preferably 5 parts by mass or less, more preferably 3 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 1 part by mass or less, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific compound.The lower limit can be 0 parts by mass, 0.0001 parts by mass, 0.001 parts by mass, or 0.01 parts by mass.Halogen includes Cl, Br, F, I, etc., and may be an organic compound having these halogen atoms.Also, ions of these halogens may be used.
The content of the residual metal contained in the specific compound is preferably 0.1 parts by mass or less, more preferably 0.01 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 0.001 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the specific compound. It is even more preferably less than 0.0001 parts by mass, and particularly preferably below the detection limit. The type of residual metal is not particularly limited, but examples include Li, Na, Mg, Al, K, Ca, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Cd, Pb, Ti, V, As, Ag, Sn, Ba, W, Au, and Zr.

(他の光重合開始剤)
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、上述した特定化合物以外の光重合開始剤(以下、他の光重合開始剤ともいう)を更に含有することができる。上述した特定化合物と他の光重合開始剤とを併用する場合、他の光重合開始剤の含有量は特定化合物の100質量部に対して1~1000質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、500質量部以下であることが好ましく、200質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、50質量部以上であることがより好ましい。
(Other photopolymerization initiators)
The photocurable composition of the present invention may further contain a photopolymerization initiator other than the specific compound described above (hereinafter also referred to as other photopolymerization initiator). When the specific compound described above is used in combination with the other photopolymerization initiator, the content of the other photopolymerization initiator is preferably 1 to 1,000 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the specific compound. The upper limit is preferably 500 parts by mass or less, more preferably 200 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 50 parts by mass or more.

 他の光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物などが挙げられる。他の光重合開始剤は、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物または3-アリール置換クマリン化合物であることが好ましく、オキシム化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物またはアシルホスフィン化合物であることがより好ましく、α-アミノケトン化合物またはオキシム化合物であることが更に好ましく、オキシム化合物であることが特に好ましい。 Other photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, etc. The other photopolymerization initiator is preferably a trihalomethyltriazine compound, a benzyl dimethyl ketal compound, an α-hydroxyketone compound, an α-aminoketone compound, an acylphosphine compound, a phosphine oxide compound, a metallocene compound, an oxime compound, a hexaarylbiimidazole compound, an onium compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex, a halomethyloxadiazole compound, or a 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compound; more preferably an oxime compound, an α-hydroxyketone compound, an α-aminoketone compound, or an acylphosphine compound; even more preferably an α-aminoketone compound or an oxime compound; and particularly preferably an oxime compound.

 他の光重合開始剤としては、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111に記載された化合物、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤、特開2020-055992号公報に記載のオキサゾリジン基を有するアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特開2013-190459号公報に記載のオキシム系光重合開始剤、特開2020-172619号公報に記載の重合体、国際公開第2020/152120号に記載の式1で表される化合物、特開2021-181406号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-013379号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2022-015747号公報に記載の式(1)で表される化合物、特表2021-507058号公報に記載のフッ素含有フルオレンオキシムエステル系光開始剤、中国特許出願公開第110764367号明細書に記載の開始剤、特表2022-518535号公報に記載の開始剤、国際公開第2021/175855号に記載の開始剤、台湾特許出願公開第202200534号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-078550号公報に記載の化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2017-0087330号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2022/075452号に記載の化合物、中国特許出願公開第110066225号明細書に記載のオキシムエステル化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2022-0076157号公報に記載の化合物、トリアリールアミンまたはN-アリールカルバゾール骨格を有する国際公開第2019/013112号の段落0042~0062に記載の化合物、特許第7219378号公報に記載のオキシムエステル系光重合開始剤、韓国公開特許第10-2021-0146174号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2019/013112号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2023-033731号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特表2022-515524号公報に記載の開始剤、特表2023-517304号公報に記載の開始剤、中国特許出願公開第114149517号明細書に記載の開始剤、中国特許出願公開第115925596号明細書に記載のアミノケトン化合物、特開2023-159489号公報に記載の化合物、特開2023-159487号公報に記載の化合物、台湾特許出願公開第202336003号公報に記載の化合物、中国特許出願公開第113527138号明細書に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。他の光重合開始剤として、SPI-02、SPI-03、SPI-05、SPI-06、SPI-07(以上、(株)SAMYANG社製)、NikkacureシリーズYJ-04(T)、IW-15、TG-05、TG-10、TKG-01(以上、(株)日本化学工業所製)、SpeedCurePDO(以上、(株)ARKEMA社製)、HTPI-429(以上、(株)Heraeus製)、Omnirad1312、Omnirad1316(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)等も好適に使用することができる。 Other photopolymerization initiators include the compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP 2014-130173 A, the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489 A, and the compounds described in MATERIAL STAGE pp. 37-60, vol. 19, No. 3, 2019, photopolymerization initiators described in WO 2018/221177, photopolymerization initiators described in WO 2018/110179, photopolymerization initiators described in JP 2019-043864 A, photopolymerization initiators described in JP 2019-044030 A, peroxide-based initiators described in JP 2019-167313 A, aminoacetophenone-based initiators having an oxazolidine group described in JP 2020-055992 A, oxime-based photopolymerization initiators described in JP 2013-190459 A, polymers described in JP 2020-172619 A, Compounds represented by formula 1 described in JP-A-2021-181406, compounds described in JP-A-2022-013379, photopolymerization initiators described in JP-A-2022-015747, compounds represented by formula (1), fluorine-containing fluorene oxime ester photoinitiators described in JP-T-2021-507058, initiators described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 110764367, initiators described in JP-T-2022-518535, initiators described in WO 2021/175855, compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 202200534, compounds described in JP-A-2022-078550 compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0087330, compounds described in International Publication No. 2022/075452, oxime ester compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 110066225, compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2022-0076157, compounds having a triarylamine or N-arylcarbazole skeleton described in paragraphs 0042 to 0062 of International Publication No. 2019/013112, oxime ester photopolymerization initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 7219378, photopolymerization initiators described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2021-0146174, compounds described in International Publication No. Photopolymerization initiators described in JP-A-2023-033731, photopolymerization initiators described in JP-T-2022-515524, initiators described in JP-T-2023-517304, initiators described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 114149517, aminoketone compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 115925596, compounds described in JP-A-2023-159489, compounds described in JP-A-2023-159487, compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 202336003, compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 113527138, and the like. Other photopolymerization initiators that can be suitably used include SPI-02, SPI-03, SPI-05, SPI-06, and SPI-07 (all manufactured by SAMYANG Co., Ltd.), Nikkacure series YJ-04(T), IW-15, TG-05, TG-10, and TKG-01 (all manufactured by Nippon Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), SpeedCure PDO (all manufactured by ARKEMA Co., Ltd.), HTPI-429 (all manufactured by Heraeus Co., Ltd.), Omnirad 1312, and Omnirad 1316 (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), etc.

 ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物の具体例としては、2,2’,4-トリス(2-クロロフェニル)-5-(3,4-ジメトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニル-1,1’-ビイミダゾールなどが挙げられる。 Specific examples of hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2',4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1'-biimidazole.

 α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 184、Irgacure 1173、Irgacure 2959、Irgacure 127(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。α-アミノケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 907、Irgacure 369、Irgacure 369E、Irgacure 379EG(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 819、Omnirad TPO(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 819、Irgacure TPO(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available α-hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, and Omnirad 127 (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), and Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, and Irgacure 127 (all manufactured by BASF). Commercially available α-aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, and Omnirad 379EG (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), and Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 369E, and Irgacure 379EG (all manufactured by BASF). Commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819 and Omnirad TPO (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), and Irgacure 819 and Irgacure TPO (all manufactured by BASF).

 オキシム化合物としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0142に記載の化合物、特許第5430746号に記載の化合物、特許第5647738号に記載の化合物、特開2021-173858号公報の一般式(1)で表される化合物や段落0022から0024に記載の化合物、特開2021-170089号公報の一般式(1)で表される化合物や段落0117から0120に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-3-シクロヘキシル-プロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-アセチルオキシム)などが挙げられる。市販品としては、Irgacure OXE01、Irgacure OXE02、Irgacure OXE03、Irgacure OXE04、Irgacure OXE05(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-301、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-305、TR-PBG-309、TR-PBG-3054、TR-PBG-3057、TR-PBG-314、TR-PBG-327、TR-PBG-345、TR-PBG-346、TR-PBG-358、TR-PBG-365、TR-PBG-380、TR-PBG-610、TR-NPI-807、TR-PBG-A、TR-PBG-B(以上、TRONLY社製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)、Esacure563(IGM社製)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物や、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-831E、NCI-930(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0142 of WO 2022/085485, the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5430746, the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5647738, the compounds represented by general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0022 to 0024 of JP 2021-173858 A, the compounds represented by general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0117 to 0120 of JP 2021-170089 A, and the like. Specific examples of the oxime compound include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime), and the like. Commercially available products include Irgacure OXE01, Irgacure OXE02, Irgacure OXE03, Irgacure OXE04, and Irgacure OXE05 (all manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-301, TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-305, TR-PBG-309, TR-PBG-3054, TR-PBG-3057, TR-PBG-314, TR-PBG-327, and TR-PBG-309. Examples of the oxime compound include R-PBG-345, TR-PBG-346, TR-PBG-358, TR-PBG-365, TR-PBG-380, TR-PBG-610, TR-NPI-807, TR-PBG-A, and TR-PBG-B (all manufactured by TRONLY), ADEKA OPTOMER N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, photopolymerization initiator 2 described in JP-A 2012-014052), and Esacure 563 (manufactured by IGM). In addition, it is also preferable to use, as the oxime compound, a compound that is not colorable or a compound that is highly transparent and does not easily discolor. Commercially available products include ADEKA Arcles NCI-730, NCI-831, NCI-831E, and NCI-930 (all manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).

 他の光重合開始剤としては、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0143~0149に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 Other photopolymerization initiators that can be used include oxime compounds having a fluorene ring, oxime compounds having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is replaced with a naphthalene ring, oxime compounds having a fluorine atom, oxime compounds having a nitro group, oxime compounds having a benzofuran skeleton, oxime compounds in which a substituent having a hydroxy group is bonded to a carbazole skeleton, and compounds described in paragraphs 0143 to 0149 of WO 2022/085485.

 他の光重合開始剤としては、式(OX-1)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 Another photopolymerization initiator that can be used is a compound represented by formula (OX-1).

 式(OX-1)中、X1aは芳香族環および複素環からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む2価の連結基を表し、
 R1aは水素原子またはアシル基を表し、
 R2aはアルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 R3aおよびR4aはそれぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、
 AlkおよびAlkはそれぞれ独立してアルキル基を表し、
 R3aとR4aは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 AlkとAlkは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 nは0または1を表す。
In formula (OX-1), X 1a represents a divalent linking group containing at least one ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring and a heterocyclic ring;
R 1a represents a hydrogen atom or an acyl group;
R2a represents an alkyl group or an aryl group;
R 3a and R 4a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
Alk 1 and Alk 2 each independently represent an alkyl group;
R 3a and R 4a may be bonded to form a ring;
Alk 1 and Alk 2 may be linked to form a ring;
n represents 0 or 1.

 式(OX-1)のX1aが表す2価の連結基としては、2価の芳香族環基、2価の複素環基、2以上の芳香族環基を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基、2以上の複素環基を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基、芳香族環基と複素環基を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基が挙げられる。上記芳香族環基同士、複素環基同士、または、芳香族環基と複素環基とを結合する連結基としては、-CH-、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-NR-及びこれらを組み合わせた基などが挙げられる。Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基または複素環基を表す。 Examples of the divalent linking group represented by X 1a in formula (OX-1) include a divalent aromatic ring group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent group in which two or more aromatic ring groups are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, a divalent group in which two or more heterocyclic groups are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, and a divalent group in which an aromatic ring group and a heterocyclic group are bonded via a single bond or a linking group. Examples of the linking group that bonds the above-mentioned aromatic ring groups, heterocyclic groups, or aromatic ring groups and heterocyclic groups include -CH 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -NR x -, and groups formed by combining these. R x represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.

 式(OX-1)のX1aは、式(X-1)~(X-13)のいずれで表される基であることが好ましく、式(X-1)、式(X-2)、式(X-4)、式(X-6)または式(X-8)で表される基であることがより好ましく、式(X-2)または式(X-6)で表される基であることが更に好ましい。
X 1a in formula (OX-1) is preferably a group represented by any one of formulas (X-1) to (X-13), more preferably a group represented by formula (X-1), formula (X-2), formula (X-4), formula (X-6) or formula (X-8), and even more preferably a group represented by formula (X-2) or formula (X-6).

 式中RX1~RX9は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、*は結合手を表す。 In the formula, R X1 to R X9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and * represents a bond.

 RX1~RX9が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group.

 RX1~RX9が表すアルケニル基の炭素数は、2~15であることが好ましく、2~10であることがより好ましい。アルケニル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルケニル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 2 to 15, and more preferably 2 to 10. The alkenyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkenyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group.

 RX1~RX9が表すアルキニル基の炭素数は、2~15であることが好ましく、2~10であることがより好ましい。アルキニル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキニル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkynyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 2 to 15, and more preferably 2 to 10. The alkynyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkynyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group.

 RX1~RX9が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、ヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group.

 RX1~RX9が表すヘテロアリール基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基などが挙げられる。 The heteroaryl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The heteroatoms contained in the heteroaryl group are preferably oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur atoms. The number of heteroatoms contained in the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3. The heteroaryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and an aryl group.

 式(OX-1)のR1aは水素原子またはアシル基を表し、アシル基であることが好ましい。 In formula (OX-1), R 1a represents a hydrogen atom or an acyl group, and is preferably an acyl group.

 式(OX-1)のR2aは、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、発生ラジカルの反応性が高いという理由からアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 R2aが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5であることが更に好ましく、1~3であることがより一層好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換のアルキル基であることが好ましい。R2aが表すアルキル基は、無置換の直鎖または分岐のアルキル基であることが好ましく、無置換の直鎖のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 R2aが表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換のアリール基であることが好ましい。
R 2a in formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group because the reactivity of the generated radical is high.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 2a is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group. The alkyl group represented by R 2a is preferably an unsubstituted linear or branched alkyl group, and more preferably an unsubstituted linear alkyl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R 2a is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted aryl group.

 式(OX-1)のR3aおよびR4aはそれぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 R3aおよびR4aが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5であることが更に好ましく、1~3であることがより一層好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換のアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 R3aとR4aは結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環は、5員環または6員環の環であることが好ましく、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましい。
In formula (OX-1), R 3a and R 4a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and preferably a hydrogen atom.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 3a and R 4a is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group.
R3a and R4a may be bonded to form a ring. The formed ring is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.

 式(OX-1)のAlkおよびAlkはそれぞれ独立してアルキル基を表す。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5であることが更に好ましく、1~3であることがより一層好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換のアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 AlkとAlkは結合して環を形成していてもよく、環を形成していることが好ましい。形成される環は、5員環または6員環の環であることが好ましく、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましく、シクロペンタン環またはシクロヘキサン環であることがより好ましい。
In formula (OX-1), Alk 1 and Alk 2 each independently represent an alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group.
Alk1 and Alk2 may be bonded to form a ring, and preferably form a ring. The ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and more preferably a cyclopentane ring or a cyclohexane ring.

 式(OX-1)のnは0または1を表し、0であることが好ましい。 In formula (OX-1), n represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.

 式(OX-1)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特開2012-113104号公報の段落番号0092~0096に記載の化合物、特開2012-189997号公報の段落番号0041に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of compounds represented by formula (OX-1) include the compounds described in paragraphs 0092 to 0096 of JP-A No. 2012-113104 and the compound described in paragraph 0041 of JP-A No. 2012-189997.

 他の光重合開始剤としては、式(OX-2)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 Another photopolymerization initiator that can be used is a compound represented by formula (OX-2).

 式(OX-2)中、R1bおよびR2bはそれぞれ独立して置換基を表し、R3b~R7bは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、Ar1bは置換基を有していてもよいアリール基または置換基を有していてもよいヘテロアリール基を表し、nは0または1を表す。 In formula (OX-2), R 1b and R 2b each independently represent a substituent, R 3b to R 7b each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, Ar 1b represents an aryl group which may have a substituent or a heteroaryl group which may have a substituent, and n represents 0 or 1.

 R1bおよびR2bが表す置換基としては、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、ヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、ヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。 Examples of the substituent represented by R 1b and R 2b include an alkyl group and an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group.

 R3b~R7bが表す置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられる。アルキル基およびアリール基としては上述したものが挙げられる。
 R3b~R7bは水素原子であることが好ましい。
The substituents represented by R 3b to R 7b include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, and an aryl group, the alkyl group and aryl group being those mentioned above.
R 3b to R 7b are preferably hydrogen atoms.

 Ar1bは置換基を有していてもよいアリール基または置換基を有していてもよいヘテロアリール基を表し、Ar1bは置換基を有していてもよいアリール基であることが好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ニトロ基およびアシル基が挙げられ、アシル基であることが好ましい。 Ar 1b represents an aryl group which may have a substituent or a heteroaryl group which may have a substituent, and Ar 1b is preferably an aryl group which may have a substituent. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a nitro group, and an acyl group, and an acyl group is preferred.

 他の光重合開始剤としては、式(OX-3)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 Another photopolymerization initiator that can be used is a compound represented by formula (OX-3).

 式(OX-3)中、Ar1cは(k+m+1)価の芳香族環基または(k+m+1)価の複素環基を表し、
 Ar2cは(k+2)価の芳香族環基または(k+2)価の複素環基を表し、
 R1c~R3cはそれぞれ独立して置換基を表し、
 L1cは単結合またはCR11c12cを表し、R11c及びR12cはそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 X1cは-CH-、-N-、-O-または-S-を表し、
 kは0または1を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0または1を表す。
In formula (OX-3), Ar 1c represents a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+m+1)-valent heterocyclic group;
Ar 2c represents a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+2)-valent heterocyclic group;
R 1c to R 3c each independently represent a substituent;
L 1c represents a single bond or CR 11c R 12c , and R 11c and R 12c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group;
X 1c represents —CH 2 —, —N—, —O— or —S—;
k represents 0 or 1; m represents an integer of 0 to 4; and n represents 0 or 1.

 R1cおよびR2cが表す置換基としては、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、ヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、ヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。
 R2cは、分岐または環状構造を有するアルキル基であることが好ましい。
Examples of the substituent represented by R 1c and R 2c include an alkyl group and an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferred. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heteroaryl group.
R 2c is preferably an alkyl group having a branched or cyclic structure.

 R3cが表す置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基およびアシル基が挙げられ、アシル基であることが好ましい。 Examples of the substituent represented by R 3c include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group and an acyl group, with an acyl group being preferred.

 L1cは、単結合またはCR11c12cを表し、R11c及びR12cはそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。R11c及びR12cにおけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、R1c及びR2cにおけるアルキル基及びアリール基と同義である。kが1である場合、L1cは単結合であることが好ましい。 L 1c represents a single bond or CR 11c R 12c , and R 11c and R 12c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. The alkyl group and aryl group in R 11c and R 12c have the same meanings as the alkyl group and aryl group in R 1c and R 2c . When k is 1, L 1c is preferably a single bond.

 X1cは、-CH-、-N-、-O-または-S-を表し、-O-または-S-が好ましい。 X 1c represents —CH 2 —, —N—, —O— or —S—, and is preferably —O— or —S—.

 Ar1cは(k+m+1)価の芳香族環基または(k+m+1)価の複素環基を表し、(k+m+1)価の芳香族環基であることが好ましい。芳香族環基はベンゼン環基またはナフタレン環基であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環基であることがより好ましい。 Ar 1c represents a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+m+1)-valent heterocyclic group, and is preferably a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group. The aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.

 Ar2cは(k+2)価の芳香族環基または(k+2)価の複素環基を表し、(k+2)価の芳香族環基であることが好ましい。芳香族環基はベンゼン環基またはナフタレン環基であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環基であることがより好ましい。 Ar2c represents a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+2)-valent heterocyclic group, and is preferably a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group. The aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.

 kは0または1を表し、0であることが好ましい。
 mは0~4の整数を表し、0または1であることが好ましく、1であることがより好ましい。
 nは0または1を表し、0であることが好ましい。
k represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.
m represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 1.
n represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.

 オキシム化合物の具体例としては以下に示す化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of oxime compounds include the compounds shown below.

 他の光重合開始剤としては、2官能あるいは3官能以上の光重合開始剤を用いてもよい。2官能あるいは3官能以上の光重合開始剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落0148に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As other photopolymerization initiators, bifunctional, trifunctional or higher functional photopolymerization initiators may also be used. Specific examples of bifunctional, trifunctional or higher functional photopolymerization initiators include the compounds described in paragraph 0148 of WO 2022/065215.

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤の含有量は1~20質量%が好ましい。下限は、1.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、2質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、15質量%以下であることが好ましく、10質量%以下であることがより好ましく、8質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。本発明の光硬化性組成物において、光重合開始剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 20% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 1.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 2% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less, and even more preferably 8% by mass or less. In the photocurable composition of the present invention, only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.

 光重合開始剤中における特定化合物の含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、80質量%以上であることがより好ましく、90質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the specific compound in the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, and even more preferably 90% by mass or more.

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における特定化合物の含有量は0.1~50質量%が好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、1質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、45質量%以下であることが好ましく、40質量%以下であることがより好ましく、30質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。本発明の光硬化性組成物において、特定化合物は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the specific compound in the total solids of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 45% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less. In the photocurable composition of the present invention, only one type of specific compound may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.

<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、重合性化合物を含有する。重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。本発明で用いられる重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性化合物であることが好ましい。
<<Polymerizable compound>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound. Examples of the polymerizable compound include a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, and a (meth)acryloyl group. The polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.

 重合性化合物としては、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマーなどの化学的形態のいずれであってもよいが、モノマーが好ましい。重合性化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましい。上限は、2000以下がより好ましく、1500以下が更に好ましい。下限は、150以上がより好ましく、250以上が更に好ましい。 The polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form, such as a monomer, prepolymer, or oligomer, but a monomer is preferred. The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3,000. The upper limit is more preferably 2,000 or less, and even more preferably 1,500 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 150 or more, and even more preferably 250 or more.

 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を2個以上含む化合物であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を2~15個含む化合物であることがより好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を2~6個含む化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、2~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、2~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましい。重合性化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落番号0075~0083に記載の化合物、台湾特許出願公開第201832008号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing two or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 2 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and even more preferably a compound containing 2 to 6 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. Furthermore, the polymerizable compound is preferably a difunctional to 15functional (meth)acrylate compound, and more preferably a difunctional to hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound. Specific examples of polymerizable compounds include the compounds described in paragraphs 0075 to 0083 of WO 2022/065215 and the compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201832008.

 重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬(株)製、NKエステルA-DPH-12E;新中村化学工業(株)製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコールおよび/またはプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造の化合物(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)が好ましい。また、重合性化合物としては、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはM-460;東亞合成(株)製)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、NKエステルA-TMMT)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(日本化薬(株)製、KAYARAD HDDA)、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、NKオリゴUA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600、LINC-202UA(共栄社化学(株)製)、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(以上、大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)、、アロニックスM-510、520(東亞合成(株)製、酸性基を有する重合性化合物)、Etercure6361-100(Eternal Materials社製、ハイパーブランチ構造を有する重合性化合物)、HOA-MPL(2-アクリロイルオキシエチル-フタル酸:共栄社化学(株)製)、HOA-MPE(2-アクリロイルオキシエチル-2-ヒドロキシエチル-フタル酸:共栄社化学(株)製)、特開2023-043479号公報に記載のデンドリマー構造またはハイパーブランチ構造を有する重合性化合物、特表2023-529984号公報に記載の重合性化合物などを用いることもできる。 Preferred polymerizable compounds include dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-330, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-320, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-310, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products: KAYARAD DPHA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., and NK Ester A-DPH-12E, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and compounds in which the (meth)acryloyl group is bonded via an ethylene glycol and/or propylene glycol residue (e.g., SR454, SR499, commercially available from Sartomer). Examples of polymerizable compounds include diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth)acrylate (commercially available product: M-460, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (NK Ester A-TMMT, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (KAYARAD HDDA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and RP-104. 0 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK Oligo UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), U A-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600, LINC-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (all manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), Light Acrylate POB-A0 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-510, 520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., polymerizable compounds having an acidic group), Etercure 6361-100 (manufactured by Eternal Materials, polymerizable compound having a hyperbranched structure), HOA-MPL (2-acryloyloxyethyl-phthalic acid: manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), HOA-MPE (2-acryloyloxyethyl-2-hydroxyethyl-phthalic acid: manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), polymerizable compounds having a dendrimer structure or hyperbranched structure described in JP 2023-043479 A, and polymerizable compounds described in JP 2023-529984 A can also be used.

 重合性化合物としては、エチレンオキシド繰り返し鎖を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。この態様によれば、本発明の効果がより顕著に発揮される。エチレンオキシド繰り返し鎖を有する重合性化合物としては、式(EO-1)で表される化合物などが挙げられる。
As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having an ethylene oxide repeating chain can also be used. According to this embodiment, the effects of the present invention are more pronounced. Examples of the polymerizable compound having an ethylene oxide repeating chain include a compound represented by formula (EO-1).

 式(EO-1)のRE1は、水素原子またはメチル基を表す。 R E1 in formula (EO-1) represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.

 式(EO-1)のLE1は、m価の連結基を表す。LE1が表すm価の連結基は、炭化水素基、複素環基、-O-、-S-、-NRA1-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-SO-およびこれらの基を2以上の組み合わせた基などが挙げられる。RA1は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、芳香族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、環状であってもよく、非環状であってもよい。非環状の脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖の脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、分岐の脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基を有していなくてもよい。また、環状の脂肪族炭化水素基、および、芳香族炭化水素基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基は、脂肪族複素環基であっても、芳香族複素環基であってもよい。また、複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子などが挙げられる。 In formula (EO-1), L E1 represents an m-valent linking group. Examples of the m-valent linking group represented by L E1 include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, —O—, —S—, —NR A1 —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 —, and groups combining two or more of these groups. R A1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom. The hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or acyclic. The acyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The hydrocarbon group may or may not have a substituent. The cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. The heterocyclic group may be a single ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. In addition, examples of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.

 式(EO-1)のnは1~20の整数を表し、mは2~10の整数を表す。nは1~15の整数であることが好ましく、1~10の整数であることがより好ましい。mは2~8の整数であることが好ましく、2~6の整数であることがより好ましい。 In formula (EO-1), n represents an integer from 1 to 20, and m represents an integer from 2 to 10. n is preferably an integer from 1 to 15, and more preferably an integer from 1 to 10. m is preferably an integer from 2 to 8, and more preferably an integer from 2 to 6.

 重合性化合物としては、フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物は、2官能の重合性化合物であることが好ましい。フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、オグソールEA-0200、EA-0300(大阪ガスケミカル(株)製、フルオレン骨格を有する(メタ)アクリレートモノマー)などが挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used. The polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton is preferably a bifunctional polymerizable compound. Commercially available polymerizable compounds having a fluorene skeleton include OGSOL EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomers having a fluorene skeleton).

 重合性化合物としては、アミノ基とエチレン性不飽和結合含有基とを有する化合物(以下、アミンモノマーともいう)を用いることもできる。 As the polymerizable compound, a compound having an amino group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group (hereinafter also referred to as an amine monomer) can also be used.

 アミンモノマーは、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を1~10個含む化合物であることが好ましく、2~10個含む化合物であることがより好ましく、3~10個含む化合物であることが更に好ましい。 The amine monomer is preferably a compound containing 1 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 2 to 10 groups, and even more preferably a compound containing 3 to 10 groups.

 アミンモノマーのpKaHは、5.5以上であることが好ましく、6.5以上であることがより好ましく、アミンによる酸素阻害の抑制効果が高く、感光性組成物の感度をより高めることができるという理由から、7.5以上であることが更に好ましい。なお、pKaHとは塩基の共役酸のpKaを表す値である。本明細書において、アミンモノマーのpKaHの値は、A Web Server for Small Molecule pKa Prediction Using a Graph-Convolutional Neural Network J. Chem. Inf. Model. 2021, 61, 7, 3159-3165に記載の方法に準じて計算した値を用いる。 The pKaH of the amine monomer is preferably 5.5 or higher, more preferably 6.5 or higher, and even more preferably 7.5 or higher, because this effectively suppresses oxygen inhibition by the amine and further increases the sensitivity of the photosensitive composition. Note that pKaH is a value representing the pKa of the conjugate acid of the base. In this specification, the pKaH value of the amine monomer is calculated in accordance with the method described in A Web Server for Small Molecule pKa Prediction Using a Graph-Convolutional Neural Network, J. Chem. Inf. Model. 2021, 61, 7, 3159-3165.

 アミンモノマーのエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価(C=C価)は、0.5~11mmol/gであることが好ましい。上限は、10mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、9mmol/g以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、1mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、2mmol/g以上であることがより好ましい。なお、アミンモノマーのエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価は、アミンモノマーの固形分1gあたりのエチレン性不飽和結合含有基のモル量を表した数値である。 The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value (C=C value) of the amine monomer is preferably 0.5 to 11 mmol/g. The upper limit is preferably 10 mmol/g or less, and more preferably 9 mmol/g or less. The lower limit is preferably 1 mmol/g or more, and more preferably 2 mmol/g or more. The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the amine monomer is a numerical value representing the molar amount of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups per gram of solids in the amine monomer.

 アミンモノマーのアミン価は、1~150mgKOH/gであることが好ましい。アミン価の下限は、2.5mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、5mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましい。アミン価の上限は、125mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましい。 The amine value of the amine monomer is preferably 1 to 150 mgKOH/g. The lower limit of the amine value is preferably 2.5 mgKOH/g or more, and more preferably 5 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit of the amine value is preferably 125 mgKOH/g or less, and more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.

 アミンモノマーの水酸基価は、75mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、50mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、30mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましい。 The hydroxyl value of the amine monomer is preferably 75 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 30 mgKOH/g or less.

 アミンモノマーの分子量は100~5000であることが好ましく、200~3000であることがより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the amine monomer is preferably 100 to 5,000, and more preferably 200 to 3,000.

 アミンモノマーの市販品としては、ダイセル・オルネクス社製のEbecryl80、Ebecryl81、Ebecryl83、Ebecryl7100、東亞合成(株)製のアロニックスMT-3041、3042、共栄社化学(株)製のライトエステルDE、ライトエステルDM、アルケマ社製のCN383、CN371 NS、CN386、CN549 NS、CN550、CN551 NS、CN9906NS等が挙げられる。 Commercially available amine monomers include Ebecryl 80, Ebecryl 81, Ebecryl 83, and Ebecryl 7100 manufactured by Daicel Allnex Corporation, Aronix MT-3041 and 3042 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., Light Ester DE and Light Ester DM manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., and CN383, CN371 NS, CN386, CN549 NS, CN550, CN551 NS, and CN9906NS manufactured by Arkema.

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物の含有量は、1~30質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、3質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、重合性化合物を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。重合性化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 30% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, and even more preferably 10% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more.
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain only one polymerizable compound or may contain two or more polymerizable compounds. When two or more polymerizable compounds are contained, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.

<<樹脂>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は樹脂を含むことが好ましい。樹脂は、例えば、顔料などを光硬化性組成物中で分散させる用途や、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料などを光硬化性組成物中で分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的として樹脂を使用することもできる。
<<Resin>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, to disperse pigments or the like in the photocurable composition or as a binder. Resins used primarily to disperse pigments or the like in the photocurable composition are also called dispersants. However, these uses of resins are merely examples, and resins can also be used for purposes other than these uses.

 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、3000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下が好ましく、500000以下がより好ましい。下限は、4000以上が好ましく、5000以上がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000. The upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, and more preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 4,000 or more, and more preferably 5,000 or more.

 樹脂としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミック酸樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、シロキサン樹脂などが挙げられ、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミック酸樹脂およびポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましい。ポリイミド樹脂およびポリアミック酸樹脂は、芳香族酸二無水物または脂肪族酸二無水物を、芳香族ジアミンまたは脂肪族ジアミンと重縮合させることで得られる。ポリイミド樹脂およびポリアミック酸樹脂は、架橋性基を有していてもよい。架橋性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基および環状エーテル基などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチレン基などが挙げられる。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基およびオキセタニル基などが挙げられる。ポリイミド樹脂およびポリアミック酸樹脂は、特開2023-166413号公報に記載のカルボン酸を有するポリイミドまたはポリアミック酸に架橋性基を導入した樹脂、国際公開第2022/019253号に記載のポリイミド樹脂またはポリアミック酸樹脂、国際公開第2022/019254号に記載のポリイミド樹脂またはポリアミック酸樹脂の両末端部にポリ(メタ)アクリル、ポリエーテル、またはポリエステル構造またはその組み合わせを有するブロック樹脂、国際公開第2022/019255号に記載のグラフトポリマー部を有するポリエステル部分構造とポリアミック酸部分構造の両方を有する樹脂等を用いることもできる。 Examples of resins include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, (meth)acrylamide resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyamic acid resins, polybenzoxazole resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, and siloxane resins. At least one resin selected from (meth)acrylic resins, polyester resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyamic acid resins, and polybenzoxazole resins is preferred. Polyimide resins and polyamic acid resins are obtained by polycondensation of aromatic or aliphatic acid dianhydrides with aromatic or aliphatic diamines. Polyimide resins and polyamic acid resins may contain crosslinkable groups. Examples of crosslinkable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups. Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, and styrene groups. Examples of cyclic ether groups include epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups. Examples of polyimide resins and polyamic acid resins include resins in which crosslinkable groups have been introduced into polyimides or polyamic acids having carboxylic acids, as described in JP 2023-166413 A; polyimide resins or polyamic acid resins, as described in WO 2022/019253; block resins having poly(meth)acrylic, polyether, or polyester structures or combinations thereof at both ends of polyimide resins or polyamic acid resins, as described in WO 2022/019254; and resins having both a polyester moiety with a graft polymer portion and a polyamic acid moiety, as described in WO 2022/019255.

 樹脂としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落番号0091~0099に記載の樹脂、特開2016-222891号公報に記載されたブロックポリイソシアネート樹脂、特開2020-122052号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-111656号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-139021号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-138503号公報に記載の主鎖に環構造を有する構成単位と側鎖にビフェニル基を有する構成単位とを含む樹脂、特開2020-186373号公報の段落0199~0233に記載の樹脂、特開2020-186325号公報に記載のアルカリ可溶性樹脂、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0078339号公報に記載の式1で表される樹脂、国際公開第2022/030445号に記載のエポキシ基と酸基を含む共重合体、特開2018-135514号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2020-041046号公報に記載の共重合体、特開2023-033156号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2023-030386号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2023-027753号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2020-139021号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2023-074038号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2023-079666号公報に記載の樹脂、中国特許出願公開第115947929号明細書に記載のカルド樹脂を用いることもできる。 Resins include those described in paragraphs 0091 to 0099 of WO 2022/065215, blocked polyisocyanate resins described in JP 2016-222891 A, resins described in JP 2020-122052 A, resins described in JP 2020-111656 A, resins described in JP 2020-139021 A, resins containing a structural unit having a ring structure in the main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in the side chain described in JP 2017-138503 A, resins described in paragraphs 0199 to 0233 of JP 2020-186373 A, alkali-soluble resins described in JP 2020-186325 A, and Korean Patent Publication No. Resins represented by Formula 1 described in JP-A-2020-0078339, copolymers containing epoxy groups and acid groups described in WO 2022/030445, resins described in JP-A-2018-135514, copolymers described in JP-A-2020-041046, resins described in JP-A-2023-033156, resins described in JP-A-2023-030386, resins described in JP-A-2023-027753, resins described in JP-A-2020-139021, resins described in JP-A-2023-074038, resins described in JP-A-2023-079666, and cardo resins described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 115947929 can also be used.

 樹脂としては、酸基を有する樹脂を用いることが好ましい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。 It is preferable to use a resin having an acid group. Examples of acid groups include a carboxy group, a phosphate group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group.

 酸基を有する樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gであることが好ましい。下限は、40mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、300mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましい。酸基を有する樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5000~100000であることが好ましく、5000~50000であることがより好ましい。酸基を有する樹脂の数平均分子量(Mn)は、1000~20000であることが好ましい。 The acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is preferably 40 mgKOH/g or more, and more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 50,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 1,000 to 20,000.

 酸基を有する樹脂は、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましく、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を樹脂の全繰り返し単位中5~70モル%含むことがより好ましい。酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量の上限は、50モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量の下限は、10モル%以上であることが好ましく、20モル%以上であることがより好ましい。 The resin having an acid group preferably contains repeating units having an acid group on the side chain, and more preferably contains 5 to 70 mol% of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain out of all repeating units of the resin. The upper limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more.

 酸基を有する樹脂については、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0558~0571(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の段落番号0685~0700)の記載、特開2012-198408号公報の段落番号0076~0099の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、酸基を有する樹脂は市販品を用いることもできる。また、樹脂への酸基の導入方法としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、特許第6349629号公報に記載の方法が挙げられる。更に、樹脂への酸基の導入方法としては、エポキシ基の開環反応で生じたヒドロキシ基に酸無水物を反応させて酸基を導入する方法も挙げられる。 For resins having acid groups, please refer to paragraphs [0558] to [0571] of JP 2012-208494 A (corresponding paragraphs [0685] to [0700] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) and paragraphs [0076] to [0099] of JP 2012-198408 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Commercially available resins having acid groups can also be used. There are no particular restrictions on the method for introducing acid groups into the resin, but examples include the method described in Japanese Patent No. 6,349,629 A. Another method for introducing acid groups into the resin involves reacting an acid anhydride with the hydroxyl group generated by the ring-opening reaction of an epoxy group.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、塩基性基を有する樹脂を含むことも好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有する共重合体であることがより好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と、塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有するブロック共重合体であることが更に好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は分散剤として用いることもできる。塩基性基を有する樹脂のアミン価は、5~300mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、10mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、20mgKOH/g以上がより好ましい。上限は、200mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下がより好ましい。 The photocurable composition of the present invention also preferably contains a resin having a basic group. The resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain, more preferably a copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not having a basic group, and even more preferably a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not having a basic group. The resin having a basic group can also be used as a dispersant. The amine value of the resin having a basic group is preferably 5 to 300 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.

 塩基性基を有する樹脂の市販品としては、DISPERBYK-161、162、163、164、166、167、168、174、182、183、184、185、2000、2001、2050、2150、2163、2164、BYK-LPN6919(以上、ビックケミー社製)、ソルスパース11200、13240、13650、13940、24000、26000、28000、32000、32500、32550、32600、33000、34750、35100、35200、37500、38500、39000、53095、56000、7100(以上、日本ルーブリゾール社製)、Efka PX 4300、4330、4046、4060、4080(以上、BASF社製)等が挙げられる。また、塩基性基を有する樹脂は、特開2014-219665号公報の段落番号0063~0112に記載されたブロック共重合体(B)、特開2018-156021号公報の段落番号0046~0076に記載されたブロック共重合体A1、特開2019-184763号公報の段落番号0150~0153に記載された塩基性基を有するビニル樹脂を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Commercially available resins with basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, and BYK-LPN6919 (all manufactured by BYK-Chemie), Solsperse 11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, and 24 000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 37500, 38500, 39000, 53095, 56000, 7100 (all manufactured by Lubrizol Japan), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (all manufactured by BASF), and the like. Additionally, the resin having a basic group may be the block copolymer (B) described in paragraphs [0063] to [0112] of JP 2014-219665 A, the block copolymer A1 described in paragraphs [0046] to [0076] of JP 2018-156021 A, or the vinyl resin having a basic group described in paragraphs [0150] to [0153] of JP 2019-184763 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とをそれぞれ含むことも好ましい。この態様によれば、光硬化性組成物の保存安定性をより向上できる。酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とを併用する場合、塩基性基を有する樹脂の含有量は、酸基を有する樹脂の100質量部に対して20~500質量部であることが好ましく、30~300質量部であることがより好ましく、50~200質量部であることが更に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the photocurable composition of the present invention contains both a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group. This embodiment further improves the storage stability of the photocurable composition. When a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group are used in combination, the content of the resin having a basic group is preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 300 parts by mass, and even more preferably 50 to 200 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group.

 樹脂としては、芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂を用いることも好ましい。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂において、芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていてもよく、繰り返し単位の側鎖に含まれていてもよい。芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていることが好ましい。なお、本明細書において、芳香族カルボキシ基とは、芳香族環にカルボキシ基が1個以上結合した構造の基のことである。芳香族カルボキシ基において、芳香族環に結合したカルボキシ基の数は、1~4個であることが好ましく、1~2個であることがより好ましい。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂としては、国際公開第2021/166858号の段落0082~0107に記載された樹脂が挙げられる。 It is also preferable to use a resin having an aromatic carboxy group as the resin. In a resin having an aromatic carboxy group, the aromatic carboxy group may be contained in the main chain of the repeating unit or in the side chain of the repeating unit. The aromatic carboxy group is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit. In this specification, an aromatic carboxy group refers to a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring. In the aromatic carboxy group, the number of carboxy groups bonded to the aromatic ring is preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 to 2. Examples of resins having an aromatic carboxy group include the resins described in paragraphs 0082 to 0107 of WO 2021/166858.

 樹脂としては、架橋性基を有する樹脂を用いることも好ましい。架橋性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基および環状エーテル基などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチレン基などが挙げられる。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基およびオキセタニル基などが挙げられる。架橋性基を有する樹脂を用いる場合、光硬化性組成物に含まれる樹脂中における架橋性基を有する樹脂の含有量は、30質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、70質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。 It is also preferable to use a resin having a crosslinkable group as the resin. Examples of crosslinkable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups. Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, and styrene groups. Examples of cyclic ether groups include epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups. When a resin having a crosslinkable group is used, the content of the resin having a crosslinkable group in the resin contained in the photocurable composition is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 70% by mass or more.

 樹脂としては、グラフト樹脂を含むことが好ましい。グラフト樹脂としては、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を有する樹脂などが挙げられる。なお、本明細書において、グラフト鎖とは、繰り返し単位の主鎖から枝分かれして伸びるポリマー鎖のことを意味する。グラフト鎖としては、水素原子を除いた原子数が40~10000であることが好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が50~2000であることがより好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が60~500であることが更に好ましい。 The resin preferably contains a graft resin. Examples of graft resins include resins having repeating units with graft chains. In this specification, a graft chain refers to a polymer chain that branches off from the main chain of the repeating unit. The graft chain preferably has 40 to 10,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, more preferably 50 to 2,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, and even more preferably 60 to 500 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms.

 グラフト鎖は、ポリエステル構造、ポリエーテル構造、ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造、ポリスチレン構造、ポリウレタン構造、ポリウレア構造およびポリアミド構造からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造の繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましく、ポリエステル構造、ポリエーテル構造、ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造およびポリスチレン構造からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造の繰り返し単位を含むことがより好ましく、ポリエステル構造、ポリエーテル構造およびポリ(メタ)アクリル構造からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造の繰り返し単位を含むことが更に好ましく、ポリエステル構造またはポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位を含むことがより一層好ましく、ポリエステル構造の繰り返し単位を含むことが特に好ましい。 The graft chain preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polyester structure, polyether structure, poly(meth)acrylic structure, polystyrene structure, polyurethane structure, polyurea structure, and polyamide structure; more preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polyester structure, polyether structure, poly(meth)acrylic structure, and polystyrene structure; even more preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polyester structure, polyether structure, and poly(meth)acrylic structure; still more preferably contains repeating units of a polyester structure or polyether structure; and particularly preferably contains repeating units of a polyester structure.

 ポリエステル構造の繰り返し単位としては、下記の式(G-1)、式(G-4)または式(G-5)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位としては、下記の式(G-2)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位としては、下記の式(G-3)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリスチレン構造の繰り返し単位としては、下記の式(G-6)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Examples of repeating units of polyester structures include repeating units of structures represented by the following formula (G-1), formula (G-4), or formula (G-5). Examples of repeating units of polyether structures include repeating units of structures represented by the following formula (G-2). Examples of repeating units of poly(meth)acrylic structures include repeating units of structures represented by the following formula (G-3). Examples of repeating units of polystyrene structures include repeating units of structures represented by the following formula (G-6).

 上記式において、RG1およびRG2は、それぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表す。
 RG1が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~20であることが好ましく、2~16であることがより好ましく、2~12であることが更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
 RG2が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、2~5であることが更に好ましく、2または3であることがより一層好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
In the above formula, R G1 and R G2 each independently represent an alkylene group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group represented by R G1 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 2 to 16, and even more preferably 2 to 12. The alkylene group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group represented by R G2 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 2 to 5, and still more preferably 2 or 3. The alkylene group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.

 上記式において、RG3は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、QG1は、-O-または-NH-を表し、LG1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、RG4は、水素原子または置換基を表す。
 LG1が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレンオキシ基)、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のオキシアルキレンカルボニル基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 RG4が表す置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、複素環チオエーテル基等が挙げられる。
In the above formula, R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, Q G1 represents —O— or —NH—, L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L G1 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group (preferably an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
Examples of the substituent represented by R G4 include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heterocyclic thioether group.

 RG5は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、RG6はアリール基を表す。RG6が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。RG6が表すアリール基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、複素環チオエーテル基等が挙げられる。 R G5 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R G6 represents an aryl group. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R G6 is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and still more preferably 6 to 12. The aryl group represented by R G6 may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heterocyclic thioether group.

 グラフト鎖の末端構造としては、特に限定されない。水素原子であってもよく、置換基であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、複素環チオエーテル基等が挙げられる。なかでも、立体反発効果を有する基が好ましく、炭素数5~24のアルキル基又はアルコキシ基が好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖、分岐、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。 The terminal structure of the graft chain is not particularly limited. It may be a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heterocyclic thioether group. Among these, groups that have a steric repulsion effect are preferred, and alkyl or alkoxy groups having 5 to 24 carbon atoms are preferred. The alkyl and alkoxy groups may be linear, branched, or cyclic, with linear or branched groups being preferred.

 グラフト鎖としては、下記式(G-1a)、式(G-2a)、式(G-3a)、式(G-4a)、式(G-5a)または式(G-6a)で表される構造であることが好ましく、式(G-1a)、式(G-4a)または式(G-5a)で表される構造であることがより好ましい。
The graft chain preferably has a structure represented by the following formula (G-1a), (G-2a), (G-3a), (G-4a), (G-5a) or (G-6a), and more preferably has a structure represented by formula (G-1a), (G-4a) or (G-5a).

 上記式において、RG1およびRG2は、それぞれアルキレン基を表し、RG3は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、QG1は、-O-または-NH-を表し、LG1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、RG4は、水素原子または置換基を表し、RG5は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、RG6はアリール基を表し、W100は水素原子または置換基を表し、n1~n6は、それぞれ独立して2以上の整数を表す。RG1~RG6、QG1、LG1については、式(G-1)~(G-6)で説明したRG1~RG6、QG1、LG1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In the above formula, R G1 and R G2 each represent an alkylene group, R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, Q G1 represents -O- or -NH-, L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R G5 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R G6 represents an aryl group, W 100 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and n1 to n6 each independently represent an integer of 2 or more. R G1 to R G6 , Q G1 , and L G1 have the same meanings and preferred ranges as R G1 to R G6 , Q G1 , and L G1 described in formulas (G-1) to (G-6).

 式(G-1a)~(G-6a)において、W100は置換基であることが好ましい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、複素環チオエーテル基等が挙げられる。なかでも、立体反発効果を有する基が好ましく、炭素数5~24のアルキル基又はアルコキシ基が好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖、分岐、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。 In formulae (G-1a) to (G-6a), W 100 is preferably a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heterocyclic thioether group. Among these, a group having a steric repulsion effect is preferred, and an alkyl group or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is preferred. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and linear or branched groups are preferred.

 式(G-1a)~(G-6a)において、n1~n6は、それぞれ2~100の整数が好ましく、2~80の整数がより好ましく、8~60の整数が更に好ましい。 In formulas (G-1a) to (G-6a), n1 to n6 are each preferably an integer from 2 to 100, more preferably an integer from 2 to 80, and even more preferably an integer from 8 to 60.

 式(G-1a)において、n1が2以上の場合における各繰り返し単位中のRG1同士は、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。また、RG1が異なる繰り返し単位を2種以上含む場合においては、各繰り返し単位の配列は特に限定は無く、ランダム、交互、及び、ブロックのいずれであってもよい。式(G-2a)~式(G-6a)においても同様である。また、グラフト鎖は、式(G-1a)、式(G-4a)または式(G-5a)で表される構造であって、RG1が異なる繰り返し単位を2種以上含む構造であることも好ましい。 In formula (G-1a), when n1 is 2 or greater, the R G1 in each repeating unit may be the same or different. Furthermore, when two or more different R G1 repeating units are included, the arrangement of the repeating units is not particularly limited and may be random, alternating, or block. The same applies to formulas (G-2a) to (G-6a). Furthermore, it is also preferable that the graft chain has a structure represented by formula (G-1a), formula (G-4a), or formula (G-5a) and includes two or more different R G1 repeating units.

 グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(b1-2)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Examples of the repeating unit having a graft chain include a repeating unit represented by formula (b1-2).

 式中、Ab12は3価の連結基を表し、Lb12は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Yb12はグラフト鎖を表す。 In the formula, A b12 represents a trivalent linking group, L b12 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Y b12 represents a graft chain.

 Ab12が表す3価の連結基としては、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基またはポリアルキレンイミン系連結基であることが好ましく、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by A b12 include a poly(meth)acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine linking group, a polyester linking group, a polyurethane linking group, a polyurea linking group, a polyamide linking group, a polyether linking group, and a polystyrene linking group. A poly(meth)acrylic linking group or a polyalkyleneimine linking group is preferred, and a poly(meth)acrylic linking group is more preferred.

 Lb12が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれら基を2以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。 Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L b12 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these groups.

 Yb12が表すグラフト鎖としては、上述したグラフト鎖が挙げられる。 Examples of the graft chain represented by Y b12 include the graft chains described above.

 グラフト樹脂において、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位の重量平均分子量は、1000以上であることが好ましく、1000~10000であることがより好ましく、1000~7500であることが更に好ましい。なお、本明細書において、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位の重量平均分子量は、同繰り返し単位の重合に用いた原料モノマーの重量平均分子量から算出した値である。例えば、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位は、マクロモノマーを重合することで形成できる。ここで、マクロモノマーとは、ポリマー末端に重合性基が導入された高分子化合物を意味する。マクロモノマーを用いてグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を形成した場合においては、マクロモノマーの重量平均分子量がグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位に該当する。 In a graft resin, the weight-average molecular weight of the repeating unit having a graft chain is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 1,000 to 10,000, and even more preferably 1,000 to 7,500. In this specification, the weight-average molecular weight of a repeating unit having a graft chain is a value calculated from the weight-average molecular weight of the raw material monomer used to polymerize the repeating unit. For example, a repeating unit having a graft chain can be formed by polymerizing a macromonomer. Here, a macromonomer refers to a polymeric compound in which a polymerizable group has been introduced at the polymer terminal. When a repeating unit having a graft chain is formed using a macromonomer, the weight-average molecular weight of the macromonomer corresponds to the repeating unit having a graft chain.

 グラフト樹脂において、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、グラフト樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1~60モル%であることが好ましい。上限は、50モル%以下であることが好ましく、40モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上であることが好ましく、5モル%以上であることがより好ましい。 In the graft resin, the content of repeating units having graft chains is preferably 1 to 60 mol% of the total repeating units of the graft resin. The upper limit is preferably 50 mol% or less, and more preferably 40 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, and more preferably 5 mol% or more.

 グラフト樹脂は、更に、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。架橋性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基および環状エーテル基などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチレン基などが挙げられる。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基およびオキセタニル基などが挙げられる。 It is also preferable that the graft resin further contains a repeating unit having a crosslinkable group. Examples of crosslinkable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups. Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, and styrene groups. Examples of cyclic ether groups include epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups.

 グラフト樹脂において、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、グラフト樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1モル%以上であることが好ましく、1~80モル%であることがより好ましい。上限は、70モル%以下であることが好ましく、60モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上であることが好ましく、5モル%以上であることがより好ましい。 In the graft resin, the content of repeating units having crosslinkable groups is preferably 1 mol% or more, and more preferably 1 to 80 mol%, of all repeating units in the graft resin. The upper limit is preferably 70 mol% or less, and more preferably 60 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, and more preferably 5 mol% or more.

 グラフト樹脂は、更に、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられる。 It is also preferable that the graft resin further contains a repeating unit having an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphate group.

 グラフト樹脂において、酸基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、グラフト樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1~80モル%であることが好ましく、5~80モル%であることがより好ましく、10~80モル%であることが更に好ましい。 In the graft resin, the content of repeating units having an acid group is preferably 1 to 80 mol%, more preferably 5 to 80 mol%, and even more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, of all repeating units in the graft resin.

 グラフト樹脂としては、式(Ac-2)で表される繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を用いることもできる。
 式(Ac-2)中、Ar10は芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基を表し、L11は、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、L12は3価の連結基を表し、P10はポリマー鎖を表す。
As the graft resin, a resin containing a repeating unit represented by formula (Ac-2) can also be used.
In formula (Ac-2), Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxy group, L 11 represents —COO— or —CONH—, L 12 represents a trivalent linking group, and P 10 represents a polymer chain.

 式(Ac-2)のAr10が表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基としては、芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造、芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造などが挙げられる。芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物および芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物としては、下記構造の化合物が挙げられる。
Examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 10 in formula (Ac-2) include a structure derived from an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride, a structure derived from an aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride, etc. Examples of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride and aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride include compounds having the following structure:

 上記式中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、下記式(Q-1)で表される基または下記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
In the above formula, Q 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO—, —SO 2 —, —C(CF 3 ) 2 —, a group represented by the following formula (Q-1) or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).

 Ar10が表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基は、架橋性基を有していてもよい。Ar10が表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基の具体例としては、式(Ar-11)で表される基、式(Ar-12)で表される基、式(Ar-13)で表される基などが挙げられる。
The group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 10 may have a crosslinkable group. Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 10 include a group represented by formula (Ar-11), a group represented by formula (Ar-12), and a group represented by formula (Ar-13).

 式(Ar-11)中、n1は1~4の整数を表し、1または2であることが好ましく、2であることがより好ましい。
 式(Ar-12)中、n2は1~8の整数を表し、1~4の整数であることが好ましく、1または2であることがより好ましく、2であることが更に好ましい。
 式(Ar-13)中、n3およびn4はそれぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、0~2の整数であることが好ましく、1または2であることがより好ましく、1であることが更に好ましい。ただし、n3およびn4の少なくとも一方は1以上の整数である。
 式(Ar-13)中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、上記式(Q-1)で表される基または上記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
 式(Ar-11)~(Ar-13)中、*1はL10との結合位置を表す。
In formula (Ar-11), n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-12), n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-13), n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 1. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or greater.
In formula (Ar-13), Q 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO—, —SO 2 —, —C(CF 3 ) 2 —, a group represented by formula (Q-1) above or a group represented by formula (Q-2) above.
In the formulae (Ar-11) to (Ar-13), *1 represents the bonding position with L10 .

 式(Ac-2)のL11は、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、-COO-であることが好ましい。 L 11 in formula (Ac-2) represents —COO— or —CONH—, and is preferably —COO—.

 式(Ac-2)のL12が表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。L12が表す3価の連結基は、式(L12-1)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(L12-2)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 in formula (Ac-2) include hydrocarbon groups, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and groups combining two or more of these. Examples of the hydrocarbon group include aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and aromatic hydrocarbon groups. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20, and even more preferably 1 to 15. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 10. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by formula (L12-1), and more preferably a group represented by formula (L12-2).

 式(L12-1)中、L12bは3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(Ac-2)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(Ac-2)のP10との結合位置を表す。L12bが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、炭化水素基または炭化水素基と-O-とを組み合わせた基であることが好ましい。 In formula (L12-1), L 12b represents a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, *1 represents the bonding position to L 11 in formula (Ac-2), and *2 represents the bonding position to P 10 in formula (Ac-2). Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by L 12b include hydrocarbon groups and groups in which a hydrocarbon group is combined with at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and -S-, and the like. A hydrocarbon group or a group in which a hydrocarbon group is combined with -O- is preferred.

 式(L12-2)中、L12cは3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(Ac-2)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(Ac-2)のP10との結合位置を表す。L12cが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、炭化水素基であることが好ましい。 In formula (L12-2), L 12c represents a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, *1 represents the bonding position to L 11 in formula (Ac-2), and *2 represents the bonding position to P 10 in formula (Ac-2). Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by L 12c include hydrocarbon groups and groups in which a hydrocarbon group is combined with at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and -S-, and a hydrocarbon group is preferred.

 式(Ac-2)のP10が表すポリマー鎖としては、ポリエステル構造、ポリエーテル構造、ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造、ポリスチレン構造、ポリウレタン構造、ポリウレア構造およびポリアミド構造からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造の繰り返し単位を含むポリマー鎖が挙げられる。ポリエステル構造の繰り返し単位としては、上記式(G-1)、式(G-4)または式(G-5)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位としては、上記式(G-2)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位としては、上記式(G-3)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリスチレン構造の繰り返し単位としては、上記式(G-6)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 The polymer chain represented by P10 in formula (Ac-2) includes a polymer chain containing a repeating unit of at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a polyester structure, a polyether structure, a poly(meth)acrylic structure, a polystyrene structure, a polyurethane structure, a polyurea structure, and a polyamide structure. Examples of the repeating unit of the polyester structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-1), formula (G-4), or formula (G-5) above. Examples of the repeating unit of the polyether structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-2) above. Examples of the repeating unit of the poly(meth)acrylic structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-3) above. Examples of the repeating unit of the polystyrene structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-6) above.

 P10が表すポリマー鎖は、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。P10が表すポリマー鎖が架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位を含有する場合、P10を構成する全繰り返し単位中における架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、1モル%以上であることが好ましく、1~80モル%であることがより好ましい。上限は、70モル%以下であることが好ましく、60モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上であることが好ましく、5モル%以上であることがより好ましい。 The polymer chain represented by P10 may contain a repeating unit having a crosslinkable group. When the polymer chain represented by P10 contains a repeating unit having a crosslinkable group, the proportion of the repeating units having a crosslinkable group in all repeating units constituting P10 is preferably 1 mol% or more, more preferably 1 to 80 mol%. The upper limit is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 60 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more.

 P10が表すポリマー鎖は、酸基を含む繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。酸基としては、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。P10が表すポリマー鎖が酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含有する場合、P10を構成する全繰り返し単位中における酸基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、1~80モル%であることが好ましく、5~80モル%であることがより好ましく、10~80モル%であることが更に好ましい。 The polymer chain represented by P10 may contain a repeating unit containing an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphate group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group. When the polymer chain represented by P10 contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the proportion of the repeating unit having an acid group in all repeating units constituting P10 is preferably 1 to 80 mol%, more preferably 5 to 80 mol%, and even more preferably 10 to 80 mol%.

 P10が表すポリマー鎖の重量平均分子量は500~20000が好ましい。下限は1000以上が好ましい。上限は10000以下が好ましく、5000以下がより好ましく、3000以下が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain represented by P10 is preferably 500 to 20,000. The lower limit is preferably 1,000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.

 樹脂としては、式(B-1)で表される部分構造、及び、式(B-2)で表される部分構造の少なくとも一方を有する樹脂(以下、特定樹脂ともいう)を用いることも好ましい。 It is also preferable to use a resin having at least one of the partial structure represented by formula (B-1) and the partial structure represented by formula (B-2) (hereinafter also referred to as a specific resin).

 式(B-1)中、XB1は4+m価の有機基を表し、YB1は2+n価の有機基を表し、RB1およびRB2はそれぞれ独立して重合性基を含む基を表し、nは0~6の整数を表し、mは0~6の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である;
 式(B-2)中、XB1は4+m価の有機基を表し、YB1は2+n価の有機基を表し、Ax1およびAx2はそれぞれ独立して1価の有機基を表し、RB1およびRB2はそれぞれ独立して重合性基を含む基を表し、nは0~6の整数を表し、mは0~6の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数であり、ただし、Ax1及びAx2の少なくとも一方が重合性基を有する場合は、n+mは0であってもよい。
In formula (B-1), X represents a 4+m-valent organic group, Y represents a 2+n-valent organic group, R and R each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group, n represents an integer of 0 to 6, m represents an integer of 0 to 6, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more;
In formula (B-2), X represents a 4+m-valent organic group, Y represents a 2 +n-valent organic group, A and A each independently represent a monovalent organic group, R and R each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group, n represents an integer of 0 to 6, m represents an integer of 0 to 6, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more, provided that when at least one of A and A has a polymerizable group, n+m may be 0.

 -XB1
 式(B-1)および式(B-2)のXB1は酸無水物モノマーから誘導される構造であることが好ましいが、これに限定されるものではない。酸無水物モノマーは1分子中に環状酸無水物基を2個有していれば特に限定されない。芳香族酸無水物であっても脂肪族酸無水物であってもよく、それらの混合物であってもよい。
 また、特定樹脂の紫外光透過性の観点からは、XB1は、脂環式炭化水素を有する基であることが好ましい。
-X B1 -
X B1 in formula (B-1) and formula (B-2) is preferably a structure derived from an acid anhydride monomer, but is not limited thereto. The acid anhydride monomer is not particularly limited as long as it has two cyclic acid anhydride groups in one molecule. It may be an aromatic acid anhydride, an aliphatic acid anhydride, or a mixture thereof.
Furthermore, from the viewpoint of the ultraviolet light transmittance of the specific resin, X B1 is preferably a group having an alicyclic hydrocarbon.

 XB1としては下記式(Xp-1)~(Xp-23)のものが好適に用いられる。下記式(Xp-1)~(Xp-23)中、*1はそれぞれ、下記式(BX-1)又は式(BX-2)中の*1と記載されたカルボニル基との結合部位を表し、*2はそれぞれ、下記式(BX-1)又は式(BX-2)中の*2と記載されたカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。下記式(BX-1)及び式(BX-2)は、それぞれ、式(B-1)及び式(B-2)に便宜上*1及び*2なる記号を付したものである。
As XB1, those represented by the following formulae (Xp-1) to (Xp-23) are preferably used. In the following formulae (Xp-1) to (Xp-23), *1 represents the bonding site to the carbonyl group represented by *1 in the following formula (BX-1) or formula (BX-2), respectively, and *2 represents the bonding site to the carbonyl group represented by *2 in the following formula (BX-1) or formula (BX-2). For convenience, the following formulae (BX-1) and (BX-2) are obtained by adding the symbols *1 and *2 to formula (B-1) and formula (B-2), respectively.

 式(Xp-1)~(Xp-23)中、Lはそれぞれ独立に存在しないか、単結合、-CH=CH-、―CHCH-、-CH-、―C(CH-、または―C(CF-を表し、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し、R及びRは結合して環構造を形成してもよく、形成する環は芳香環であってもよく、RとRが環を形成してベンゼン環を形成することもある。1分子中に複数Lが存在する場合は、同じであっても異なっていてもよい。R、R、R、Rはそれぞれ独立に水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を示し、互いに隣接するR~Rは2価の有機基で連結して環を形成してもよい。R、Rはアルキル基、アリール基、フルオロアルキル基、フルオロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヒドロキシル基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子のいずれかを示す。n1、n2はそれぞれ独立に0から4の整数を示す。立体の幾何異性体が存在する場合はcis/transおよびendo/exoの区別は特に限定されない。 In formulas (Xp-1) to (Xp-23), L each independently represents either absent, a single bond, -CH= CH-, -CH2CH2-, -CH2-, -C(CH3)2- , or -C ( CF3 ) 2- ; R1 and R2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; R1 and R2 may bond to form a ring structure, which may be an aromatic ring, or R1 and R2 may combine to form a benzene ring. When multiple Ls are present in one molecule, they may be the same or different. R3 , R4 , R5 , and R6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group ; adjacent R3 to R6 may be linked via a divalent organic group to form a ring. R7 and R8 each represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluoroalkyl group, a fluoroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or a halogen atom. n1 and n2 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4. When geometrical isomers exist, the distinction between cis/trans and endo/exo is not particularly limited.

 式(Xp-1)~(Xp-23)中、X~Xは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、単結合、又は、-C(Rx)-(Rxは水素原子又は置換基を示す。Rxが置換基の場合、互いに連結して環を形成してもよい)、-O-、-S(=O)-、-C(=O)、-S-、-NR-、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロアリーレン基、―C(=O)O-、―C(=O)NH-、又はこれらの組み合わせが好ましく、単結合又は-C(Rx)-がより好ましい。Rxが置換基を示すとき、その具体例としては、アルキル基であるか、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよいアルキル基であるか、フルオレニル基が挙げられる。
 Rは水素原子又は有機基を表し、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基であることが好ましく、水素原子又はアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
In formulae (Xp-1) to (Xp-23), X 1 to X 4 represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, and are preferably a single bond, -C(Rx) 2 - (Rx represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. When Rx is a substituent, they may be linked to each other to form a ring), -O-, -S(═O) 2 -, -C(═O), -S-, -NR N -, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, an arylene group, a heteroarylene group, -C(═O)O-, -C(═O)NH-, or a combination thereof, and more preferably a single bond or -C(Rx) 2 -. When Rx represents a substituent, specific examples thereof include an alkyl group, an alkyl group optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, and a fluorenyl group.
R 1 N represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.

 連結基X~Xはさらに下記式(X1-1)で示される2価の連結基であることが優れた機械強度を示す点でより好ましい。
It is more preferable that the linking groups X 1 to X 4 are divalent linking groups represented by the following formula (X1-1) in terms of exhibiting excellent mechanical strength.

 式(X1-1)中、nおよびmはそれぞれ独立して0または1を表す。
 TおよびTはそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-O-、-S-又は-NR-のいずれかを示す。ここでRは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
 P、P、および、Pはそれぞれ独立して、炭素数6~12の芳香族基、炭素数5~12の複素環基、炭素数1~12の脂肪族基または炭素数4~12の脂環式基のいずれかを表す。P、PおよびPのそれぞれの基はさらに置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、フルオロアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヒドロキシル基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。これらの置換位置は特に限定されない。QおよびQはそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-C(R)-、-O-、-S-、-NR-、-C(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-C(=O)-、-OC(=O)O-、-OC(=O)NR-、-NRC(=O)NR-、-S(=O)-、-S(=O)-のいずれか、またはその組み合わせからなる2価の有機基を示す。ここでRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、フルオロアルキル基、アリール基のいずれかを示し、R同士は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 pおよびqはそれぞれ独立して、0または1を示す。
In formula (X1-1), n and m each independently represent 0 or 1.
T1 and T2 each independently represent a single bond, -O-, -S-, or -NR-, where R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
P1 , P2 , and P3 each independently represent an aromatic group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic group having 5 to 12 carbon atoms, an aliphatic group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or an alicyclic group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms. Each of the groups P1 , P2, and P3 may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, and a halogen atom. The substitution position of these groups is not particularly limited. Q1 and Q2 each independently represent a single bond, -C(R) 2- , -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(=O)O-, -C(=O)NR-, -C(=O)-, -OC(=O)O-, -OC(=O)NR-, -NRC(=O)NR-, -S(=O)-, -S(=O) 2- , or a divalent organic group consisting of a combination thereof. Here, R each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, or an aryl group, and Rs may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
p and q each independently represent 0 or 1;

 上述の酸無水物モノマーの市販品としては、芳香族カルボン酸二無水物としては、例えば、ピロメリット酸無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,4,9,10-ペリレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、4-クロロホルミルフタル酸無水物、トリメリット酸無水物、テトラクロロフタル酸無水物、フタル酸無水物、ナフタレン-1,4,5,8-テトラカルボン酸二無水物、4,4’-(ヘキサフルオロイソプロピリデン)ジフタル酸無水物、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸無水物、4,4’-(4,4’-イソプロピリデンジフェノキシ)ジフタル酸無水物、4,4’-ビフタル酸無水物、テトラブロモフタル酸無水物、3,4’-オキシジフタル酸無水物、4-(1-プロピニル)フタル酸無水物、4,4’-(エチン-1,2-ジイル)ジフタル酸無水物、ビス(1,3-ジオキソ-1,3-ジヒドロイソベンゾフラン-5-カルボン酸)1,4-フェニレン、9,9-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)フルオレン二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物(昇華精製品)、ピロメリット酸無水物(昇華精製品)、4-フェニルエチニルフタル酸無水物、テトラフルオロフタル酸無水物、4,4’-スルホニルジフタル酸無水物、4-エチニルフタル酸無水物、ジフェニル-2,3,3’,4’-テトラカルボン酸二無水物が挙げられる。脂肪族酸二無水物としては、ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクト-7-エン-2,3,5,6-テトラカルボン酸二無水物、5-(2,5-ジオキソテトラヒドロフリル)-3-メチル-3-シクロヘキセン-1,2-ジカルボン酸無水物、エチレンジアミン四酢酸二無水物、ジシクロヘキシル-3,4,3’,4’-テトラカルボン酸二無水物、meso-ブタン-1,2,3,4-テトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,3,4-シクロペンタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、4-(2,5-ジオキソテトラヒドロフラン-3-イル)-1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロナフタレン-1,2-ジカルボン酸無水物、オクタヒドロビフェニレン-4a,8b:4b,8a-テトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,4,5-シクロヘキサンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,3,4-シクロブタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,3,4-テトラメチル-1,2,3,4-シクロブタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3-(カルボキシメチル)-1,2,4-シクロペンタントリカルボン酸1,4:2,3-二無水物が好適に使用することができる。 Commercially available products of the above-mentioned acid anhydride monomers include aromatic carboxylic dianhydrides such as pyromellitic anhydride, 3,3',4,4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,4,9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4-chloroformylphthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, tetrachlorophthalic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, naphthalene-1,4,5,8-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4'-(hexafluoroisopropylidene)diphthalic anhydride, 4,4'-oxydiphthalic anhydride, 4,4'-(4,4'-isopropylidenediphenoxy)diphthalic anhydride, 4,4'-biphthalic anhydride, tetrabromophthalic anhydride, 3,4'-oxydiphthalic anhydride, 4-(1-propynyl)phthalic anhydride, 4,4'-(ethyne-1,2-diyl)diphthalic anhydride, bis(1,3-dioxo-1,3-dihydroisobenzofuran-5-carboxylic acid)1,4-phenylene, 9,9-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)fluorene dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride (purified by sublimation), pyromellitic anhydride (purified by sublimation), 4-phenylethynylphthalic anhydride, tetrafluorophthalic anhydride, 4,4'-sulfonyldiphthalic anhydride, 4-ethynylphthalic anhydride, diphenyl-2,3,3',4'-tetracarboxylic dianhydride. Examples of aliphatic acid dianhydrides include bicyclo[2.2.2]oct-7-ene-2,3,5,6-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 5-(2,5-dioxotetrahydrofuryl)-3-methyl-3-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic acid anhydride, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid dianhydride, dicyclohexyl-3,4,3',4'-tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, meso-butane-1,2,3,4-tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-cyclopentanetetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 4-(2,5-dioxotetrahydrofuran-3 Suitable examples of compounds that can be used include 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-1,2-dicarboxylic acid anhydride, octahydrobiphenylene-4a,8b:4b,8a-tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 1,2,4,5-cyclohexanetetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-cyclobutanetetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-tetramethyl-1,2,3,4-cyclobutanetetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, and 3-(carboxymethyl)-1,2,4-cyclopentanetricarboxylic acid 1,4:2,3-dianhydride.

 そのほかに使用することのできる酸無水物としては、ポリイミドまたはアミック酸樹脂の透明性を高める目的で、CpODA(ENEOS社製)、BzDA(ENEOS社製)、BzDAxx(ENEOS社製)、BNBDA(ENEOS社製)、TMPBP-TME(本州化学社製)、BPZ-TME(本州化学社製)、BPF-PA(JFEケミカル社製)、5,5’-[p-フェニレンビス(オキシカルボニル)]ジ無水フタル酸(商品名:TAHQ、マナック社製)を好適に用いることができる。 Other acid anhydrides that can be used to enhance the transparency of polyimide or amic acid resin include CpODA (ENEOS Corporation), BzDA (ENEOS Corporation), BzDAxx (ENEOS Corporation), BNBDA (ENEOS Corporation), TMPBP-TME (Honshu Chemical Co., Ltd.), BPZ-TME (Honshu Chemical Co., Ltd.), BPF-PA (JFE Chemical Corporation), and 5,5'-[p-phenylenebis(oxycarbonyl)]diphthalic anhydride (trade name: TAHQ, Manac Corporation).

 そのほか、国際公開第2022/019253号、特開2023-166413号公報、国際公開2022/019255号に記載の酸無水物を好適に用いることができる。 In addition, the acid anhydrides described in WO 2022/019253, JP 2023-166413 A, and WO 2022/019255 can also be suitably used.

 -YB1
 式(B-1)および式(B-2)のYB1はジアミンモノマーから誘導される構造であることが好ましいが、これに限定されるものではない。ジアミンモノマーは1分子中に1級アミノ基を2個有していれば特に限定されない。芳香族ジアミンであっても脂肪族ジアミンであってもよく、それらの混合物であってもよい。
-Y B1 -
Y B1 in formula (B-1) and formula (B-2) is preferably a structure derived from a diamine monomer, but is not limited thereto. The diamine monomer is not particularly limited as long as it has two primary amino groups in one molecule. It may be an aromatic diamine, an aliphatic diamine, or a mixture thereof.

 YB1としては下記式(Yp-1)~(Yp-16)の構造であることが好ましい。*は窒素原子との結合部位を示す。
Y B1 preferably has a structure of the following formulae (Yp-1) to (Yp-16), where * indicates the bonding site to the nitrogen atom.

 式(Yp-1)~(Yp-16)中、Lは上記記載と同義である。R10~R15はそれぞれ独立にアルキル基、アリール基、フルオロアルキル基、フルオロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヒドロキシル基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子のいずれかを表す。R16およびR17はそれぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を示す。a~fはそれぞれ独立して0から3の整数を表す。nは1~12の整数を表す。R10~R15の置換位置は特に指定されない。 In formulas (Yp-1) to (Yp-16), L has the same meaning as defined above. R 10 to R 15 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluoroalkyl group, a fluoroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or a halogen atom. R 16 and R 17 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. a to f each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3. n represents an integer of 1 to 12. The substitution positions of R 10 to R 15 are not particularly specified.

 式(Yp-1)~(Yp-16)中、YまたはYは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、単結合、又は、-C(Rx)-(Rxは水素原子又は置換基を示す。Rxが置換基の場合、互いに連結して環を形成してもよい)、-O-、-S(=O)-、-C(=O)、-S-、-NR-、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロアリーレン基、―C(=O)O-、―C(=O)NH-、又はこれらの組み合わせが好ましく、単結合又は-C(Rx)-がより好ましい。Rxが置換基を示すとき、その具体例としては、アルキル基であるか、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよいアルキル基であるか、フルオレニル基が挙げられる。
 Rは水素原子又は有機基を表し、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基であることが好ましく、水素原子又はアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
In formulae (Yp-1) to (Yp-16), Y 1 or Y 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is preferably a single bond, -C(Rx) 2 - (Rx represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. When Rx is a substituent, they may be linked to each other to form a ring), -O-, -S(═O) 2 -, -C(═O), -S-, -NR N -, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, an arylene group, a heteroarylene group, -C(═O)O-, -C(═O)NH-, or a combination thereof, and more preferably a single bond or -C(Rx) 2 -. When Rx represents a substituent, specific examples thereof include an alkyl group, an alkyl group optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, and a fluorenyl group.
R 1 N represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.

 連結基YまたはYはさらに下記式(Y1-1)で示される2価の連結基であることが優れた機械強度を示す点でより好ましい。
The linking group Y1 or Y2 is more preferably a divalent linking group represented by the following formula (Y1-1) in terms of exhibiting excellent mechanical strength.

 式(Y1-1)中、各基T、T、P、P、P、Q、Q、n、m、p、qは式(X1-1)と同義である。 In formula (Y1-1), the groups T 1 , T 2 , P 1 , P 2 , P 3 , Q 1 , Q 2 , n, m, p and q have the same meanings as in formula (X1-1).

 上述したジアミンモノマーの市販品としては、芳香族ジアミンとしては、例えば、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、1,5-ナフタレンジアミン、4,4’-ジアミノスチルベン-2,2’-ジスルホン酸、m-キシリレンジアミン、p-キシリレンジアミン、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、4,4’-メチレンビス(2,6-ジエチルアニリン),1,3-フェニレンジアミン,4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン,4,4’-メチレンビス(2-クロロアニリン)、1,4-ビス[2-(4-アミノフェニル)-2-プロピル]ベンゼン、4,4’-ジアミノ-2,2’-ビフェニルジスルホン酸、1,4-フェニレンジアミン、o-トリジン、m-トリジン、1,3-フェニレンジアミン、4-アミノベンジルアミン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]プロパン、2,5-ジメチル-1,4-フェニレンジアミン、9,9-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)フルオレン、o-ジアニシジン、2,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ベンジジン、2,7-ジアミノフルオレン、3,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチルベンジジン、9,9-ビス(4-アミノ-3-メチルフェニル)フルオレン、ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)スルホン、3-アミノベンジルアミン、1,4-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、1,3-ビス(3-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ビフェニル、1,1-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)シクロヘキサン、4,6-ジアミノレソルシノール、3,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、4,4’-エチレンジアニリン、2,3,5,6-テトラメチル-1,4-フェニレンジアミン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、1,4-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ベンゼン、2,6-ジアミノアントラキノン、ビス(2-アミノフェニル)スルフィド、1,3-ビス[2-(4-アミノフェニル)-2-プロピル]ベンゼン、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、ビス[4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、4,4’-メチレンビス(2-エチル-6-メチルアニリン)、ビス(4-アミノフェニル)スルフィド、3,7-ジアミノ-2,8-ジメチルジベンゾチオフェンスルホン、4,4’-ジアミノ-3,3’-ジメチルジフェニルメタン、2,4,5,6-テトラフルオロ-1,3-フェニレンジアミン、4,4’’-ジアミノ-p-テルフェニル、3,3’-ジメチルナフチジン、4,4’-ジアミノベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ジアミノオクタフルオロビフェニル、3,3’-ジアミノベンゾフェノン、3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、3,6-ジアミノカルバゾール、9,9-ビス(4-アミノ-3-フルオロフェニル)フルオレン、9,9-ビス(4-アミノ-3-クロロフェニル)フルオレン、4,4’-ジアミノ-2,2’-ジメチルビベンジル、9,9-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)フルオレン、2,3,5,6-テトラフルオロ-1,4-フェニレンジアミンなどが挙げられる。脂肪族ジアミンとしては、例えば、ビシクロ[2.2.1]ヘプタンジメタンアミン(異性体混合物)、4,4’-メチレンビス(シクロヘキシルアミン)(異性体混合物)、4,4’-メチレンビス(2-メチルシクロヘキシルアミン)(異性体混合物)、イソホロンジアミン(cis-,trans-混合物)、1,3-ビス(アミノメチル)シクロヘキサン(cis-,trans-混合物)、1,4-ビス(アミノメチル)シクロヘキサン(cis-,trans-混合物)、1,3-ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、1,3-シクロヘキサンジアミン(cis-,trans-混合物)、1,4-シクロヘキサンジアミン(cis-,trans-混合物)などが好適に用いることができる。 Commercially available products of the above-mentioned diamine monomers include aromatic diamines such as 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl sulfone, 1,5-naphthalenediamine, 4,4'-diaminostilbene-2,2'-disulfonic acid, m-xylylenediamine, p-xylylenediamine, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfone, 4,4'-methylenebis(2,6-diethylaniline), 1,3-phenylenediamine, 4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4'-methylenebis(2-chloroaniline), 1,4-bis[2-(4-aminophenyl)-2-propyl]benzene, 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-biphenyldisulfonic acid, 1,4-phenylenediamine, o-tolidine, m-tolidine, 1,3-phenylenediamine, 4-aminobenzylamine, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenyl)-2-propyl]benzene, 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-biphenyldisulfonic acid, 1,4-phenylenediamine, o-tolidine, m-tolidine, 1,3-phenylenediamine, 4-aminobenzylamine, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenyl)-2-propyl]benzene, 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-biphenyldisulfonic acid, 4,4' ... bis(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]propane, 2,5-dimethyl-1,4-phenylenediamine, 9,9-bis(4-aminophenyl)fluorene, o-dianisidine, 2,2-bis(4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzidine, 2,7-diaminofluorene, 3,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 3,3',5,5'-tetramethylbenzidine, 9,9-bis(4-amino-3-methylphenyl)fluorene, bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)sulfone, 3-aminobenzylamine, 1,4-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 1,3-bis(3-aminophenoxy)benzene, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, 4,4 '-bis(4-aminophenoxy)biphenyl, 1,1-bis(4-aminophenyl)cyclohexane, 4,6-diaminoresorcinol, 3,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 4,4'-ethylenedianiline, 2,3,5,6-tetramethyl-1,4-phenylenediamine, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 1,4-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)benzene, 2,6-diaminoanthraquinone, bis(2-aminophenyl)sulfide, 1,3-bis[2-(4-aminophenyl)-2-propyl]benzene, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, bis[4-(3-aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfone, bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfone, 4,4'-methylenebis(2-ethyl-6-methylaniline), bis(4-aminophenyl)sulfonate 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dimethyldiphenylmethane, 2,4,5,6-tetrafluoro-1,3-phenylenediamine, 4,4"-diamino-p-terphenyl, 3,3'-dimethylnaphthidine, 4,4'-diaminobenzophenone, 4,4'-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl, 3,3'-diaminobenzophenone, 3,3'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 3,6-diaminocarbazole, 9,9-bis(4-amino-3-fluorophenyl)fluorene, 9,9-bis(4-amino-3-chlorophenyl)fluorene, 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-dimethylbibenzyl, 9,9-bis(4-aminophenyl)fluorene, 2,3,5,6-tetrafluoro-1,4-phenylenediamine, and the like. Suitable aliphatic diamines include, for example, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane dimethanamine (mixture of isomers), 4,4'-methylenebis(cyclohexylamine) (mixture of isomers), 4,4'-methylenebis(2-methylcyclohexylamine) (mixture of isomers), isophoronediamine (mixture of cis- and trans-), 1,3-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane (mixture of cis- and trans-), 1,4-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane (mixture of cis- and trans-), 1,3-bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, 1,3-cyclohexanediamine (mixture of cis- and trans-), and 1,4-cyclohexanediamine (mixture of cis- and trans-).

 そのほかに使用することのできるジアミンとしては、ポリイミドまたはアミック酸樹脂の透明性を高める目的で、BPF-AN(JFEケミカル社製)、ピリダジン系含硫ジアミンAPP(日本材料技研社製)を好適に用いることができる。 Other diamines that can be used to enhance the transparency of polyimide or amic acid resin include BPF-AN (manufactured by JFE Chemical Corporation) and pyridazine-based sulfur-containing diamine APP (manufactured by Japan Material Technology Co., Ltd.).

 そのほか、特開2023-166413号公報、国際公開2022/019255号に記載のジアミンを好適に用いることができる。 In addition, the diamines described in JP 2023-166413 A and WO 2022/019255 A can also be suitably used.

-RB1,RB2
 式(B-1)または式(B-2)において、RB1およびRB2はそれぞれ独立して重合性基を含む基を表す。重合性基としては、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。
 また、重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基等が挙げられ、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、マレイミド基、ノルボルネン骨格を有する基などが挙げられる。これらの中でも、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニルフェニル基又はマレイミド基が好ましく、反応性の観点からは、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。また、誘電正接を低下させる等の観点からは、ビニルフェニル基又はマレイミド基が好ましい。(メタ)アクリロイル基は、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基又は(メタ)アクリルアミド基を構成することが好ましく、反応性の観点からは、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシを構成することがより好ましい。
-R B1 ,R B2 -
In formula (B-1) or (B-2), R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group, and the polymerizable group is preferably a radically polymerizable group.
Examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, and a benzoxazolyl group, with an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group being preferred.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a maleimide group, and a group having a norbornene skeleton. Among these, a (meth)acryloyl group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group is preferred, and from the viewpoint of reactivity, a (meth)acryloyl group is more preferred. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric loss tangent, a vinylphenyl group or a maleimide group is preferred. The (meth)acryloyl group preferably constitutes a (meth)acryloyloxy group or a (meth)acrylamide group, and from the viewpoint of reactivity, a (meth)acryloyloxy group is more preferred.

 RB1およびRB2が表す重合性基を含む基は、式(AA-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。
The group containing a polymerizable group represented by R B1 and R B2 is preferably a group represented by formula (AA-1).

 式(AA-1)中、Lxは単結合、-O-、-NR-、-C(=O)O-、-OC(=O)-、-OC(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-NRC(=O)-、-NRC(=O)O-、-OC(=O)NR-、-NRC(=O)NR-、―NRC(=O)NR-、ーCHCH(OH)-CH-、又は、-CHCH(OR)-CH-を表し、
 Lxは-O-、-NR-、-C(=O)O-、-OC(=O)-、-OC(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-NRC(=O)-、-NRC(=O)O-、-OC(=O)NR-、-NRC(=O)NR-、-NRC(=O)NR-、ーCHCH(OH)-CH-、又は、-CHCH(OR)-CH-を表し、
 Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Rは1価の有機基を表し、
 Laは式(La-1)で示される基を表し、
 Lbは炭素数1~12のr4+1価の炭化水素基、式(Lb-1)~(Lb-3)のいずれか又は組み合わせからなる基を表し、
 Aはエポキシ基、オキセタニル基、又は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を表し、
 r1は0又は1を表し、
 r2は0又は1を表し、
 r3は0~5の整数を表し、
 r4は1~10の整数を表し、
 *は式(B-1)又は式(B-2)におけるXB1(RB2である場合)又はYB1(RB1である場合)との結合部位を示す。
In formula (AA-1), Lx 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —NR 1 —, —C(═O)O—, —OC(═O)—, —OC(═O)O—, —C(═O)NR 2 —, —NR 2 C(═O)—, —NR 2 C(═O)O—, —OC(═O)NR 2 —, —NR 2 C (═O)NR 3 —, —NR 3 C(═O)NR 2 —, —CH 2 CH(OH)—CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH(OR 4 )—CH 2 —;
Lx 2 is -O-, -NR 1 -, -C(=O)O-, -OC(=O)-, -OC(=O)O-, -C(=O)NR 2 -, -NR 2 C(=O)-, -NR 2 C ( =O)O-, -OC(=O)NR 2 -, -NR 2 C(=O)NR 3 -, -NR 3 C(=O)NR 2 -, -CH 2 CH(OH)-CH 2 -, or -CH 2 CH(OR 4 )-CH 2 -,
R1 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, R2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, R3 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R4 represents a monovalent organic group;
La represents a group represented by formula (La-1).
Lb represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms and having a valence of r4+1, or a group represented by any one of formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) or a combination thereof;
A represents an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, or an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group;
r1 represents 0 or 1;
r2 represents 0 or 1;
r3 represents an integer of 0 to 5;
r4 represents an integer of 1 to 10;
* indicates the bonding site to X B1 (when R B2 ) or Y B1 (when R B1 ) in formula (B-1) or formula (B-2).

 式(La-1)中、RaおよびRaはそれぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、
 *はLxとの結合部位を表し、
 波線はLb又はAとの結合部位を表す。
In formula (La-1), Ra 1 and Ra 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group;
* indicates the binding site with Lx1 ;
The wavy lines represent the binding sites to Lb or A.

 式(Lb-1)~式(Lb-3)中、Lc1は炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、炭素数6~18のアリーレン基又はその組み合わせを表し、x、y、zはそれぞれ独立して1~30の整数を表す。 In formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3), Lc1 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, or a combination thereof, and x, y, and z each independently represent an integer from 1 to 30.

 式(AA-1)中、Lxで例示されている構造について、左側が式(B-1)又は式(B-2)におけるXB1またはYB1との結合部位を示し、右側がLa(r1=1の場合)、Lb(r1=0、r2=1~5の整数の場合)又はA(r1=0、r2=0の場合)との結合部位を表す。
 例えば、LX1が-C(=O)O-である場合、炭素原子が式(B-1)又は式(B-2)におけるXB1またはYB2との結合部位であり、酸素原子がLa、Lb又はAとの結合部位である。
 式(AA-1)中、Lxは-O-、-C(=O)O-、-NRC(=O)O-、-OC(=O)NR-、ーCHCH(OH)-CH-、又は、-CHCH(OR)-CH-であることが好ましく、-O-又は-C(=O)O-であることがより好ましい。
In the structure exemplified by Lx1 in formula (AA-1), the left side represents the bonding site to XB1 or YB1 in formula (B-1) or formula (B-2), and the right side represents the bonding site to La (when r1=1), Lb (when r1=0 and r2=an integer of 1 to 5), or A (when r1=0 and r2=0).
For example, when L X1 is —C(═O)O—, the carbon atom is the bonding site to X B1 or Y B2 in formula (B-1) or formula (B-2), and the oxygen atom is the bonding site to La, Lb or A.
In formula (AA-1), Lx 1 is preferably —O—, —C(═O)O—, —NR 2 C(═O)O—, —OC(═O)NR 2 —, —CH 2 CH(OH)—CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH(OR 4 )—CH 2 —, and more preferably —O— or —C(═O)O—.

 Rは水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 Rは水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 Rは水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 Rはアルキル基又はアリール基が好ましく、アルキル基がより好ましい。
R 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
R2 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
R3 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
R4 is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group.

 式(AA-1)中、Laは式(La-1)で示される基を示し、式(La-1)中、Ra,Raはそれぞれ独立に水素原子、炭素数1~10のアルキル基又はフェニル基が好ましく、水素原子又は炭素数1~10のアルキル基がより好ましく、メチル基が更に好ましい。
 またRa及びRaの一方が水素原子、他方が炭素数1~10のアルキル基(好ましくはメチル基)という態様も好ましい態様の一つである。
In formula (AA-1), La represents a group represented by formula (La-1), and in formula (La-1), Ra 1 and Ra 2 each independently represent preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably a methyl group.
Another preferred embodiment is one in which one of Ra 1 and Ra 2 is a hydrogen atom and the other is an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a methyl group).

 式(AA-1)中、r1は1又は0であり、0であることが好ましい。 In formula (AA-1), r1 is 1 or 0, and preferably 0.

 式(AA-1)中、Lxは-O-、-C(=O)O-、-NRC(=O)O-、-OC(=O)NR-、ーCHCH(OH)-CH-、又は、-CHCH(OR)-CH-であることが好ましく、-O-であることがより好ましい。 In formula (AA-1), Lx 2 is preferably —O—, —C(═O)O—, —NR 2 C(═O)O—, —OC(═O)NR 2 —, —CH 2 CH(OH)—CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH(OR 4 )—CH 2 —, and more preferably —O—.

 式(AA-1)中、r2は1又は0であり、Lbが式(Lb-1)~式(Lb-3)のいずれかであるか、または、これらの組み合わせである場合、1であることが好ましい。 In formula (AA-1), r2 is 1 or 0, and when Lb is any one of formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) or a combination thereof, it is preferably 1.

 式(AA-1)中、Lbが炭素数1~12のr4+1価の炭化水素基である場合、Lbは炭素数1~12のr4+1価の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~6のr4+1価の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であることがより好ましい。
 例えば、r4=1である場合、Lbは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルキレン基であることがより好ましい。
 Lbにおける炭化水素基、又は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基における水素原子は、公知の置換基により置換されていてもよい。
In formula (AA-1), when Lb is an r4+1-valent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, Lb is preferably an r4+1-valent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an r4+1-valent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
For example, when r4=1, Lb is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
The hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon group or saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group in Lb may be substituted with known substituents.

 また、Lbは式(Lb-1)~式(Lb-3)、又はこれらの結合により表される基であることが好ましく、式(Lb-1)、式(Lb-2)又はこれらの結合により表される基であることも好ましい。
 式(Lb-1)~式(Lb-3)中のLc1は炭素数2~8のアルキレン基、炭素数6~10のアリーレン基又はその組み合わせであることが好ましく、炭素数2~8のアルキレン基であることがより好ましい。
 式(Lb-1)~式(Lb-3)中、x、y、zはそれぞれ独立に、1~30の整数を示し、1~20の整数が好ましく、1~10の整数がより好ましい。
Furthermore, Lb is preferably a group represented by formula (Lb-1) to formula (Lb-3), or a bond thereof, and is also preferably a group represented by formula (Lb-1), formula (Lb-2), or a bond thereof.
In formulae (Lb-1) to (Lb-3), Lc1 is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or a combination thereof, and more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
In formulae (Lb-1) to (Lb-3), x, y, and z each independently represent an integer of 1 to 30, preferably an integer of 1 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 10.

 式(AA-1)中、r3は0から5の整数を示し、0~3の整数であることが好ましく、0、1又は2であることが好ましい。
 r3が1~5であり、かつ、Lbが式(Lb-1)~式(Lb-3)のいずれかを含む態様も好ましい態様の1つである。
 式(Lb-1)~式(Lb-3)で表される構造は加熱により分解されやすいと考えられる。そのため、例えば、膜の形成時に加熱(例えば、180℃以上の加熱)を行う場合、式(Lb-1)~式(Lb-3)で表される構造が分解されるため、膜中で樹脂が配向しやすくなり、CTE(熱膨張係数)が低下しやすいと推測される。
In formula (AA-1), r3 represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, and more preferably 0, 1 or 2.
An embodiment in which r3 is 1 to 5 and Lb includes any one of formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) is also one of the preferred embodiments.
The structures represented by formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) are thought to be easily decomposed by heating. Therefore, for example, when heating (for example, heating at 180°C or higher) is performed during film formation, the structures represented by formulas (Lb-1) to (Lb-3) are decomposed, which presumably makes it easier for the resin to be oriented in the film and reduces the CTE (coefficient of thermal expansion).

 式(AA-1)中、Aはエポキシ基、オキセタニル基、又は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を示し、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基であることが好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニルフェニル基、又は、マレイミド基が好ましい。その他、ビニル基、アリル基など、公知のエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基であってもよい。
In formula (AA-1), A represents an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, or an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, and is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group is preferably a (meth)acryloyl group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group, but may also be a known group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, such as a vinyl group or an allyl group.

 式(AA-1)中、r4は1~6の整数であることが好ましく、1~3の整数であることがより好ましく、1又は2であることが更に好ましい。 In formula (AA-1), r4 is preferably an integer of 1 to 6, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3, and even more preferably 1 or 2.

-Ax1,Ax2
 式(B-2)のAXおよびAXは、アルキル基、アリール基、又は、上述の式(AA-1)で表される基であることが好ましく、上述の式(AA-1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
-A x1 ,A x2 -
AX1 and AX2 in formula (B-2) are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a group represented by formula (AA-1) above, and more preferably a group represented by formula (AA-1) above.

 式(B-1)のmは0~2の整数であることが好ましい。また、mが0である態様も好ましい態様の一つである。
 式(B-1)のnは0~2の整数であることが好ましく、1又は2であることがより好ましい。
 式(B-1)のn+mは1~4の整数であることが好ましく、1又は2であることがより好ましい。
 式(B-2)中、mは0~2の整数であることが好ましい。また、mが0である態様も好ましい態様の一つである。
 式(B-2)中、nは0~2の整数であることが好ましい。また、nが0である態様も好ましい態様の一つである。
 式(B-2)中、n+mは0~4の整数であることが好ましく、0、1又は2であることがより好ましい。また、式(B-2)においてAX2およびAX2の少なくとも一方が重合性基を有する場合は、n+mは0であってもよい。
In formula (B-1), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 2. An embodiment in which m is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments.
In formula (B-1), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and more preferably 1 or 2.
In formula (B-1), n+m is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 or 2.
In formula (B-2), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 2. An embodiment in which m is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments.
In formula (B-2), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 2. An embodiment in which n is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments.
In formula (B-2), n+m is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and more preferably 0, 1, or 2. In addition, in formula (B-2), when at least one of A 1 X2 and A 2 X2 has a polymerizable group, n+m may be 0.

 これらの中でも、式(B-1)中のRB1及びRB2、並びに、式(B-2)中のRB1、RB2、Ax1及びAx2が、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基であることが好ましい。ただし、上記態様において、式(B-1)中のn、mの一方は0であってもよく、式(B-2)中のn、mの少なくとも一方は0であってもよい。 Among these, it is preferable that R B1 and R B2 in formula (B-1), and R B1 , R B2 , A x1 and A x2 in formula (B-2) are ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. However, in the above embodiment, one of n and m in formula (B-1) may be 0, and at least one of n and m in formula (B-2) may be 0.

 特定樹脂の末端構造は特に記載のない限り限定されることはない。特定樹脂の末端構造は1価の有機基であってもよく、カルボン酸、リン酸、スルホン酸等の酸性官能基または酸性基が保護された構造であってもよく、アミノ基等の塩基性官能基または塩基性基が保護された構造であってもよく、重合性基であってもよい。末端構造は上記記載の式(AA-1)で表されてもよく、この場合、式(AA-1)中の*は特定樹脂の末端重合性モノマー残基のカルボン酸、アミノ基、酸無水物、イミド基等との結合部位を示す。 The terminal structure of the specific resin is not limited unless otherwise specified. The terminal structure of the specific resin may be a monovalent organic group, an acidic functional group such as carboxylic acid, phosphoric acid, or sulfonic acid, or a structure in which the acidic group is protected, a basic functional group such as an amino group, or a structure in which the basic group is protected, or a polymerizable group. The terminal structure may be represented by formula (AA-1) described above, in which case the * in formula (AA-1) indicates the bonding site between the terminal polymerizable monomer residue of the specific resin and the carboxylic acid, amino group, acid anhydride, imide group, etc.

 特定樹脂の全繰返し単位に対する、式(B-1)で示される部分構造、または式(B-2)で示される部分構造の合計含有量は、50モル%以上であることが好ましく、70モル%以上であることがより好ましく、80モル%以上であることが更に好ましく、90モル%以上であることが特に好ましい。上記含有量の上限は特に限定されず、100モル%であってもよい。 The total content of the partial structure represented by formula (B-1) or the partial structure represented by formula (B-2) relative to all repeating units of the specific resin is preferably 50 mol% or more, more preferably 70 mol% or more, even more preferably 80 mol% or more, and particularly preferably 90 mol% or more. There is no particular upper limit to the content, and it may be 100 mol%.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、分散剤としての樹脂を含有することが好ましい。分散剤としては、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上である樹脂が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、10~105mgKOH/gが好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミノ基が好ましい。 The photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant. Examples of dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins). Here, an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) refers to a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups. As an acidic dispersant (acidic resin), a resin in which the amount of acid groups is 70 mol% or more is preferred, when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is taken as 100 mol%. The acid groups possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) are preferably carboxy groups. The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mg KOH/g. Furthermore, a basic dispersant (basic resin) refers to a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups. As a basic dispersant (basic resin), a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups is preferred, when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is taken as 100 mol%. The basic groups possessed by the basic dispersant are preferably amino groups.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、グラフト樹脂であることも好ましい。分散剤として用いる樹脂は、芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂であることも好ましい。 The resin used as a dispersant is preferably a graft resin. The resin used as a dispersant is also preferably a resin having an aromatic carboxy group.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に窒素原子を含むポリイミン系分散剤であることも好ましい。ポリイミン系分散剤としては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する部分構造を有する主鎖と、原子数40~10000の側鎖とを有し、かつ主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に塩基性窒素原子を有する樹脂が好ましい。塩基性窒素原子は、塩基性を呈する窒素原子であれば特に制限はない。ポリイミン系分散剤については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0166の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin used as the dispersant is preferably a polyimine-based dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and side chain. The polyimine-based dispersant is preferably a resin having a main chain with a partial structure containing a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less, a side chain with 40 to 10,000 atoms, and a basic nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and side chain. There are no particular restrictions on the basic nitrogen atom, as long as it is a nitrogen atom that exhibits basicity. For more information on polyimine-based dispersants, please refer to the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP 2012-255128 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂であることも好ましい。このような樹脂としては、例えば、デンドリマー(星型ポリマーを含む)が挙げられる。また、デンドリマーの具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。 The resin used as a dispersant is preferably one with a structure in which multiple polymer chains are bonded to a core. Examples of such resins include dendrimers (including star-shaped polymers). Specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP 2013-043962 A.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂の全繰り返し単位中10モル%以上であることが好ましく、10~80モル%であることがより好ましく、20~70モル%であることが更に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the resin used as a dispersant is a resin containing repeating units having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain. The content of repeating units having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and even more preferably 20 to 70 mol%, of all repeating units in the resin.

 分散剤として、特開2018-087939号公報に記載された樹脂、特許第6432077号公報の段落番号0219~0221に記載されたブロック共重合体(EB-1)~(EB-9)、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載のポリエステル側鎖を有するポリエチレンイミン、国際公開第2019/125940号に記載のブロック共重合体、特開2020-066687号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、特開2020-066688号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載の分散剤などを用いることもできる。 As dispersants, resins described in JP 2018-087939 A, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraphs 0219 to 0221 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077 A, polyethyleneimine having polyester side chains described in WO 2016/104803 A, block copolymers described in WO 2019/125940 A, block polymers having acrylamide structural units described in JP 2020-066687 A, block polymers having acrylamide structural units described in JP 2020-066688 A, dispersants described in WO 2016/104803 A, and the like can also be used.

 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、BYKChemie社製のDISPERBYKシリーズ、日本ルーブリゾール社製のSOLSPERSEシリーズ、BASF社製のEfkaシリーズ、味の素ファインテクノ(株)製のアジスパーシリーズ等が挙げられる。また、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0129に記載された製品、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0235に記載された製品を分散剤として用いることもできる。 Dispersants are also commercially available, and specific examples include the DISPERBYK series manufactured by BYK Chemie, the SOLSPERSE series manufactured by Lubrizol Japan, the Efka series manufactured by BASF, and the AJISPER series manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Ltd. Additionally, the products described in paragraph 0129 of JP 2012-137564 A and paragraph 0235 of JP 2017-194662 A can also be used as dispersants.

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における樹脂の含有量は、1~99質量%であることが好ましい。また、光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物と樹脂の合計の含有量は、1~99質量%であることが好ましい。 The resin content of the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 99 mass%. Furthermore, the combined content of the polymerizable compound and resin of the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 99 mass%.

 光硬化性組成物が色材を更に含む場合には、光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における樹脂の含有量は1~50質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 If the photocurable composition further contains a colorant, the resin content of the total solids of the photocurable composition is preferably 1 to 50% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。樹脂を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types of resins are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.

<<色材>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、色材を含有することが好ましい。色材としては白色色材、黒色色材、有彩色色材、赤外線吸収色材が挙げられる。なお、本発明において、白色色材には純白色のみならず、白に近い明るい灰色(例えば灰白色、薄灰色など)の色材も含まれる。
<<Colorants>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a coloring material. Examples of the coloring material include a white coloring material, a black coloring material, a chromatic coloring material, and an infrared-absorbing coloring material. In the present invention, the white coloring material includes not only pure white coloring materials but also light gray coloring materials close to white (e.g., grayish white, light gray, etc.).

 色材は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。顔料と染料とを併用してもよい。顔料は、無機顔料、有機顔料のいずれでもよいが、カラーバリエーションの多さ、分散の容易性、安全性等の観点から有機顔料であることが好ましい。色材は、顔料を含むものであることが好ましい。 The colorant may be a pigment or a dye. A combination of pigment and dye may also be used. The pigment may be either an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, but organic pigments are preferred from the standpoint of a wide range of color variations, ease of dispersion, safety, etc. The colorant preferably contains a pigment.

 顔料の平均一次粒子径は1~200nmが好ましい。下限は5nm以上が好ましく、10nm以上がより好ましい。上限は、180nm以下が好ましく、150nm以下がより好ましく、100nm以下が更に好ましい。なお、本明細書において、顔料の一次粒子径は、顔料の一次粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡により観察し、得られた写真から求めることができる。具体的には、顔料の一次粒子の投影面積を求め、それに対応する円相当径を顔料の一次粒子径として算出する。 The average primary particle diameter of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm. The lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more. The upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less. In this specification, the primary particle diameter of the pigment can be determined from a photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is determined, and the corresponding circle-equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment.

 顔料の、CuKα線をX線源としたときのX線回折スペクトルにおけるいずれかの結晶面に由来するピークの半値幅より求めた結晶子サイズは、0.1~100nmであることが好ましく、0.5~50nmであることがより好ましく、1~30nmであることが更に好ましく、5~25nmであることが特に好ましい。 The crystallite size of the pigment, determined from the half-width of a peak derived from any crystal plane in an X-ray diffraction spectrum when CuKα radiation is used as an X-ray source, is preferably 0.1 to 100 nm, more preferably 0.5 to 50 nm, even more preferably 1 to 30 nm, and particularly preferably 5 to 25 nm.

 顔料の比表面積は1~300m/gであることが好ましい。下限は10m/g以上であることが好ましく、30m/g以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、250m/g以下であることが好ましく、200m/g以下であることがより好ましい。比表面積の値は、BET(Brunauer、EmmettおよびTeller)法に準じてDIN 66131:determination of the specific surface area  of solids by gas adsorption(ガス吸着による固体の比表面積の測定)に従って測定することができる。 The specific surface area of the pigment is preferably 1 to 300 m 2 /g. The lower limit is preferably 10 m 2 /g or more, and more preferably 30 m 2 /g or more. The upper limit is preferably 250 m 2 /g or less, and more preferably 200 m 2 /g or less. The specific surface area value can be measured in accordance with DIN 66131: determination of the specific surface area of solids by gas adsorption, in accordance with the BET (Brunauer, Emmett and Teller) method.

(有彩色色材)
 有彩色色材としては、波長400~700nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する色材が挙げられる。例えば、緑色色材、赤色色材、黄色色材、紫色色材、青色色材、オレンジ色色材などが挙げられる。
(Chromatic color materials)
Examples of chromatic colorants include colorants having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm, such as green colorants, red colorants, yellow colorants, purple colorants, blue colorants, and orange colorants.

 赤色色材としては、ジケトピロロピロール化合物、アントラキノン化合物、アゾ化合物、ナフトール化合物、アゾメチン化合物、キサンテン化合物、キナクリドン化合物、ペリレン化合物、チオインジゴ化合物などが挙げられ、ジケトピロロピロール化合物、アントラキノン化合物、アゾ化合物であることが好ましく、ジケトピロロピロール化合物であることがより好ましい。また、赤色色材は顔料(赤色顔料)であることが好ましく、ジケトピロロピロール顔料であることがより好ましい。 Examples of red colorants include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo compounds, naphthol compounds, azomethine compounds, xanthene compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, and thioindigo compounds, with diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, and azo compounds being preferred, and diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds being more preferred. Furthermore, the red colorant is preferably a pigment (red pigment), and diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments are more preferred.

 赤色色材の具体例としては、C.I.(カラーインデックス)ピグメントレッド1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291,294,295,296,297等の赤色顔料が挙げられる。また、赤色色材として、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0034に記載の化合物、特開2020-085947号公報に記載の臭素化ジケトピロロピロール化合物を用いることもできる。 Specific examples of red colorants include C.I. (Color Index) Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48:1, 48:2, 48:3, 48:4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81:3, 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, Examples of red pigments include 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 269, 270, 272, 279, 291, 294, 295, 296, and 297. Additionally, the compound described in paragraph 0034 of WO 2022/085485 and the brominated diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in JP 2020-085947 A can also be used as red colorants.

 赤色色材としては、C.I.ピグメントレッド122,177,224,254,255,264,269,272,291が好ましく、C.I.ピグメントレッド254,264,272がより好ましく、C.I.ピグメントレッド254,264が更に好ましい。 As red colorants, C.I. Pigment Red 122, 177, 224, 254, 255, 264, 269, 272, and 291 are preferred, C.I. Pigment Red 254, 264, and 272 are more preferred, and C.I. Pigment Red 254 and 264 are even more preferred.

 緑色色材としては、フタロシアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物などが挙げられ、フタロシアニン化合物であることが好ましい。また、緑色色材は顔料(緑色顔料)であることが好ましく、フタロシアニン顔料であることがより好ましい。 Green colorants include phthalocyanine compounds and squarylium compounds, with phthalocyanine compounds being preferred. Furthermore, the green colorant is preferably a pigment (green pigment), with phthalocyanine pigment being more preferred.

 緑色色材の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,10,36,37,58,59,62,63,64,65,66等の緑色顔料が挙げられる。また、緑色色材として、1分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子数が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子数が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、緑色色材として国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0029に記載の化合物、特開2020-070426号公報に記載のアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物、特表2020-504758号公報に記載のジアリールメタン化合物などを用いることもできる。 Specific examples of green colorants include green pigments such as C.I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, and 66. Furthermore, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments containing an average of 10 to 14 halogen atoms, an average of 8 to 12 bromine atoms, and an average of 2 to 5 chlorine atoms per molecule can also be used as green colorants. Specific examples include the compounds described in WO 2015/118720. Other examples of green colorants that can be used include the compounds described in paragraph 0029 of WO 2022/085485, the aluminum phthalocyanine compounds described in JP 2020-070426 A, and the diarylmethane compounds described in JP 2020-504758 A.

 緑色色材としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,36,58,62,63が好ましい。 Preferred green colorants are C.I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58, 62, and 63.

 オレンジ色色材としては、ジケトピロロピロール化合物およびアゾ化合物などが挙げられる。オレンジ色色材は顔料(オレンジ色顔料)であることが好ましい。オレンジ色色材の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等のオレンジ色顔料が挙げられる。 Orange colorants include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds and azo compounds. The orange colorant is preferably a pigment (orange pigment). Specific examples of orange colorants include orange pigments such as C.I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17:1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, and 73.

 黄色色材としては、アゾ化合物、アゾメチン化合物、イソインドリン化合物、プテリジン化合物、キノフタロン化合物およびペリレン化合物が挙げられる。黄色色材は顔料(黄色顔料)であることが好ましい。黄色色材の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236等の黄色顔料が挙げられる。 Yellow colorants include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindoline compounds, pteridine compounds, quinophthalone compounds, and perylene compounds. The yellow colorant is preferably a pigment (yellow pigment). Specific examples of yellow colorants include C.I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35:1, 36, 36:1, 37, 37:1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125 , 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 179, 180, 181, 182, 185, 187, 188, 193, 194, 199, 213, 214, 215, 228, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, and other yellow pigments.

 黄色色材としては、下記構造のアゾバルビツール酸ニッケル錯体を用いることもできる。
As the yellow coloring material, an azobarbituric acid nickel complex having the following structure can also be used.

 黄色色材として、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0031~0033に記載の化合物、特開2019-073695号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073696号公報に記載のメチン染料を用いることができる。 Yellow colorants that can be used include the compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0033 of WO 2022/085485, the methine dyes described in JP 2019-073695 A, and the methine dyes described in JP 2019-073696 A.

 紫色色材としては、オキサジン化合物、キナクリドン化合物、ペリレン化合物およびインジゴ化合物などが挙げられ、オキサジン化合物であることが好ましい。紫色色材は顔料(紫色顔料)であることが好ましい。紫色色材の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61等の紫色顔料が挙げられる。 Purple colorants include oxazine compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, and indigo compounds, with oxazine compounds being preferred. The purple colorant is preferably a pigment (purple pigment). Specific examples of purple colorants include purple pigments such as C.I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, and 61.

 青色色材としては、フタロシアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物などが挙げられ、フタロシアニン化合物であることが好ましい。青色色材は顔料(青色顔料)であることが好ましい。青色色材の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントブルー1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88等の青色顔料が挙げられる。また、青色色材として、リン原子を有するアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2012-247591号公報の段落0022~0030、特開2011-157478号公報の段落0047に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of blue colorants include phthalocyanine compounds and squarylium compounds, with phthalocyanine compounds being preferred. The blue colorant is preferably a pigment (blue pigment). Specific examples of blue colorants include blue pigments such as C.I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15:1, 15:2, 15:3, 15:4, 15:6, 16, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, and 88. Aluminum phthalocyanine compounds containing phosphorus atoms can also be used as blue colorants. Specific examples include the compounds described in paragraphs 0022 to 0030 of JP-A No. 2012-247591 and paragraph 0047 of JP-A No. 2011-157478.

 有彩色色材には染料を用いることもできる。染料としては特に制限はなく、公知の染料が使用できる。例えば、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリアリールメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系、ピロメテン系等の染料が挙げられる。 Dyes can also be used as chromatic colorants. There are no particular restrictions on the dyes, and known dyes can be used. Examples include pyrazole azo dyes, anilino azo dyes, triarylmethane dyes, anthraquinone dyes, anthrapyridone dyes, benzylidene dyes, oxonol dyes, pyrazolotriazole azo dyes, pyridone azo dyes, cyanine dyes, phenothiazine dyes, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine dyes, xanthene dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, benzopyran dyes, indigo dyes, and pyrromethene dyes.

 有彩色色材には色素多量体を用いることもできる。色素多量体は、溶剤に溶解して用いられる染料であることが好ましい。また、色素多量体は、粒子を形成していてもよい。色素多量体が粒子である場合は通常溶剤に分散した状態で用いられる。粒子状態の色素多量体は、例えば乳化重合によって得ることができ、特開2015-214682号公報に記載されている化合物および製造方法が具体例として挙げられる。色素多量体は、一分子中に、色素構造を2以上有するものであり、色素構造を3以上有することが好ましい。上限は、特に限定はないが、100以下とすることもできる。一分子中に有する複数の色素構造は、同一の色素構造であってもよく、異なる色素構造であってもよい。色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~50000が好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、6000以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、30000以下がより好ましく、20000以下がさらに好ましい。色素多量体は、特開2011-213925号公報、特開2013-041097号公報、特開2015-028144号公報、特開2015-030742号公報、国際公開第2016/031442号等に記載されている化合物を用いることもできる。 Dye polymers can also be used as chromatic colorants. The dye polymer is preferably a dye dissolved in a solvent before use. The dye polymer may also form particles. When the dye polymer is particulate, it is typically used in a dispersed state in a solvent. Particulate dye polymers can be obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization; examples of the compounds and manufacturing methods described in JP-A-2015-214682 include the compounds and manufacturing methods described in JP-A-2015-214682. The dye polymer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, preferably three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but can be 100 or less. The multiple dye structures in one molecule may be the same or different dye structures. The weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye polymer is preferably 2,000 to 50,000. The lower limit is more preferably 3,000 or more, and even more preferably 6,000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, and even more preferably 20,000 or less. Dye multimers may also use compounds described in JP 2011-213925 A, JP 2013-041097 A, JP 2015-028144 A, JP 2015-030742 A, WO 2016/031442, etc.

 有彩色色材として、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0028160号公報に記載されたトリアリールメタン染料ポリマー、特開2020-117638号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物、国際公開第2020/174991号に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-160279号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物又はそれらの塩、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069442号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069730号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069070号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069067号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069062号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、特許第6809649号に記載のハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料、特開2020-180176号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物、特開2021-187913号公報に記載のフェノチアジン系化合物、国際公開第2022/004261号に記載のハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン、国際公開第2021/250883号に記載のハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0030759号公報の式1で表されるキノフタロン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0061793号公報に記載の高分子染料、特開2022-029701号公報に記載の有彩色色材、国際公開第2022/014635号に記載のイソインドリン化合物、国際公開第2022/024926号に記載のアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物、特開2022-045895号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2022/050051号に記載の化合物、特開2020-090676号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-055956号公報に記載の化合物、特開2021-031681号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-056354号公報に記載の化合物、米国特許出願公開第2021/0355327号明細書に記載の化合物、国際公開第2022/065357号に記載の化合物、特開2020-045436号公報に記載の化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2021-0146726号公報に記載の化合物、特開2018-178039号公報に記載の化合物、中国特許出願公開第113881244号明細書に記載の化合物、中国特許出願公開第113881245号明細書に記載の化合物、中国特許出願公開第113881246号明細書に記載の化合物、特開2022-104822号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-096701号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-023652号公報に記載の化合物、色材協会誌(2022年発行)の80~84ページに記載の緑色顔料、特開2022-143135号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-140287号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2022/136308号に記載の化合物、中国特許出願公開第113061349号明細書に記載のペリレン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2017-0018993号公報に記載のシアン顔料、特開2020-180176号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物、特開2023-013209号公報に記載の化合物、特開2023-013166号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2023/286526号に記載のキサンテン化合物、特開2021-155746号公報に記載の化合物、特開2021-155747号公報に記載の化合物、特開2021-155748号公報に記載の化合物、特開2021-155749号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2018/051876号に記載の化合物、特開2020-083981号公報に記載の化合物、特開2023-056463号公報に記載の化合物、特表2023-515473号公報に記載の化合物、特表2022-549530号公報に記載のジオキサン化合物、特開2022-061494号公報に記載の顔料調製物、特開2023-057917号公報に記載のジケトピロロピロール顔料、特開2023-061273号公報に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、特表2023-519314号公報に記載のフタロシアニン、特開2023-080419号公報に記載のキノフタロン、特開2023-103177号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-026521号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2023-0043000号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2023-0050069号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2023-127878号公報に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2023-150459号公報に記載のトリアリールメタン化合物、特開2023-149735号公報に記載のトリアリールメタン化合物、特開2023-123349号公報に記載のコアシェル染料、特表2023-543717号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物、中国特許出願公開第116102441号明細書に記載の化合物、特開2023-150459号公報に記載の化合物、特開2023-167345号公報に記載の化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2023-0061078号公報に記載の化合物等を用いることもできる。また、有彩色色材はロタキサンであってもよい。色素骨格はロタキサンの環状構造に使用されていてもよく、棒状構造に使用されていてもよく、両方の構造に使用されていてもよい。 As chromatic colorants, triarylmethane dye polymers described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0028160, xanthene compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-117638, phthalocyanine compounds described in International Publication No. 2020/174991, isoindoline compounds or salts thereof described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-160279, compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069442, compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069730, compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069070, Compounds represented by formula 1 described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069067, compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069062, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments described in Japanese Patent No. 6809649, isoindoline compounds described in JP 2020-180176, phenothiazine compounds described in JP 2021-187913, halogenated zinc phthalocyanines described in WO 2022/004261, halogenated zinc phthalocyanines described in WO 2021/250883, and compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0030759. Quinophthalone compounds, polymer dyes described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0061793, chromatic colorants described in JP 2022-029701 A, isoindoline compounds described in WO 2022/014635 A, aluminum phthalocyanine compounds described in WO 2022/024926 A, compounds described in JP 2022-045895 A, compounds described in WO 2022/050051 A, compounds described in JP 2020-090676 A, compounds described in JP 2020-055956 A, compounds described in JP 2021-031681 A, JP 2022-056354 A Compounds described in JP 2020-045436 A, compounds described in US Patent Application Publication No. 2021/0355327, compounds described in WO 2022/065357, compounds described in JP 2020-045436 A, compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2021-0146726, compounds described in JP 2018-178039 A, compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 113881244, compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 113881245, compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 113881246, compounds described in JP 2022-104822 A, JP 2022-096701 Compounds described in JP-A-2020-023652, compounds described in JP-A-2020-023652, green pigments described on pages 80 to 84 of the Journal of the Color Materials Association (published in 2022), compounds described in JP-A-2022-143135, compounds described in JP-A-2022-140287, compounds described in WO 2022/136308, perylene compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 113061349, cyan pigments described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0018993, isoindoline compounds described in JP-A-2020-180176, compounds described in JP-A-2023-013209, JP-A-2023-013166 Compounds described in WO 2023/286526, xanthene compounds described in JP 2021-155746 A, compounds described in JP 2021-155747 A, compounds described in JP 2021-155748 A, compounds described in JP 2021-155749 A, compounds described in WO 2018/051876 A, compounds described in JP 2020-083981 A, compounds described in JP 2023-056463 A, compounds described in JP 2023-515473 A, dioxane compounds described in JP 2022-549530 A, JP 2022-061494 A Pigment preparations described in JP-A-2023-057917, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments described in JP-A-2023-061273, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in JP-A-2023-061273, phthalocyanines described in JP-T-2023-519314, quinophthalones described in JP-A-2023-080419, phthalocyanine compounds described in JP-A-2023-103177, isoindoline compounds described in JP-A-2020-026521, squarylium compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2023-0043000, squarylium compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2023-0050069, Diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in JP-A-2023-127878, triarylmethane compounds described in JP-A-2023-150459, triarylmethane compounds described in JP-A-2023-149735, core-shell dyes described in JP-A-2023-123349, xanthene compounds described in JP-T-2023-543717, compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 116102441, compounds described in JP-A-2023-150459, compounds described in JP-A-2023-167345, compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2023-0061078, and the like can also be used. Furthermore, the chromatic colorant may be a rotaxane. The dye skeleton may be used in the cyclic structure of the rotaxane, in the rod-shaped structure, or in both structures.

 有彩色色材は、2種以上組み合わせて用いてもよい。また、有彩色色材は、2種以上組み合わせて用いる場合、2種以上の有彩色色材の組み合わせで黒色を形成していてもよい。そのような組み合わせとしては、例えば以下の(1)~(7)の態様が挙げられる。光硬化性組成物中に有彩色色材を2種以上含み、かつ、2種以上の有彩色色材の組み合わせで黒色を呈している場合においては、本発明の光硬化性組成物は、赤外線透過フィルタ形成用の光硬化性組成物として好ましく用いることができる。
(1)赤色色材と青色色材とを含有する態様。
(2)赤色色材と青色色材と黄色色材とを含有する態様。
(3)赤色色材と青色色材と黄色色材と紫色色材とを含有する態様。
(4)赤色色材と青色色材と黄色色材と紫色色材と緑色色材とを含有する態様。
(5)赤色色材と青色色材と黄色色材と緑色色材とを含有する態様。
(6)赤色色材と青色色材と緑色色材とを含有する態様。
(7)黄色色材と紫色色材とを含有する態様。
Two or more chromatic colorants may be used in combination. When two or more chromatic colorants are used in combination, the combination of two or more chromatic colorants may form a black color. Examples of such combinations include the following embodiments (1) to (7). When the photocurable composition contains two or more chromatic colorants and exhibits a black color through the combination of two or more chromatic colorants, the photocurable composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a photocurable composition for forming an infrared transmission filter.
(1) An embodiment containing a red coloring material and a blue coloring material.
(2) An embodiment containing a red coloring material, a blue coloring material, and a yellow coloring material.
(3) An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, a yellow color material, and a purple color material.
(4) An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, a yellow color material, a purple color material, and a green color material.
(5) An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, a yellow color material, and a green color material.
(6) An embodiment containing a red color material, a blue color material, and a green color material.
(7) An embodiment containing a yellow coloring material and a purple coloring material.

(白色色材)
 白色色材としては、酸化チタン、チタン酸ストロンチウム、チタン酸バリウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化マグネシウム、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化アルミニウム、硫酸バリウム、シリカ、タルク、マイカ、水酸化アルミニウム、ケイ酸カルシウム、ケイ酸アルミニウム、硫化亜鉛などの無機顔料が挙げられる。白色色材は、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0040~0043に記載の白色顔料を使用することができる。
(white coloring material)
Examples of white coloring materials include inorganic pigments such as titanium oxide, strontium titanate, barium titanate, zinc oxide, magnesium oxide, zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, barium sulfate, silica, talc, mica, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, and zinc sulfide. The white coloring material can be the white pigments described in paragraphs 0040 to 0043 of WO 2022/085485.

(黒色色材)
 黒色色材としては特に限定されず、公知のものを用いることができる。黒色色材は、無機黒色色材であってもよく、有機黒色色材であってもよい。黒色色材は、顔料であることが好ましい。なお、本明細書において、黒色色材は、波長400~700nmの全ての範囲にわたって吸収を示す色材を意味する。
(black color material)
The black coloring material is not particularly limited, and known materials can be used. The black coloring material may be an inorganic black coloring material or an organic black coloring material. The black coloring material is preferably a pigment. In this specification, the black coloring material means a coloring material that exhibits absorption over the entire wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm.

 無機黒色色材としては、カーボンブラック、チタンブラック、グラファイト等が挙げられ、カーボンブラック、チタンブラックが好ましく、チタンブラックがより好ましい。チタンブラックとは、チタン原子を含有する黒色粒子であり、低次酸化チタンや酸窒化チタンが好ましい。チタンブラックは、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0044に記載のチタンブラックを用いることができる。無機黒色色材には、特開2023-048173号公報に記載の窒化ジルコニウム粉末を用いることもできる。 Inorganic black colorants include carbon black, titanium black, graphite, etc., with carbon black and titanium black being preferred, and titanium black being more preferred. Titanium black is black particles containing titanium atoms, and low-order titanium oxide or titanium oxynitride is preferred. The titanium black described in paragraph 0044 of WO 2022/085485 can be used. Zirconium nitride powder described in JP 2023-048173 A can also be used as an inorganic black colorant.

 有機黒色色材としては、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、ペリレン化合物、アゾ化合物などが挙げられ、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物、ペリレン化合物が好ましい。有機黒色色材は、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落0166に記載の化合物を用いることができる。また、有機黒色色材としては、特開2017-226821号公報の段落0016~0020に記載のペリレンブラック(Lumogen Black FK4280等)、特開2022-121935号公報に記載の黒色アゾ顔料を使用しても良い。 Examples of organic black colorants include bisbenzofuranone compounds, azomethine compounds, perylene compounds, and azo compounds, with bisbenzofuranone compounds and perylene compounds being preferred. The compounds described in paragraph 0166 of WO 2022/065215 can be used as organic black colorants. Additionally, perylene black (such as Lumogen Black FK4280) described in paragraphs 0016 to 0020 of JP 2017-226821 A and black azo pigments described in JP 2022-121935 A may also be used as organic black colorants.

 黒色色材は、色材協会誌2023年96巻9号の294~307項に記載の黒色色材を用いることもできる。 The black coloring materials described in the Journal of the Japan Color Materials Association, Vol. 96, No. 9, 2023, pages 294-307, can also be used.

(赤外線吸収色材)
 赤外線吸収色材は、極大吸収波長を波長700nmよりも長波長側に有する化合物であることが好ましい。赤外線吸収色材は波長700nmを超え1800nm以下の範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物であることが好ましく、波長700nmを超え1400nm以下の範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物であることがより好ましく、波長700nmを超え1200nm以下の範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物であることが更に好ましく、波長700nmを超え1000nm以下の範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物であることが特に好ましい。また、赤外線吸収色材の波長500nmにおける吸光度Aと極大吸収波長における吸光度Aとの比率A/Aが0.08以下であることが好ましく、0.04以下であることがより好ましい。また、赤外線吸収色材は、顔料であることが好ましく、有機顔料であることがより好ましい。
(Infrared absorbing colorant)
The infrared absorbing colorant is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength longer than 700 nm. The infrared absorbing colorant is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of more than 700 nm to 1800 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of more than 700 nm to 1400 nm, even more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of more than 700 nm to 1200 nm, and particularly preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of more than 700 nm to 1000 nm. Furthermore, the ratio A1 / A2 of the absorbance A1 at a wavelength of 500 nm of the infrared absorbing colorant to the absorbance A2 at the maximum absorption wavelength is preferably 0.08 or less, more preferably 0.04 or less. Furthermore, the infrared absorbing colorant is preferably a pigment, more preferably an organic pigment.

 赤外線吸収色材としては、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、クアテリレン化合物、メロシアニン化合物、クロコニウム化合物、オキソノール化合物、イミニウム化合物、ジチオール化合物、トリアリールメタン化合物、ピロメテン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、アントラキノン化合物、ジベンゾフラノン化合物、ジチオレン金属錯体、金属酸化物、金属ホウ化物等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落0114に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、赤外線吸収色材としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落0121に記載の化合物、特開2020-075959号公報に記載されたスクアリリウム化合物、 韓国公開特許第10-2019-0135217号公報に記載の銅錯体、特開2021-195515号公報に記載のクロコン酸化合物、特開2022-022070号公報に記載の赤外線吸収性色素、国際公開第2019/021767号に記載のクロコニウム化合物、特開2019-127549号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2022/059619号に記載の化合物、特開2022-151682号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-188858号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2022-184710号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-189736号公報に記載の化合物、特開2023-004570号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、国際公開第2019/230660号に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、国際公開第2020/218615号に記載の化合物、特開2023-068643号公報に記載のジイミニウム化合物、特開2023-052770号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2022-0163680号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2023-073064号公報に記載のインジゴモノホウ素錯体、特開2023-066025号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-041127号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2023-073064号公報に記載のインジゴ化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2023-0016355号公報に記載のインジゴ化合物、国際公開第2019/230570号に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2023-095824号公報に記載のジイミニウム化合物を用いることもできる。 Infrared-absorbing colorants include pyrrolopyrrole compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, quaterrylene compounds, merocyanine compounds, croconium compounds, oxonol compounds, iminium compounds, dithiol compounds, triarylmethane compounds, pyrromethene compounds, azomethine compounds, anthraquinone compounds, dibenzofuranone compounds, dithiolene metal complexes, metal oxides, and metal borides. Specific examples of these include the compounds described in paragraph 0114 of WO 2022/065215. In addition, examples of infrared absorbing colorants include the compounds described in paragraph 0121 of WO 2022/065215, squarylium compounds described in JP 2020-075959 A, copper complexes described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0135217, croconic acid compounds described in JP 2021-195515 A, infrared absorbing dyes described in JP 2022-022070 A, and the compounds described in WO 2019/021767. Croconium compounds, compounds described in JP 2019-127549 A, compounds described in WO 2022/059619 A, compounds described in JP 2022-151682 A, squarylium compounds described in JP 2022-188858 A, compounds described in JP 2022-184710 A, compounds described in JP 2022-189736 A, squarylium compounds described in JP 2023-004570 A, Squarylium compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/230660, compounds described in International Publication No. 2020/218615, diiminium compounds described in JP-A-2023-068643, squarylium compounds described in JP-A-2023-052770, phthalocyanine compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2022-0163680, indigo monoboron complexes described in JP-A-2023-073064, It is also possible to use the phthalocyanine compounds described in JP-A-3-066025, the phthalocyanine compounds described in JP-A-2020-041127, the indigo compounds described in JP-A-2023-073064, the indigo compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2023-0016355, the squarylium compounds described in WO 2019/230570, and the diiminium compounds described in JP-A-2023-095824.

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における色材の含有量は30~80質量%であることが好ましい。上限は70質量%以下であることが好ましく、65質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は35質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The content of the colorant in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 30 to 80% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, and more preferably 65% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 35% by mass or more, and more preferably 40% by mass or more.

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における顔料の含有量は、20~80質量%であることが好ましい。上限は75質量%以下であることが好ましく、65質量%以下であることがより好ましく、63質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は25質量%以上であることが好ましく、30質量%以上であることがより好ましく、35質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。 The pigment content of the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 20 to 80% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 75% by mass or less, more preferably 65% by mass or less, and even more preferably 63% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 25% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, and even more preferably 35% by mass or more.

 色材中における顔料の含有量は、20~100質量%であることが好ましく、50~100質量%であることがより好ましく、70~100質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The pigment content in the colorant is preferably 20 to 100% by mass, more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, and even more preferably 70 to 100% by mass.

<<連鎖移動剤>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、連鎖移動剤を含有することが好ましい。連鎖移動剤としては、チオール化合物、チオカルボニルチオ化合物、芳香族α-メチルアルケニルの2量体などが挙げられ、チオール化合物であることが好ましい。連鎖移動剤については、国際公開第2019/188652号の段落0093~0113に記載された化合物が挙げられる。
<<Chain transfer agent>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a chain transfer agent. Examples of the chain transfer agent include a thiol compound, a thiocarbonylthio compound, and an aromatic α-methylalkenyl dimer, and a thiol compound is preferred. Examples of the chain transfer agent include the compounds described in paragraphs 0093 to 0113 of WO 2019/188652.

 連鎖移動剤として用いるチオール化合物は、チオール基を1個以上有する化合物であり、チオール基を2個以上有する化合物であることが好ましい。チオール化合物に含まれるチオール基の数の上限は、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましく、4以下が更に好ましい。チオール化合物は、チオール基を2個有する化合物であることが特に好ましい。 The thiol compound used as a chain transfer agent is a compound having one or more thiol groups, preferably a compound having two or more thiol groups. The upper limit of the number of thiol groups contained in the thiol compound is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, and even more preferably 4 or less. It is particularly preferable that the thiol compound be a compound having two thiol groups.

 チオール化合物は、下記式(SH-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
 LS1-(SH)   ・・・式(SH-1)
(式中、SHはチオール基を表し、Lは、n価の基を表し、nは1以上の整数を表す。)
The thiol compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (SH-1):
L S1 - (SH) n ...Formula (SH-1)
(In the formula, SH represents a thiol group, L1 represents an n-valent group, and n represents an integer of 1 or more.)

 式(SH-1)のLS1が表すn価の基としては、炭化水素基、複素環基、-O-、-S-、-NRS1-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-SO-もしくはこれらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。RS1は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、芳香族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、環状であってもよく、非環状であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基を有していなくてもよい。また、環状の脂肪族炭化水素基、および、芳香族炭化水素基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基は、脂肪族複素環基であっても、芳香族複素環基であってもよい。また、複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子などが挙げられる。Lを構成する炭素原子の数は、3~100であることが好ましく、6~50であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the n-valent group represented by L S1 in formula (SH-1) include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, —O—, —S—, —NR S1 —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 —, or a group consisting of a combination thereof. R S1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom. The hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or acyclic. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent or may not have a substituent. The cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. Examples of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group include nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, and sulfur atoms. The number of carbon atoms constituting L1 is preferably 3 to 100, and more preferably 6 to 50.

 式(SH-1)において、nは1以上の整数を表す。nの上限は、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましく、4以下が更に好ましい。nの下限は、2以上が好ましい。 In formula (SH-1), n represents an integer of 1 or greater. The upper limit of n is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, and even more preferably 4 or less. The lower limit of n is preferably 2 or greater.

 チオール化合物の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の化合物、国際公開第2019/188652号の段落0100~0103に記載の化合物が挙げられる。チオール化合物の市販品としては、PEMP(SC有機化学株式会社製)、サンセラー M(三新化学工業(株)製)、カレンズMTBD1、カレンズMTPE1、カレンズMTNR1、カレンズMTTPMB(以上、(株)レゾナック製)などが挙げられる。連鎖移動剤には、特開2020-109068号公報に記載のチオール化合物を用いることもできる。 Specific examples of thiol compounds include the compounds described in the Examples below and the compounds described in paragraphs 0100 to 0103 of WO 2019/188652. Commercially available thiol compounds include PEMP (manufactured by SC Organic Chemical Co., Ltd.), Suncera M (manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Karenz MTBD1, Karenz MTPE1, Karenz MTNR1, and Karenz MTTPMB (all manufactured by Resonac Corporation). The thiol compounds described in JP 2020-109068 A can also be used as chain transfer agents.

 連鎖移動剤の分子量は、200以上であることが好ましい。上限は、重量あたりのSH価数を高めることができるという理由から1000以下が好ましく、800以下がより好ましく、600以下が更に好ましい。 The molecular weight of the chain transfer agent is preferably 200 or more. The upper limit is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 800 or less, and even more preferably 600 or less, because this increases the SH valence per weight.

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における連鎖移動剤の含有量は0.001~5質量%であることが好ましい。上限は3質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は0.05質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.01質量%以上であることがより好ましい。連鎖移動剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the chain transfer agent in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.001 to 5% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 3% by mass or less, and more preferably 1% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.05% by mass or more, and more preferably 0.01% by mass or more. Only one type of chain transfer agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.

<<アミン化合物>>
 本発明の硬化性化合物は、アミン化合物を含むことが好ましい。この態様によれば、露光時における光重合開始剤からのラジカルの発生効率をより向上させて、重合性化合物の重合反応をより促進させることができる。
<<Amine compounds>>
The curable compound of the present invention preferably contains an amine compound. According to this embodiment, the efficiency of generating radicals from the photopolymerization initiator during exposure can be further improved, and the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound can be further promoted.

 アミン化合物の分子量は、100~1000であることが好ましい。上限は、800以下であることが好ましく、500以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、150以上であることが好ましく、200以上であることがより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the amine compound is preferably 100 to 1,000. The upper limit is preferably 800 or less, and more preferably 500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 150 or more, and more preferably 200 or more.

 アミン化合物は1分子中にアミノ基を1~8個有する化合物であることが好ましく、1~4個有する化合物であることがより好ましく、1~2個有する化合物であることが更に好ましい。 The amine compound is preferably a compound having 1 to 8 amino groups per molecule, more preferably a compound having 1 to 4 amino groups, and even more preferably a compound having 1 to 2 amino groups.

 アミン化合物は無色であることが好ましい。すなわち、アミン化合物の波長400~700nmにおけるモル吸光係数は200L・mol-1・cm-1未満であることが好ましく、100L・mol-1・cm-1未満であることがより好ましい。 The amine compound is preferably colorless, i.e., the molar absorption coefficient of the amine compound at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is preferably less than 200 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 , and more preferably less than 100 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 .

 アミン化合物は1~3級アミンでも良いが、3級アミンであることが好ましい。 The amine compound may be a primary, secondary, or tertiary amine, but a tertiary amine is preferred.

 アミン化合物は窒素原子に接続する3つの基は水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロアリール基から選択されることが好ましい。なかでもアルキル基とアリール基の組み合わせが最も好ましい。 In the amine compound, the three groups connected to the nitrogen atom are preferably selected from a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group. Of these, a combination of an alkyl group and an aryl group is most preferred.

 アミン化合物はアルカリ現像性を高め残渣を低減させる目的で、カルボキシ基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、ヒドロキシ基のいずれかを有していることが好ましい。 The amine compound preferably has a carboxyl group, sulfonic acid group, phosphate group, or hydroxyl group in order to enhance alkaline developability and reduce residues.

 アミン化合物は式(B-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
 式(B-1)中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~10の1価の有機基を表し、Rは、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい1価の有機基を表し、mは0~5の整数を表す。
The amine compound is preferably a compound represented by formula (B-1).
In formula (B-1), R a and R b each independently represent a monovalent organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may contain a heteroatom; R c represents a monovalent organic group which may contain a heteroatom; and m represents an integer of 0 to 5.

 R、RおよびRが表す有機基は、アルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基およびヒドロキシ基が挙げられ、ヒドロキシ基であることが好ましい。
 mは0~5の整数を表し、0~3の整数であることが好ましく、0または1であることがより好ましく、0であることが更に好ましい。
The organic groups represented by R a , R b , and R c include alkyl groups, aryl groups, and heteroaryl groups, and are preferably alkyl groups. The alkyl groups, aryl groups, and heteroaryl groups may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, and a hydroxy group, and are preferably hydroxy groups.
m represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.

 アミン化合物の具体例としては、ミヒラーズケトン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、2,5-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)シクロペンタン、2,6-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)シクロヘキサノン、2,6-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)-4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4,4’-ビス(ジメチルアミノ)カルコン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)カルコン、p-ジメチルアミノシンナミリデンインダノン、p-ジメチルアミノベンジリデンインダノン、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビフェニレン)-ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビニレン)ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビニレン)イソナフトチアゾール、1,3-ビス(4’-ジメチルアミノベンザル)アセトン、1,3-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)アセトン、3,3’-カルボニル-ビス(7-ジエチルアミノクマリン)、3-アセチル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-ベンジロキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-メトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、N-フェニル-N’-エチルエタノールアミン、N-フェニルジエタノールアミン、N-p-トリルジエタノールアミン、N-フェニルエタノールアミン、4-モルホリノベンゾフェノン、ジメチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、ジエチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、2-メルカプトベンズイミダゾール、1-フェニル-5-メルカプトテトラゾール、2-メルカプトベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ベンズオキサゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ベンズチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ナフト(1,2-d)チアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノベンゾイル)スチレン等が挙げられる。これらは単独で又は例えば2~5種類の組合せで用いることができる。 Specific examples of amine compounds include Michler's ketone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,5-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclopentane, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclohexanone, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)-4-methylcyclohexanone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)chalcone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)chalcone, and p-dimethylaminocinnamylidene. Indanone, p-dimethylaminobenzylideneindanone, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylbiphenylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)isonaphthothiazole, 1,3-bis(4'-dimethylaminobenzal)acetone, 1,3-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)acetone, 3,3'-carbonyl-bis(7-diethylaminocoumarin), 3-a Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbons include cetyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-benzyloxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-methoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, N-phenyl-N'-ethylethanolamine, N-phenyldiethanolamine, N-p-tolyldiethanolamine, N-phenylethanolamine, 4-morpholinobenzophenone, isoamyl dimethylaminobenzoate, isoamyl diethylaminobenzoate, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, 1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)benzoxazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)benzthiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)naphtho(1,2-d)thiazole, and 2-(p-dimethylaminobenzoyl)styrene. These can be used alone or in combinations of, for example, 2 to 5 types.

 アミン化合物の含有量は、上述した特定化合物100質量部に対して、5~1000質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、500質量部以下であることが好ましく、200質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、20質量部以上であることがより好ましい。アミン化合物は、1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the amine compound is preferably 5 to 1,000 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the specific compound described above. The upper limit is preferably 500 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 200 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or more. Only one type of amine compound may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.

<<酸無水物>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は酸無水物を含有することができる。特定化合物が加水分解してフリーのOH体となっても、酸無水物が存在することにより、再度光分解活性なオキシム化合物に復元することができる。このため、経時での感度の低下を抑制することができる。
<<Acid anhydride>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain an acid anhydride. Even if the specific compound is hydrolyzed to a free OH form, the presence of the acid anhydride allows it to be restored to a photodecomposable oxime compound again. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in sensitivity over time.

 酸無水物としては、カルボン酸無水物及びスルホン酸無水物が挙げられ、カルボン酸無水物であることが好ましい。酸無水物の具体例としては、無水酢酸、無水プロピオン酸、無水イソ酪酸、無水酪酸、無水2-メチル酪酸、ピバル酸無水物、無水イソ吉草酸、無水吉草酸、無水2-メチル吉草酸、無水3-メチル吉草酸、無水4-メチル吉草酸、無水ヘキサン酸、無水2-メチルヘキサン酸、無水3-メチルヘキサン酸、無水4-メチルヘキサン酸、無水5-メチルヘキサン酸、無水ヘプタン酸、無水2-メチルヘプタン酸、無水3-メチルヘプタン酸、無水4-メチルヘプタン酸、無水5-メチルヘプタン酸、無水6-メチルヘプタン酸、3-フェニルプロピオン酸無水物、無水フェニル酢酸、無水メタクリル酸、無水アクリル酸、無水トリクロロ酢酸、無水トリフルオロ酢酸、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水グルタル酸などの脂肪族カルボン酸無水物;無水安息香酸、無水フタル酸、トリメリット酸無水物、ピロメリット酸無水物、無水ナフタル酸などの芳香族カルボン酸無水物;2-スルホ安息香酸無水物などのスルホカルボン酸無水物が挙げられる。 Acid anhydrides include carboxylic acid anhydrides and sulfonic acid anhydrides, with carboxylic acid anhydrides being preferred. Specific examples of acid anhydrides include acetic anhydride, propionic anhydride, isobutyric anhydride, butyric anhydride, 2-methylbutyric anhydride, pivalic anhydride, isovaleric anhydride, valeric anhydride, 2-methylvaleric anhydride, 3-methylvaleric anhydride, 4-methylvaleric anhydride, hexanoic anhydride, 2-methylhexanoic anhydride, 3-methylhexanoic anhydride, 4-methylhexanoic anhydride, 5-methylhexanoic anhydride, heptanoic anhydride, 2-methylheptanoic anhydride, 3-methylheptanoic anhydride, 4-methylheptanoic anhydride, 5-methylhept ... Examples of suitable anhydrides include aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides such as 6-methylheptanoic anhydride, 3-phenylpropionic anhydride, phenylacetic anhydride, methacrylic anhydride, acrylic anhydride, trichloroacetic anhydride, trifluoroacetic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and glutaric anhydride; aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides such as benzoic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and naphthalic anhydride; and sulfocarboxylic acid anhydrides such as 2-sulfobenzoic anhydride.

 酸無水物の含有量は、上述した特定化合物100質量部に対して、1~200質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、100質量部以下であることが好ましく、50質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、5質量部以上であることが好ましく、10質量部以上であることがより好ましい。酸無水物は、1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the acid anhydride is preferably 1 to 200 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the specific compound described above. The upper limit is preferably 100 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 50 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 10 parts by mass or more. Only one type of acid anhydride may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.

<<顔料誘導体>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体は例えば分散助剤として用いられる。分散助剤とは、光硬化性組成物中において顔料などの色材の分散性を高めるための素材のことである。
<<Pigment derivatives>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a pigment derivative. The pigment derivative is used, for example, as a dispersing aid. A dispersing aid is a material that enhances the dispersibility of a coloring material such as a pigment in the photocurable composition.

 顔料誘導体としては、色素構造およびトリアジン構造からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造と、酸基または塩基性基とを有する化合物が挙げられる。 Pigment derivatives include compounds having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a dye structure and a triazine structure, and an acid group or a basic group.

 上記色素構造としては、キノリン色素構造、ベンゾイミダゾロン色素構造、ベンゾイソインドール色素構造、ベンゾチアゾール色素構造、イミニウム色素構造、スクアリリウム色素構造、クロコニウム色素構造、オキソノール色素構造、ピロロピロール色素構造、ジケトピロロピロール色素構造、アゾ色素構造、アゾメチン色素構造、フタロシアニン色素構造、ナフタロシアニン色素構造、アントラキノン色素構造、キナクリドン色素構造、ジオキサジン色素構造、ペリノン色素構造、ペリレン色素構造、チアジンインジゴ色素構造、チオインジゴ色素構造、イソインドリン色素構造、イソインドリノン色素構造、キノフタロン色素構造、ジチオール色素構造、トリアリールメタン色素構造、ピロメテン色素構造等が挙げられる。 Examples of the dye structures include quinoline dye structures, benzimidazolone dye structures, benzisoindole dye structures, benzothiazole dye structures, iminium dye structures, squarylium dye structures, croconium dye structures, oxonol dye structures, pyrrolopyrrole dye structures, diketopyrrolopyrrole dye structures, azo dye structures, azomethine dye structures, phthalocyanine dye structures, naphthalocyanine dye structures, anthraquinone dye structures, quinacridone dye structures, dioxazine dye structures, perinone dye structures, perylene dye structures, thiazineindigo dye structures, thioindigo dye structures, isoindoline dye structures, isoindolinone dye structures, quinophthalone dye structures, dithiol dye structures, triarylmethane dye structures, and pyrromethene dye structures.

 顔料誘導体が有する酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、ボロン酸基、イミド酸基及びこれらの塩等が挙げられる。塩を構成する原子または原子団としては、アルカリ金属イオン(Li、Na、Kなど)、アルカリ土類金属イオン(Ca2+、Mg2+など)、アンモニウムイオン、イミダゾリウムイオン、ピリジニウムイオン、ホスホニウムイオンなどが挙げられる。イミド酸基としては、-SONHSOX1、-CONHSOX2、-CONHCORX3または-SONHCORX4で表される基が好ましく、-SONHSOX1、-CONHSOX2、または-SONHCORX4で表される基がより好ましく、-SONHSOX1または-CONHSOX2が更に好ましい。RX1~RX4は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。RX1~RX4が表すアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としてはハロゲン原子であることが好ましく、フッ素原子であることがより好ましい。RX1~RX4は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子を含むアルキル基またはフッ素原子を含むアリール基であることが好ましく、フッ素原子を含むアルキル基であることがより好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6が更に好ましい。 Examples of acid groups contained in the pigment derivative include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphate group, a boronic acid group, an imidic acid group, and salts thereof. Examples of atoms or atomic groups constituting the salts include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K +, etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Ca2 + , Mg2 +, etc.), ammonium ions, imidazolium ions, pyridinium ions, and phosphonium ions. The imidic acid group is preferably a group represented by -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 , -CONHSO 2 R X2 , -CONHCOR X3 or -SO 2 NHCOR X4, more preferably a group represented by -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 , -CONHSO 2 R X2 or -SO 2 NHCOR X4 , and even more preferably -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 or -CONHSO 2 R X2 . R X1 to R X4 each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group and aryl group represented by R X1 to R X4 may have a substituent. The substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom. R X1 to R X4 each independently represent an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom, more preferably an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and still more preferably 1 to 3. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, and still more preferably 6.

 顔料誘導体が有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基、ピリジニル基およびその塩、アンモニウム基の塩、並びにフタルイミドメチル基が挙げられる。塩を構成する原子または原子団としては、水酸化物イオン、ハロゲンイオン、カルボン酸イオン、スルホン酸イオン、フェノキシドイオンなどが挙げられる。 Basic groups possessed by pigment derivatives include amino groups, pyridinyl groups and their salts, salts of ammonium groups, and phthalimidomethyl groups. Atoms or atomic groups that constitute the salts include hydroxide ions, halogen ions, carboxylate ions, sulfonate ions, and phenoxide ions.

 アミノ基としては、-NRx11x12で表される基、および、環状アミノ基が挙げられる。 Examples of the amino group include a group represented by —NR x11 R x12 and a cyclic amino group.

 -NRx11x12で表される基において、Rx11およびRx12は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基であることが好ましい。すなわち、アミノ基は、ジアルキルアミノ基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。 In the group represented by -NR x11 R x12 , R x11 and R x12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and are preferably alkyl groups. That is, the amino group is preferably a dialkylamino group. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 12. The aryl group may have a substituent.

 環状アミノ基としては、ピロリジン基、ピペリジン基、ピペラジン基、モルホリン基などが挙げられる。これらの基は更に置換基を有していてもよい。 Examples of cyclic amino groups include pyrrolidine groups, piperidine groups, piperazine groups, and morpholine groups. These groups may further have a substituent.

 顔料誘導体は、可視透明性に優れた顔料誘導体(以下、透明顔料誘導体ともいう)を用いることもできる。透明顔料誘導体の400~700nmの波長領域におけるモル吸光係数の最大値(εmax)は3000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることが好ましく、1000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることがより好ましく、100L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることがさらに好ましい。εmaxの下限は、例えば1L・mol-1・cm-1以上であり、10L・mol-1・cm-1以上でもよい。 The pigment derivative may be a pigment derivative with excellent visible transparency (hereinafter also referred to as a transparent pigment derivative). The maximum molar absorption coefficient (εmax) of the transparent pigment derivative in the wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 3000 L mol cm −1 or less, more preferably 1000 L mol cm −1 or less , and even more preferably 100 L mol cm −1 or less. The lower limit of εmax is, for example , 1 L mol cm −1 or more , and may be 10 L mol cm −1 or more .

 顔料誘導体の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の化合物、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0124に記載の化合物、特開2018-168244号公報に記載のベンゾイミダゾロン化合物又はそれらの塩、特許第6996282号の一般式(1)に記載のイソインドリン骨格を有する化合物、特開2019-172968号公報に記載の化合物、中国特許出願公開第115124889号明細書に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of pigment derivatives include the compounds described in the examples below, the compounds described in paragraph 0124 of WO 2022/085485, the benzimidazolone compounds or salts thereof described in JP 2018-168244 A, the compounds having an isoindoline skeleton described in general formula (1) of Japanese Patent No. 6996282, the compounds described in JP 2019-172968 A, and the compounds described in the specification of Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 115124889.

 顔料誘導体の含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して1~30質量部であることが好ましく、3~20質量部であることがより好ましい。また、顔料誘導体と色材との合計の含有量は、光硬化性組成物の全固形分中40質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、60質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、80質量%以下であることが好ましく、70質量%以下であることがより好ましい。顔料誘導体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 The content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, and more preferably 3 to 20 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the pigment. Furthermore, the total content of the pigment derivative and colorant is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 60% by mass or more, of the total solids content of the photocurable composition. The upper limit is preferably 80% by mass or less, and more preferably 70% by mass or less. Only one type of pigment derivative may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.

<<ポリアルキレンイミン>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、ポリアルキレンイミンを含有することもできる。ポリアルキレンイミンは例えば顔料の分散助剤として用いられる。分散助剤とは、光硬化性組成物中において顔料などの色材の分散性を高めるための素材のことである。ポリアルキレンイミンとは、アルキレンイミンを開環重合したポリマーのことである。ポリアルキレンイミンは1級アミノ基と、2級アミノ基と、3級アミノ基とをそれぞれ含む分岐構造を有するポリマーであることが好ましい。アルキレンイミンの炭素数は2~6が好ましく、2~4がより好ましく、2または3であることが更に好ましく、2であることが特に好ましい。
<<Polyalkyleneimine>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may also contain a polyalkyleneimine. The polyalkyleneimine is used, for example, as a dispersing aid for pigments. A dispersing aid is a material for improving the dispersibility of coloring materials such as pigments in a photocurable composition. The polyalkyleneimine is a polymer obtained by ring-opening polymerization of an alkyleneimine. The polyalkyleneimine is preferably a polymer having a branched structure containing a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, and a tertiary amino group. The alkyleneimine preferably has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, even more preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 carbon atoms.

 ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量は、200以上であることが好ましく、250以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、100000以下であることが好ましく、50000以下であることがより好ましく、10000以下であることが更に好ましく、2000以下であることが特に好ましい。なお、ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量の値について、構造式から分子量が計算できる場合は、ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量は構造式から計算した値である。一方、特定アミン化合物の分子量が構造式から計算できない、あるいは、計算が困難な場合には、沸点上昇法で測定した数平均分子量の値を用いる。また、沸点上昇法でも測定できない、あるいは、測定が困難な場合は、粘度法で測定した数平均分子量の値を用いる。また、粘度法でも測定できない、あるいは、粘度法での測定が困難な場合は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値での数平均分子量の値を用いる。 The molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 200 or more, more preferably 250 or more. The upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, even more preferably 10,000 or less, and particularly preferably 2,000 or less. Regarding the molecular weight value of the polyalkyleneimine, if the molecular weight can be calculated from the structural formula, the molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine is the value calculated from the structural formula. On the other hand, if the molecular weight of the specific amine compound cannot be calculated from the structural formula or if calculation is difficult, the number average molecular weight value measured by the boiling point elevation method is used. Furthermore, if it is not possible or difficult to measure by the boiling point elevation method, the number average molecular weight value measured by the viscosity method is used. Furthermore, if it is not possible or difficult to measure by the viscosity method, the number average molecular weight value measured in terms of polystyrene using GPC (gel permeation chromatography) is used.

 ポリアルキレンイミンのアミン価は5mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、10mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、15mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましい。 The amine value of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 5 mmol/g or more, more preferably 10 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 15 mmol/g or more.

 アルキレンイミンの具体例としては、エチレンイミン、プロピレンイミン、1,2-ブチレンイミン、2,3-ブチレンイミンなどが挙げられ、エチレンイミンまたはプロピレンイミンであることが好ましく、エチレンイミンであることがより好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、ポリエチレンイミンであることが特に好ましい。また、ポリエチレンイミンは、1級アミノ基を、1級アミノ基と2級アミノ基と3級アミノ基との合計に対して10モル%以上含むことが好ましく、20モル%以上含むことがより好ましく、30モル%以上含むことが更に好ましい。ポリエチレンイミンの市販品としては、エポミンSP-003、SP-006、SP-012、SP-018、SP-200、P-1000(以上、(株)日本触媒製)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of alkyleneimines include ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, 1,2-butyleneimine, and 2,3-butyleneimine. Ethyleneimine or propyleneimine is preferred, and ethyleneimine is more preferred. The polyalkyleneimine is particularly preferably polyethyleneimine. Furthermore, the polyethyleneimine preferably contains primary amino groups in an amount of 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, and even more preferably 30 mol% or more, based on the total of primary amino groups, secondary amino groups, and tertiary amino groups. Commercially available polyethyleneimines include Epomin SP-003, SP-006, SP-012, SP-018, SP-200, and P-1000 (all manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中におけるポリアルキレンイミンの含有量は0.1~5質量%であることが好ましい。下限は0.2質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は4.5質量%以下であることが好ましく、4質量%以下であることがより好ましく、3質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、ポリアルキレンイミンの含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して0.5~20質量部であることが好ましい。下限は0.6質量部以上であることが好ましく、1質量部以上であることがより好ましく、2質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は10質量部以下であることが好ましく、8質量部以下であることがより好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合はそれらの合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The content of polyalkyleneimine in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 4.5% by mass or less, more preferably 4% by mass or less, and even more preferably 3% by mass or less. Furthermore, the content of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of pigment. The lower limit is preferably 0.6 parts by mass or more, more preferably 1 part by mass or more, and even more preferably 2 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 8 parts by mass or less. Only one type of polyalkyleneimine may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.

<<溶剤>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。溶剤としては、有機溶剤が挙げられる。溶剤の種類は、各成分の溶解性や組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はない。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落0223を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤も好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、2-ペンタノン、3-ペンタノン、4-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、2-メチルシクロヘキサノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、シクロヘプタノン、シクロオクタノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、3-メトキシブタノール、メチルエチルケトン、ガンマブチロラクトン、スルホラン、アニソール、1,4-ジアセトキシブタン、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセタート、二酢酸ブタン-1,3-ジイル、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセタート、ジアセトンアルコール(別名としてダイアセトンアルコール、4-ヒドロキシ-4-メチル-2-ペンタノン)、2-メトキシプロピルアセテート、2-メトキシ-1-プロパノール、イソプロピルアルコールなどが挙げられる。ただし有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
<<Solvent>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. Examples of the solvent include organic solvents. The type of solvent is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the composition. Examples of organic solvents include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For details of these, please refer to paragraph [0223] of WO 2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Furthermore, ester-based solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and ketone-based solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used. Specific examples of organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, 2-pentanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether ... Examples of suitable ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate include 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxybutanol, methyl ethyl ketone, gamma butyrolactone, sulfolane, anisole, 1,4-diacetoxybutane, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, butane-1,3-diyl diacetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, diacetone alcohol (also known as diacetone alcohol, 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), 2-methoxypropyl acetate, 2-methoxy-1-propanol, and isopropyl alcohol. However, it may be preferable to reduce the amount of aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) used as organic solvents for environmental reasons (for example, the amount may be 50 ppm by mass (parts per million) or less, 10 ppm by mass or less, or 1 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total amount of organic solvents).

 有機溶剤の金属含有量は少ないことが好ましい。有機溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば、10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて金属含有量が質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの有機溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような有機溶剤は,例えば、東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 It is preferable for the organic solvent to have a low metal content. For example, the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably 10 parts per billion (ppb) by mass or less. If necessary, organic solvents with metal contents at the ppt (parts per trillion) by mass level may be used. Such organic solvents are provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (The Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).

 有機溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレンまたはナイロンが好ましい。 Methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include, for example, distillation (molecular distillation, thin-film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, and even more preferably 3 μm or less. The filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.

 有機溶剤は、異性体(原子数が同じであるが構造が異なる化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Furthermore, the organic solvent may contain only one type of isomer, or multiple types.

 有機溶剤中の過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 It is preferable that the peroxide content in the organic solvent is 0.8 mmol/L or less, and it is even more preferable that it contains substantially no peroxide.

 光硬化性組成物中における溶剤の含有量は、10~95質量%であることが好ましく、20~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30~90質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The solvent content in the photocurable composition is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 90% by mass.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、環境規制の観点から環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないとは、光硬化性組成物中における環境規制物質の含有量が50質量ppm以下であることを意味し、30質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、10質量ppm以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量ppm以下であることが特に好ましい。環境規制物質は、例えば、ベンゼン;トルエン、キシレン等のアルキルベンゼン類;クロロベンゼン等のハロゲン化ベンゼン類等が挙げられる。これらは、REACH(Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals)規則、PRTR(Pollutant Release and Transfer Register)法、VOC(Volatile Organic Compounds)規制等のもとに環境規制物質として登録されており、使用量や取り扱い方法が厳しく規制されている。これらの化合物は、光硬化性組成物に用いられる各成分などを製造する際に溶媒として用いられることがあり、残留溶媒として光硬化性組成物中に混入することがある。人への安全性、環境への配慮の観点よりこれらの物質は可能な限り低減することが好ましい。環境規制物質を低減する方法としては、系中を加熱や減圧して環境規制物質の沸点以上にして系中から環境規制物質を留去して低減する方法が挙げられる。また、少量の環境規制物質を留去する場合においては、効率を上げる為に該当溶媒と同等の沸点を有する溶媒と共沸させることも有用である。また、ラジカル重合性を有する化合物を含有する場合、減圧留去中にラジカル重合反応が進行して分子間で架橋してしまうことを抑制するために重合禁止剤等を添加して減圧留去してもよい。これらの留去方法は、原料の段階、原料を反応させた生成物(例えば、重合した後の樹脂溶液や多官能モノマー溶液)の段階、またはこれらの化合物を混ぜて作製した光硬化性組成物の段階などのいずれの段階でも可能である。 From the perspective of environmental regulations, it is preferable that the photocurable composition of the present invention is substantially free of environmentally restricted substances. In this invention, "substantially free of environmentally restricted substances" means that the content of environmentally restricted substances in the photocurable composition is 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 30 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 10 ppm by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 ppm by mass or less. Examples of environmentally restricted substances include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene. These substances are registered as environmentally restricted substances under the REACH (Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals) regulations, the PRTR (Pollutant Release and Transfer Register) Act, and the VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) regulations, and their usage amounts and handling methods are strictly regulated. These compounds may be used as solvents when producing components used in photocurable compositions, and may be mixed into the photocurable composition as residual solvents. From the perspectives of human safety and environmental considerations, it is preferable to reduce these substances as much as possible. One method for reducing environmentally restricted substances is to heat or reduce the pressure in the system to a temperature above the boiling point of the environmentally restricted substance, thereby distilling off the environmentally restricted substance from the system. Furthermore, when distilling off small amounts of environmentally regulated substances, it is useful to perform azeotropic distillation with a solvent having a boiling point similar to that of the solvent in question to increase efficiency. Furthermore, when a radically polymerizable compound is contained, a polymerization inhibitor or the like may be added prior to vacuum distillation to prevent intermolecular crosslinking caused by the radical polymerization reaction that occurs during vacuum distillation. These distillation methods can be used at any stage, including the stage of the raw materials, the stage of the product obtained by reacting the raw materials (e.g., a resin solution or a polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or the stage of the photocurable composition prepared by mixing these compounds.

<<環状エーテル基を有する化合物>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物を含有することができる。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基などが挙げられる。エポキシ基は、脂環式エポキシ基であってもよい。なお、脂環式エポキシ基とは、エポキシ環と飽和炭化水素環とが縮合した環状構造を有する1価の官能基のことを意味する。環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、エポキシ基を有する化合物(以下、エポキシ化合物ともいう)であることが好ましい。エポキシ化合物としては、1分子内にエポキシ基を1つ以上有する化合物が挙げられ、エポキシ基を2つ以上有する化合物が好ましい。エポキシ化合物はエポキシ基を1分子内に1~100個有する化合物であることが好ましい。エポキシ化合物に含まれるエポキシ基の上限は、例えば、10個以下とすることもでき、5個以下とすることもできる。エポキシ化合物に含まれるエポキシ基の下限は、2個以上が好ましい。
<<Compounds Having Cyclic Ether Groups>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a cyclic ether group. Examples of the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group. The epoxy group may be an alicyclic epoxy group. The alicyclic epoxy group refers to a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed. The compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter also referred to as an epoxy compound). Examples of epoxy compounds include compounds having one or more epoxy groups per molecule, and compounds having two or more epoxy groups are preferred. The epoxy compound is preferably a compound having 1 to 100 epoxy groups per molecule. The upper limit of the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound can be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less. The lower limit of the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more.

 環状エーテル基を有する化合物としては、特開2013-011869号公報の段落0034~0036、特開2014-043556号公報の段落0147~0156、特開2014-089408号公報の段落0085~0092に記載された化合物、特開2017-179172号公報に記載された化合物、特開2021-195421号公報に記載のキサンテン型エポキシ樹脂、特開2021-195422号公報に記載のキサンテン型エポキシ樹脂を用いることができる。 Examples of compounds having a cyclic ether group that can be used include the compounds described in paragraphs 0034 to 0036 of JP 2013-011869 A, paragraphs 0147 to 0156 of JP 2014-043556 A, paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP 2014-089408 A, the compounds described in JP 2017-179172 A, the xanthene-type epoxy resins described in JP 2021-195421 A, and the xanthene-type epoxy resins described in JP 2021-195422 A.

 環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、低分子化合物(例えば、分子量2000未満、さらには、分子量1000未満)でもよいし、高分子化合物(macromolecule)(例えば、分子量1000以上、ポリマーの場合は、重量平均分子量が1000以上)でもよい。環状エーテル基を有する化合物の重量平均分子量は、200~100000であることが好ましく、500~50000であることがより好ましい。重量平均分子量の上限は、10000以下であることが好ましく、5000以下であることがより好ましく、3000以下であることが更に好ましい。 The compound having a cyclic ether group may be a low molecular weight compound (e.g., a molecular weight of less than 2000, or even less than 1000) or a high molecular weight compound (macromolecule) (e.g., a molecular weight of 1000 or more, or in the case of a polymer, a weight average molecular weight of 1000 or more). The weight average molecular weight of the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably 200 to 100,000, and more preferably 500 to 50,000. The upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.

 環状エーテル基を有する化合物の市販品としては、例えば、EHPE3150((株)ダイセル製)、EPICLON N-695(DIC(株)製)、マープルーフG-0150M、G-0105SA、G-0130SP、G-0250SP、G-1005S、G-1005SA、G-1010S、G-2050M、G-01100、G-01758(以上、日油(株)製、エポキシ基含有ポリマー)等が挙げられる。 Commercially available compounds containing cyclic ether groups include, for example, EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), EPICLON N-695 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Marproof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, and G-01758 (all manufactured by NOF Corporation, epoxy group-containing polymers).

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における環状エーテル基を有する化合物の含有量は、0.1~20質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、1質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、15質量%以下であることが好ましく、10質量%以下であることがより好ましい。環状エーテル基を有する化合物は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, and more preferably 10% by mass or less. Only one type of compound having a cyclic ether group may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.

<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。紫外線吸収剤としては、共役ジエン化合物、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン化合物、インドール化合物、トリアジン化合物、ジベンゾイル化合物などが挙げられる。このような化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0179に記載の化合物、特開2021-178918号公報に記載の反応性トリアジン紫外線吸収剤、特開2022-007884号公報に記載の紫外線吸収剤、韓国公開特許第10-2022-0014454号公報に記載の化合物、特開2023-013321号公報に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~5質量%がより好ましい。紫外線吸収剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Ultraviolet absorber>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber. Examples of ultraviolet absorbers include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, triazine compounds, and dibenzoyl compounds. Specific examples of such compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0179 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, the reactive triazine ultraviolet absorbers described in JP-A-2021-178918, the ultraviolet absorbers described in JP-A-2022-007884, the compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2022-0014454, and the compounds described in JP-A-2023-013321. The content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass. The ultraviolet absorber may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount thereof is preferably in the above range.

<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することができる。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)が挙げられる。中でも、p-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における重合禁止剤の含有量は、0.0001~5質量%が好ましい。重合禁止剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Polymerization inhibitor>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization inhibitor. Examples of polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), and N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salts (ammonium salts, cerous salts, etc.). Of these, p-methoxyphenol is preferred. The content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5 mass%. One type of polymerization inhibitor may be used alone, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount preferably falls within the above range.

<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することができる。シランカップリング剤としては、加水分解性基を有するシラン化合物が挙げられ、加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基とを有するシラン化合物であることが好ましい。加水分解性基とは、ケイ素原子に直結し、加水分解反応及び縮合反応の少なくともいずれかによってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基などが挙げられ、アルコキシ基が好ましい。すなわち、シランカップリング剤は、アルコキシシリル基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、加水分解性基以外の官能基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、チオール基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アミノ基、ウレイド基、スルフィド基、イソシアネート基、フェニル基などが挙げられ、アミノ基、(メタ)アクリロイル基およびエポキシ基が好ましい。シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0177に記載の化合物、特開2019-183020号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。光硬化性組成物の全固形分中におけるシランカップリング剤の含有量は、0.1~15質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、5質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、1質量%以上であることがより好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Silane coupling agent>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent. Examples of the silane coupling agent include silane compounds having a hydrolyzable group, and preferably silane compounds having both a hydrolyzable group and another functional group. The hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent directly bonded to a silicon atom that can form a siloxane bond by at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, and an acyloxy group, with an alkoxy group being preferred. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group. Examples of functional groups other than the hydrolyzable group include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a thiol group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an amino group, a ureido group, a sulfide group, an isocyanate group, and a phenyl group, with an amino group, a (meth)acryloyl group, and an epoxy group being preferred. Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include the compound described in paragraph 0177 of WO 2022/085485 and the compound described in JP 2019-183020 A. The content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more. Only one type of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount be in the above range.

<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、界面活性剤を含有することができる。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用することができる。界面活性剤はシリコーン系界面活性剤またはフッ素系界面活性剤であることが好ましく、シリコーン系界面活性剤であることがより好ましい。界面活性剤については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落0238~0245に記載された界面活性剤を参照することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<<Surfactants>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used. The surfactant is preferably a silicone-based surfactant or a fluorine-based surfactant, and more preferably a silicone-based surfactant. For details of the surfactant, reference can be made to the surfactants described in paragraphs 0238 to 0245 of WO 2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0167~0173に記載の化合物を用いることができる。 As fluorosurfactants, compounds described in paragraphs 0167 to 0173 of WO 2022/085485 can be used.

 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0174に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of nonionic surfactants include the compounds described in paragraph 0174 of WO 2022/085485.

 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、DOWSIL SH8400、SH8400 FLUID、FZ-2122、67 Additive、74 Additive、M Additive、SF 8419 OIL(以上、ダウ・東レ(株)製)、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP-341、KF-6000、KF-6001、KF-6002、KF-6003(以上、信越化学工業(株)製)、BYK-307、BYK-322、BYK-323、BYK-330、BYK-333、BYK-3760、BYK-UV3510(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。また、シリコーン系界面活性剤には下記構造の化合物を用いることもできる。
Silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, and SF 8419. OIL (all manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc.), TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (all manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 (all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (all manufactured by BYK-Chemie). Furthermore, compounds having the following structure can also be used as the silicone surfactant.

 光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における界面活性剤の含有量は、0.001質量%~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~3.0質量%がより好ましい。界面活性剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The surfactant content of the total solids content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.001% to 5.0% by mass, and more preferably 0.005 to 3.0% by mass. Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be used. If two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount be within the above range.

<<酸化防止剤>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、酸化防止剤を含有することができる。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール系酸化防止剤、アミン系酸化防止剤、リン系酸化防止剤、硫黄系酸化防止剤などが挙げられる。フェノール系酸化防止剤としては、ヒンダードフェノール化合物が挙げられる。フェノール系酸化防止剤は、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基に隣接する部位(オルト位)に置換基を有する化合物が好ましい。前述の置換基としては炭素数1~22の置換又は無置換のアルキル基が好ましい。酸化防止剤は、同一分子内にフェノール基と亜リン酸エステル基を有する化合物も好ましい。リン系酸化防止剤としては、トリス[2-[[2,4,8,10-テトラキス(1,1-ジメチルエチル)ジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-6-イル]オキシ]エチル]アミン、トリス[2-[(4,6,9,11-テトラ-tert-ブチルジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-2-イル)オキシ]エチル]アミン、亜リン酸エチルビス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチル-6-メチルフェニル)、トリス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル)ホスファイトなどが挙げられる。酸化防止剤の市販品としては、例えば、アデカスタブ AO-20、アデカスタブ AO-30、アデカスタブ AO-40、アデカスタブ AO-50、アデカスタブ AO-50F、アデカスタブ AO-60、アデカスタブ AO-60G、アデカスタブ AO-80、アデカスタブ AO-330(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、JP-650(城北化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。酸化防止剤は、特許第6268967号公報の段落0023~0048に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/006600号に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/164024号に記載された化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0059371号公報に記載された化合物を使用することもできる。光硬化性組成物の全固形分中における酸化防止剤の含有量は、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.3~15質量%であることがより好ましい。酸化防止剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Antioxidants>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant. Examples of antioxidants include phenolic antioxidants, amine-based antioxidants, phosphorus-based antioxidants, and sulfur-based antioxidants. Examples of phenolic antioxidants include hindered phenol compounds. The phenolic antioxidant is preferably a compound having a substituent at the position adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group (ortho position). The substituent is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms. The antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenol group and a phosphite ester group in the same molecule. Examples of phosphorus-based antioxidants include tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-6-yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl)oxy]ethyl]amine, ethyl bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl)phosphite, and tris(2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl)phosphite. Commercially available antioxidants include, for example, ADK STAB AO-20, ADK STAB AO-30, ADK STAB AO-40, ADK STAB AO-50, ADK STAB AO-50F, ADK STAB AO-60, ADK STAB AO-60G, ADK STAB AO-80, ADK STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), and JP-650 (manufactured by Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Antioxidants include the compounds described in paragraphs 0023 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, the compounds described in WO 2017/006600, the compounds described in WO 2017/164024, and the compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371. The content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the photocurable composition is preferably 0.01 to 20 mass %, more preferably 0.3 to 15 mass %. Only one type of antioxidant may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.

<<その他成分>>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、必要に応じて、熱重合開始剤、熱塩基発生剤、光塩基発生剤、アルミニウム接着助剤、マイグレーション抑制剤、光吸収剤、有機チタン化合物、防錆剤、増感剤、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、充填剤、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、連鎖移動剤など)を含有してもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0182に記載の化合物、国際公開2025/028440号に記載の化合物、国際公開2025/028429号に記載の化合物、国際公開2025/028280号に記載の化合物を用いることができる。
<<Other ingredients>>
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain, as needed, a thermal polymerization initiator, a thermal base generator, a photobase generator, an aluminum adhesion aid, a migration inhibitor, a light absorber, an organic titanium compound, a rust inhibitor, a sensitizer, a plasticizer, and other auxiliaries (e.g., conductive particles, fillers, defoamers, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling promoters, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.). By appropriately incorporating these components, properties such as film properties can be adjusted. As these components, the compounds described in paragraph 0182 of WO 2022/085485, the compounds described in WO 2025/028440, the compounds described in WO 2025/028429, and the compounds described in WO 2025/028280 can be used.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、得られる膜の屈折率を調整するために金属酸化物を含有させてもよい。金属酸化物としては、TiO、ZrO、Al、SiO等が挙げられる。金属酸化物の一次粒子径は1~100nmが好ましく、3~70nmがより好ましく、5~50nmが更に好ましい。金属酸化物はコア-シェル構造を有していてもよい。また、この場合、コア部は中空状であってもよい。 The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a metal oxide to adjust the refractive index of the resulting film. Examples of metal oxides include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , and SiO 2 . The primary particle size of the metal oxide is preferably 1 to 100 nm, more preferably 3 to 70 nm, and even more preferably 5 to 50 nm. The metal oxide may have a core-shell structure. In this case, the core may be hollow.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、耐光性改良剤を含んでもよい。耐光性改良剤としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0183に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a light resistance improver. Examples of light resistance improvers include the compounds described in paragraph 0183 of WO 2022/085485.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、テレフタル酸エステルを実質的に含まないことも好ましい。ここで、「実質的に含まない」とは、テレフタル酸エステルの含有量が、光硬化性組成物の全量中、1000質量ppb以下であることを意味し、100質量ppb以下であることがより好ましく、ゼロであることが特に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the photocurable composition of the present invention is substantially free of terephthalic acid esters. Here, "substantially free" means that the content of terephthalic acid esters in the total amount of the photocurable composition is 1,000 ppb by mass or less, more preferably 100 ppb by mass or less, and particularly preferably zero.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、環境規制の観点から、メラミンの含有量が10000質量ppm以下であることが好ましい。 In light of environmental regulations, it is preferable that the photocurable composition of the present invention have a melamine content of 10,000 ppm by mass or less.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、遊離の金属含有量が100ppm以下であることが好ましく、50ppm以下であることがより好ましい。また、遊離のハロゲン含有量は100ppm以下であることが好ましく、50ppm以下であることがより好ましい。光硬化性組成物中の遊離の金属やハロゲンの低減方法としては、イオン交換水による洗浄、ろ過、限外ろ過、イオン交換樹脂による精製等の方法が挙げられる。 The photocurable composition of the present invention preferably has a free metal content of 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. Furthermore, the free halogen content is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. Methods for reducing free metals and halogens in the photocurable composition include washing with ion-exchanged water, filtration, ultrafiltration, and purification with ion-exchange resins.

 環境規制の観点から、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用が規制されることがある。本発明の光硬化性組成物において、上記した化合物の含有率を小さくする場合、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸)及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸)及びその塩の含有率は、光硬化性組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01ppb~1000ppbの範囲であることが好ましく、0.05ppb~500ppbの範囲であることがより好ましく、0.1ppb~300ppbの範囲であることが更に好ましい。本発明の光硬化性組成物は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まなくてもよい。例えば、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物を用いることで、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まない光硬化性組成物を選択してもよい。規制化合物の代替となりうる化合物としては、例えば、パーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数の違いによって規制対象から除外された化合物が挙げられる。ただし、上記した内容は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用を妨げるものではない。本発明の光硬化性組成物は、許容される最大の範囲内で、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を含んでもよい。 In light of environmental regulations, the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids and their salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acids and their salts may be restricted. When the content of the above-mentioned compounds in the photocurable composition of the present invention is reduced, the content of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids (particularly perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids having a perfluoroalkyl group with 6 to 8 carbon atoms) and their salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acids (particularly perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acids having a perfluoroalkyl group with 6 to 8 carbon atoms) and their salts is preferably in the range of 0.01 ppb to 1000 ppb, more preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, and even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb, relative to the total solids content of the photocurable composition. The photocurable composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids and their salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acids and their salts. For example, by using a compound that can replace perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salts, and a compound that can replace perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salts, a photocurable composition that is substantially free of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salts, may be selected. Examples of compounds that can replace restricted compounds include compounds that are exempt from restrictions due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group. However, the above does not preclude the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salts. The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salts, within the maximum allowable range.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物の含水率は、通常3質量%以下であり、0.01~1.5質量%が好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%の範囲であることがより好ましい。含水率は、カールフィッシャー法にて測定することができる。 The water content of the photocurable composition of the present invention is typically 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass. The water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.

 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、膜面状(平坦性など)の調整、膜厚の調整などを目的として粘度を調整して用いることができる。粘度の値は必要に応じて適宜選択することができるが、例えば、25℃において0.3mPa・s~50mPa・sが好ましく、0.5mPa・s~20mPa・sがより好ましい。粘度の測定方法としては、例えば、コーンプレートタイプの粘度計を使用し、25℃に温度調整を施した状態で測定することができる。 The photocurable composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting its viscosity to adjust the film surface condition (flatness, etc.) and film thickness. The viscosity value can be selected as needed, but is preferably 0.3 mPa·s to 50 mPa·s at 25°C, and more preferably 0.5 mPa·s to 20 mPa·s. Viscosity can be measured, for example, using a cone-plate type viscometer with the temperature adjusted to 25°C.

<<収容容器>>
 光硬化性組成物の収容容器としては、特に限定はなく、公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器として、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0187に記載の容器を用いることができる。
<<Storage container>>
The container for storing the photocurable composition is not particularly limited, and any known container can be used. Also, the container described in paragraph 0187 of WO 2022/085485 can be used as the container.

<光硬化性組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、前述の成分を混合して調製できる。光硬化性組成物の調製に際しては、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解および/または分散して光硬化性組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じて、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して光硬化性組成物を調製してもよい。
<Method for preparing photocurable composition>
The photocurable composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above-mentioned components. When preparing the photocurable composition, all components may be simultaneously dissolved and/or dispersed in a solvent to prepare the photocurable composition, or, if necessary, each component may be prepared as two or more appropriate solutions or dispersions, which are mixed at the time of use (application) to prepare the photocurable composition.

 光硬化性組成物の調製に際して、顔料を分散させるプロセスを含むことが好ましい。顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいて、顔料の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における顔料の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、顔料を分散させるプロセスおよび分散機は、「分散技術大全集、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落0022に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用出来る。また顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば、特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報の記載を参酌できる。分散に使用するビーズの素材としては、ジルコニア、メノウ、石英、チタニア、タングステンカーバイト、窒化ケイ素、アルミナ、ステンレス鋼およびガラスが挙げられる。また、ビーズには、モース硬度が2以上の無機化合物を使用することもできる。光硬化性組成物中に上記ビーズが1~10000ppm含まれていてもよい。 When preparing a photocurable composition, it is preferable to include a process for dispersing the pigment. In the process for dispersing the pigment, mechanical forces used to disperse the pigment include compression, squeezing, impact, shear, and cavitation. Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high-speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high-pressure wet atomization, and ultrasonic dispersion. When grinding the pigment in a sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use small-diameter beads, increase the bead packing rate, and perform the process under conditions that increase grinding efficiency. After the grinding process, it is also preferable to remove coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation, or the like. In addition, the process and disperser for dispersing pigments can be suitably used, as described in "Dispersion Technology Encyclopedia," published by Joho Kiko Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005, or "Dispersion Technology and Industrial Applications Focused on Suspension (Solid/Liquid Dispersion System) - Comprehensive Data Collection," published by the Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978, as well as the process and disperser described in paragraph 0022 of JP 2015-157893 A. In addition, the process for dispersing pigments can be performed by a salt milling process to refine the particles. The materials, equipment, and processing conditions used in the salt milling process can be found in, for example, JP 2015-194521 A and JP 2012-046629 A. Examples of materials for beads used for dispersion include zirconia, agate, quartz, titania, tungsten carbide, silicon nitride, alumina, stainless steel, and glass. The beads can also be made of inorganic compounds with a Mohs hardness of 2 or higher. The photocurable composition may contain 1 to 10,000 ppm of these beads.

 光硬化性組成物の調製にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、光硬化性組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。ろ過に用いるフィルタの種類およびろ過方法としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0196~0199に記載のフィルタおよびろ過方法が挙げられる。 When preparing the photocurable composition, it is preferable to filter the photocurable composition for purposes such as removing foreign matter and reducing defects. Examples of the types of filters and filtration methods used for filtration include those described in paragraphs 0196 to 0199 of WO 2022/085485.

<膜>
 本発明の膜は、上述した本発明の光硬化性組成物から得られる膜である。本発明の膜は、カラーフィルタ、赤外線透過フィルタおよび赤外線カットフィルタなどの光学フィルタに用いることができる。
<Membrane>
The film of the present invention is obtained from the photocurable composition of the present invention described above. The film of the present invention can be used in optical filters such as color filters, infrared transmission filters, and infrared cut filters.

 本発明の膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できる。例えば、膜厚は、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.1μm以上が好ましく、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.3μm以上がさらに好ましい。 The film thickness of the film of the present invention can be adjusted appropriately depending on the purpose. For example, the film thickness is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, and even more preferably 5 μm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 0.2 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.3 μm or more.

 本発明の膜をカラーフィルタとして用いる場合、本発明の膜は、緑色、赤色、青色、シアン色、マゼンタ色または黄色の色相を有することが好ましい。また、本発明の膜は、カラーフィルタの着色画素として好ましく用いることができる。着色画素としては、赤色画素、緑色画素、青色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素、黄色画素などが挙げられる。 When the film of the present invention is used as a color filter, it is preferable that the film of the present invention has a green, red, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow hue. Furthermore, the film of the present invention can be preferably used as the colored pixels of a color filter. Examples of colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels.

<画素の製造方法>
 本発明の光硬化性組成物を用いた画素の製造方法について説明する。画素の製造方法は、本発明の光硬化性組成物を用いて支持体上に組成物層を形成する工程と、組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、組成物層の未露光部を現像除去する工程と、を含む。必要に応じて、組成物層を乾燥する工程(プリベーク工程)、および、現像されたパターン(画素)を加熱処理する工程(ポストベーク工程)を設けてもよい。
<Pixel manufacturing method>
A method for manufacturing pixels using the photocurable composition of the present invention will be described. The method for manufacturing pixels includes the steps of forming a composition layer on a support using the photocurable composition of the present invention, exposing the composition layer to light in a pattern, and developing and removing the unexposed areas of the composition layer. If necessary, a step of drying the composition layer (pre-baking step) and a step of heat-treating the developed pattern (pixels) (post-baking step) may also be provided.

 組成物層を形成する工程では、本発明の光硬化性組成物を用いて、支持体上に組成物層を形成する。支持体としては、特に限定は無く、用途に応じて適宜選択できる。例えば、ガラス基板、シリコン基板などが挙げられ、シリコン基板であることが好ましい。また、シリコン基板には、電荷結合素子(CCD)、相補型金属酸化膜半導体(CMOS)、透明導電膜などが形成されていてもよい。また、シリコン基板には、各画素を隔離するブラックマトリクスが形成されている場合もある。また、シリコン基板には、上部の層との密着性改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下地層が設けられていてもよい。下地層の表面接触角は、ジヨードメタンで測定した際に20~70°であることが好ましい。また、水で測定した際に30~80°であることが好ましい。 In the step of forming the composition layer, the photocurable composition of the present invention is used to form a composition layer on a support. The support is not particularly limited and can be selected appropriately depending on the application. Examples include glass substrates and silicon substrates, with a silicon substrate being preferred. The silicon substrate may also be formed with a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, or the like. A black matrix is sometimes formed on the silicon substrate to isolate each pixel. The silicon substrate may also be provided with a base layer to improve adhesion with the upper layer, prevent diffusion of substances, or flatten the substrate surface. The surface contact angle of the base layer is preferably 20 to 70° when measured with diiodomethane, and 30 to 80° when measured with water.

 光硬化性組成物の塗布方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、滴下法(ドロップキャスト);スリットコート法;スプレー法;ロールコート法;回転塗布法(スピンコーティング);流延塗布法;スリットアンドスピン法;プリウェット法(例えば、特開2009-145395号公報に記載されている方法);インクジェット(例えば、オンデマンド方式、ピエゾ方式、サーマル方式)、ノズルジェット等の吐出系印刷、フレキソ印刷、スクリーン印刷、グラビア印刷、反転オフセット印刷、メタルマスク印刷などの各種印刷法;金型等を用いた転写法;ナノインプリント法などが挙げられる。また、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0207に記載の塗布方法を用いることもできる。 The photocurable composition can be applied using known methods. Examples include drop casting, slit coating, spraying, roll coating, spin coating, casting, slit-and-spin, pre-wetting (e.g., the method described in JP 2009-145395 A), various printing methods such as inkjet (e.g., on-demand, piezo, and thermal), nozzle jet printing, and other ejection-based printing, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, and metal mask printing, transfer methods using molds, and nanoimprinting. The application method described in paragraph 0207 of WO 2022/085485 can also be used.

 支持体上に形成した組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。低温プロセスにより膜を製造する場合は、プリベークを行わなくてもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましく、110℃以下が更に好ましい。下限は、例えば、50℃以上とすることができ、80℃以上とすることもできる。プリベーク時間は、10~300秒が好ましく、40~250秒がより好ましく、80~220秒がさらに好ましい。プリベークは、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). Prebaking is not necessary when producing a film using a low-temperature process. If prebaking is performed, the prebaking temperature is preferably 150°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower, and even more preferably 110°C or lower. The lower limit can be, for example, 50°C or higher, or 80°C or higher. The prebaking time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, and even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Prebaking can be performed using a hot plate, oven, etc.

 次に、組成物層をパターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、組成物層に対し、ステッパー露光機やスキャナ露光機などを用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン状に露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。 Next, the composition layer is exposed to light in a pattern (exposure process). For example, the composition layer can be exposed to light in a pattern by using a stepper exposure machine or scanner exposure machine through a mask with a predetermined mask pattern. This allows the exposed portions to harden.

 露光に際して用いることができる光としては、g線(波長436nm)、h線(波長405nm)、i線(波長365nm)、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられる。露光に際して用いる光は、波長150~400nmであることが好ましく、波長150~400nmのエキシマレーザ光であることが好ましい。露光には400nm以上の長波な光源も利用できる。 Light that can be used for exposure includes g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), i-line (wavelength 365 nm), KrF-line (wavelength 248 nm), and ArF-line (wavelength 193 nm). The light used for exposure preferably has a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm, and is preferably excimer laser light with a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm. Long-wavelength light sources of 400 nm or more can also be used for exposure.

 露光工程では、組成物層に波長150~400nmの光(好ましくは波長150~400nmのエキシマレーザ光)を照射してパターン状に露光することが好ましい。 In the exposure step, it is preferable to irradiate the composition layer with light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm (preferably excimer laser light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm) to expose it in a pattern.

 露光に際して、光を連続的に照射して露光してもよく、パルス的に照射して露光(パルス露光)してもよい。なお、パルス露光とは、短時間(例えば、ミリ秒レベル以下)のサイクルで光の照射と休止を繰り返して露光する方式の露光方法のことである。 When exposing, light can be applied continuously, or in pulses (pulse exposure). Pulse exposure is an exposure method in which light is applied and paused repeatedly in short cycles (for example, milliseconds or less).

 照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cmがより好ましい。露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば、酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、または、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、または、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能である。例えば、100~100000W/mであることが好ましく、500~50000W/mであることがより好ましい。一般的には10000~50000W/mであるが、光コントラストを高めるため、1000W/m以下であってもよい。本発明においては、このような低照度においても露光時間を短くすることができ、歩留まりを向上させることができる。 The irradiation dose (exposure dose) is preferably, for example, 0.03 to 2.5 J/ cm² , and more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/ cm² . The oxygen concentration during exposure can be selected appropriately. In addition to being performed in the atmosphere, exposure can be performed, for example, in a low-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of 19 vol% or less (e.g., 15 vol%, 5 vol%, or substantially oxygen-free), or in a high-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of more than 21 vol% (e.g., 22 vol%, 30 vol%, or 50 vol%). The exposure illuminance can also be set appropriately. For example, it is preferably 100 to 100,000 W/ , and more preferably 500 to 50,000 W/ . Generally, it is 10,000 to 50,000 W/ , but may be 1,000 W/m² or less to enhance optical contrast. In the present invention, the exposure time can be shortened even at such low illuminance, thereby improving yield.

 次に、組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する。組成物層の未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。 Next, the unexposed portions of the composition layer are developed and removed to form a pattern (pixels). The unexposed portions of the composition layer can be developed and removed using a developer. This causes the unexposed portions of the composition layer in the exposure step to dissolve into the developer, leaving only the photocured portions. The temperature of the developer is preferably, for example, 20 to 30°C. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Furthermore, to improve residue removal, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and then supplying fresh developer may be repeated several times.

 現像液は、有機溶剤、アルカリ現像液などが挙げられ、アルカリ現像液が好ましく用いられる。現像液、および、現像後の洗浄(リンス)方法については、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0214に記載の現像液や洗浄方法を用いることができる。 The developer may be an organic solvent or an alkaline developer, with alkaline developers being preferred. The developer and post-development washing (rinsing) method described in paragraph 0214 of WO 2022/085485 can be used.

 現像後、乾燥を施した後に追加露光処理や加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。追加露光処理やポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の硬化処理である。ポストベークにおける加熱温度は、例えば、100~300℃が好ましく、200~270℃がより好ましい。ポストベークは、現像後の膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。追加露光処理を行う場合、露光に用いられる光は、波長400nm以下の光であることが好ましい。また、追加露光処理は、韓国公開特許第10-2017-0122130号公報に記載された方法で行ってもよい。 After development and drying, it is preferable to perform additional exposure or heating (post-baking). Additional exposure or post-baking is a post-development curing treatment to ensure complete curing. The heating temperature for post-baking is preferably 100 to 300°C, and more preferably 200 to 270°C. Post-baking can be performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), or high-frequency heater to heat the developed film to the above conditions. When additional exposure is performed, it is preferable that the light used for exposure has a wavelength of 400 nm or less. The additional exposure may also be performed using the method described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0122130.

<光学フィルタ>
 本発明の光学フィルタは上述した本発明の膜を含む。光学フィルタの種類としては、カラーフィルタ、赤外線カットフィルタおよび赤外線透過フィルタなどが挙げられ、カラーフィルタであることが好ましい。カラーフィルタは、その画素として本発明の膜を有することが好ましく、着色画素として本発明の膜を有することがより好ましい。
<Optical filter>
The optical filter of the present invention includes the above-described film of the present invention. Types of optical filters include color filters, infrared cut filters, and infrared transmission filters, and color filters are preferred. The color filter preferably has the film of the present invention as its pixel, and more preferably has the film of the present invention as its color pixel.

 光学フィルタは、本発明の膜の表面に保護層が設けられていてもよい。保護層を設けることで、酸素遮断化、低反射化、親疎水化、特定波長の光(紫外線、赤外線等)の遮蔽等の種々の機能を付与することができる。保護層の厚さとしては、0.01~10μmが好ましく、0.1~5μmがより好ましい。保護層の形成方法としては、保護層形成用の樹脂組成物を塗布して形成する方法、化学気相蒸着法、成型した樹脂を接着剤で貼りつける方法等が挙げられる。保護層を構成する成分としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、ポリオール樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アラミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、変性シリコーン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、ポリアクリロニトリル樹脂、セルロース樹脂、Si、C、W、Al、Mo、SiO、Siなどが挙げられ、これらの成分を二種以上含有しても良い。例えば、酸素遮断化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層はポリオール樹脂と、SiOと、Siを含むことが好ましい。また、低反射化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層は(メタ)アクリル樹脂とフッ素樹脂を含むことが好ましい。 The optical filter may have a protective layer provided on the surface of the film of the present invention. By providing a protective layer, various functions can be imparted, such as oxygen blocking, low reflectivity, hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity, and blocking of light of specific wavelengths (ultraviolet rays, infrared rays, etc.). The thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 5 μm. Methods for forming the protective layer include a method of applying a resin composition for forming the protective layer, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of attaching a molded resin with an adhesive. Examples of components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, polyol resins, polyvinylidene chloride resins, melamine resins, urethane resins, aramid resins, polyamide resins, alkyd resins, epoxy resins, modified silicone resins, fluororesins, polyacrylonitrile resins, cellulose resins, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4 , and the protective layer may contain two or more of these components. For example, in the case of a protective layer intended to block oxygen, the protective layer preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4. In addition, in the case of a protective layer intended to reduce reflection, the protective layer preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluororesin.

 樹脂組成物を塗布して保護層を形成する場合、樹脂組成物の塗布方法としては、スピンコート法、キャスト法、スクリーン印刷法、インクジェット法等の公知の方法を用いることができる。樹脂組成物に含まれる有機溶剤は、公知の有機溶剤(例えば、プロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート、シクロペンタノン、乳酸エチル等)を用いることが出来る。保護層を化学気相蒸着法にて形成する場合、化学気相蒸着法としては、公知の化学気相蒸着法(熱化学気相蒸着法、プラズマ化学気相蒸着法、光化学気相蒸着法)を用いることができる。 When forming a protective layer by applying a resin composition, known methods such as spin coating, casting, screen printing, and inkjet printing can be used to apply the resin composition. Known organic solvents (e.g., propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.) can be used as the organic solvent contained in the resin composition. When forming the protective layer by chemical vapor deposition, known chemical vapor deposition methods (thermal chemical vapor deposition, plasma chemical vapor deposition, photochemical vapor deposition) can be used as the chemical vapor deposition method.

 保護層は、必要に応じて、有機・無機微粒子、特定波長の光(例えば、紫外線、赤外線等)の吸収剤、屈折率調整剤、酸化防止剤、密着剤、界面活性剤等の添加剤を含有しても良い。有機・無機微粒子の例としては、例えば、高分子微粒子(例えば、シリコーン樹脂微粒子、ポリスチレン微粒子、メラミン樹脂微粒子)、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化インジウム、酸化アルミニウム、窒化チタン、酸窒化チタン、フッ化マグネシウム、中空シリカ、シリカ、炭酸カルシウム、硫酸バリウム等が挙げられる。特定波長の光の吸収剤は公知の吸収剤を用いることができる。これらの添加剤の含有量は適宜調整できるが、保護層の全質量に対して0.1~70質量%が好ましく、1~60質量%がさらに好ましい。 The protective layer may contain additives such as organic or inorganic fine particles, absorbers of specific wavelengths of light (e.g., ultraviolet light, infrared light, etc.), refractive index adjusters, antioxidants, adhesives, surfactants, etc., as needed. Examples of organic and inorganic fine particles include polymeric fine particles (e.g., silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride, magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, etc. Known absorbers of specific wavelengths of light can be used. The content of these additives can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by weight, and more preferably 1 to 60% by weight, of the total weight of the protective layer.

 保護層としては、特開2017-151176号公報の段落0073~0092に記載の保護層を用いることもできる。 The protective layer may be one described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP 2017-151176 A.

 光学フィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。 The optical filter may have a structure in which each pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partitions, for example in a grid pattern.

<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明の膜を備え、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid-state imaging element>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the above-described film of the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it has the film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device, but examples thereof include the following configurations.

 基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCD(電荷結合素子)イメージセンサ、CMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)イメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオードおよび転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口した遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、カラーフィルタを有する構成である。更に、デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(基板に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。また、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各着色画素よりも低屈折率であることが好ましい。このような構造を有する撮像装置の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報、特開2014-179577号公報、国際公開第2018/043654号に記載の装置が挙げられる。また、特開2019-211559号公報の中で示しているように固体撮像素子の構造内に紫外線吸収層を設けて耐光性を改良してもよい。本発明の固体撮像素子を備えた撮像装置は、デジタルカメラや、撮像機能を有する電子機器(携帯電話等)の他、車載カメラや監視カメラ用としても用いることができる。 The device has a substrate on which multiple photodiodes constituting the light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor or a CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor) and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like; a light-shielding film on the photodiodes and transfer electrodes with only the light-receiving portions of the photodiodes open; a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film to cover the entire light-shielding film and the light-receiving portions of the photodiodes; and a color filter on the device protective film. Furthermore, the device protective film may have a light-focusing means (e.g., a microlens, etc.; the same applies below) on the device protective film below the color filter (closer to the substrate), or a light-focusing means on the color filter. The color filter may also have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partitions, for example, in a grid pattern. In this case, it is preferable that the partitions have a lower refractive index than each colored pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include those described in JP 2012-227478 A, JP 2014-179577 A, and WO 2018/043654 A. Furthermore, as described in JP 2019-211559 A, an ultraviolet absorbing layer may be provided within the structure of the solid-state imaging element to improve light resistance. Imaging devices equipped with the solid-state imaging element of the present invention can be used in digital cameras, electronic devices with imaging functions (such as mobile phones), as well as in-vehicle cameras and surveillance cameras.

<画像表示装置>
 本発明の画像表示装置は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。画像表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などが挙げられる。画像表示装置の定義や各画像表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。
<Image display device>
The image display device of the present invention has the above-described film of the present invention. Examples of image display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence display devices. Definitions of image display devices and details of each image display device are described, for example, in "Electronic Display Devices" (written by Akio Sasaki, published by Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd. in 1990) and "Display Devices" (written by Nobuaki Ibuki, published by Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd. in 1989). Liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology" (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd. in 1994). There are no particular limitations on the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied, and the present invention can be applied to various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology."

<光重合開始剤>
 本発明の光重合開始剤は、上述した式(1-A)または式(1-B)で表される化合物を含む。
<Photopolymerization initiator>
The photopolymerization initiator of the present invention includes a compound represented by the above formula (1-A) or formula (1-B).

 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、以下に示す構造式中のMeはメチル基であり、Phはフェニル基であり、iPrはイソプロピル基である。 The present invention will be explained in more detail below with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be modified as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Note that in the structural formulas shown below, Me is a methyl group, Ph is a phenyl group, and iPr is an isopropyl group.

<合成例>
(合成例1) 化合物A-1の合成
 3つ口フラスコにジフェニルエーテル17.0gと、4-(t-ブトキシ)安息香酸21.3gを加え、トリフルオロ酢酸50mLに溶解させた。25℃で攪拌しながらこれに無水トリフルオロ酢酸21.0gを30分かけて滴下し、続けてメタンスルホン酸9.7gを30分かけて滴下した。滴下終了後25℃で4時間攪拌したのち、反応液を酢酸エチルと水で洗浄し、有機層を濃縮して、中間体(A-1a)を31.1g得た。
<Synthesis Example>
Synthesis Example 1 Synthesis of Compound A-1 17.0 g of diphenyl ether and 21.3 g of 4-(t-butoxy)benzoic acid were placed in a three-necked flask and dissolved in 50 mL of trifluoroacetic acid. 21.0 g of trifluoroacetic anhydride was added dropwise to the mixture over 30 minutes while stirring at 25°C, followed by the dropwise addition of 9.7 g of methanesulfonic acid over 30 minutes. After the dropwise addition was completed, the mixture was stirred at 25°C for 4 hours, and then the reaction solution was washed with ethyl acetate and water, and the organic layer was concentrated to obtain 31.1 g of intermediate (A-1a).

 3つ口フラスコに中間体(A-1a)17.3gとジクロロベンゼン100mLを加え、これに塩化アルミニウム15.7gを加えて、さらにプロピオニルクロリド6.3gを加えて50℃で4時間加熱攪拌した。得られた反応液を氷水200mLに加えて反応を終了させて、酢酸エチルで抽出したのち、有機層を濃縮した。得られた濃縮液をメタノールに加えて得られた固体をろ取し、中間体(A-1b)を11.8g得た。
17.3 g of intermediate (A-1a) and 100 mL of dichlorobenzene were placed in a three-neck flask, and 15.7 g of aluminum chloride and 6.3 g of propionyl chloride were added thereto, followed by heating and stirring at 50°C for 4 hours. The resulting reaction solution was added to 200 mL of ice water to terminate the reaction, and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate, and the organic layer was then concentrated. The resulting concentrated solution was added to methanol, and the resulting solid was collected by filtration, yielding 11.8 g of intermediate (A-1b).

 3つ口フラスコに中間体(A-1b)10.0gを加えテトラヒドロフラン50mLに溶解させた。これを5℃に冷却したのち、濃塩酸3mLを加え、さらに引き続いて亜硝酸イソアミル3.5gを30分かけて滴下した。反応液を25℃で4時間さらに攪拌したのち、酢酸エチル100mLと水100mLを加え、有機層を濃縮して中間体(A-1c)の粗体9.5gを得た。これをアセトニトリル50mLで再結晶して、中間体(A-1c)7.2gを得た。HNMRから、tert-ブトキシ基は塩酸で脱離しており、フリーのOH体であった。
10.0 g of intermediate (A-1b) was added to a three-neck flask and dissolved in 50 mL of tetrahydrofuran. After cooling to 5°C, 3 mL of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added, followed by the dropwise addition of 3.5 g of isoamyl nitrite over 30 minutes. The reaction solution was further stirred at 25°C for 4 hours, after which 100 mL of ethyl acetate and 100 mL of water were added, and the organic layer was concentrated to obtain 9.5 g of crude intermediate (A-1c). This was recrystallized from 50 mL of acetonitrile to obtain 7.2 g of intermediate (A-1c). 1 H NMR revealed that the tert-butoxy group had been eliminated by hydrochloric acid, leaving a free OH form.

 3つ口フラスコに中間体(A-1c)4.7gを加え、酢酸エチル30mLに溶解させた。これを5℃に冷却させたのちトリエチルアミン3.8gを加え、引き続いて塩化アセチル3.9gを10分かけて滴下した。室温で2時間攪拌したのち、得られた反応液を水で洗浄し有機層を濃縮した。濃縮物を2―メトキシプロパノールイ10mLに溶解させイソプロピルアルコール100mLで晶析させることで、化合物(A-1)を3.9g得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):2.20(s、3H)、2.33(s、3H)、3.11(s、3H)、7.16(d、2H)、7.25(d、2H)、7.43(d、2H)、7.51(d、2H)、7.71(d、2H)、8.18(d、2H)
4.7 g of intermediate (A-1c) was added to a three-neck flask and dissolved in 30 mL of ethyl acetate. After cooling to 5°C, 3.8 g of triethylamine was added, followed by dropwise addition of 3.9 g of acetyl chloride over 10 minutes. After stirring at room temperature for 2 hours, the resulting reaction solution was washed with water and the organic layer was concentrated. The concentrate was dissolved in 10 mL of 2-methoxypropanol and crystallized from 100 mL of isopropyl alcohol, yielding 3.9 g of compound (A-1).
1 HNMR ( CDCl3 ): 2.20 (s, 3H), 2.33 (s, 3H), 3.11 (s, 3H), 7.16 (d, 2H), 7.25 (d, 2H), 7.43 (d, 2H), 7.51 (d, 2H), 7.71 (d, 2H), 8.18 (d, 2H)

(合成例2) 化合物A-2の合成
 化合物(A-1)の合成において、ジフェニルエーテルをジフェニルスルフィドに変更し、4-(t-ブトキシ)安息香酸を3-(t-ブトキシ)安息香酸に変更し、プロピオニルクロリドをn-オクタノイルクロリドに変更し、塩化アセチルをプロピオニルクロリドに変更した以外は同様の方法で化合物(A-2)を得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):0.88(t、3H)、1.16(m、6H)、1.3-1.6(m、8H)、2.11(t、2H)、2.55(m、4H)、7.4-7.8(m、12H)
Synthesis Example 2 Synthesis of Compound A-2 Compound (A-2) was obtained in the same manner as in the synthesis of compound (A-1), except that diphenyl ether was changed to diphenyl sulfide, 4-(t-butoxy)benzoic acid was changed to 3-(t-butoxy)benzoic acid, propionyl chloride was changed to n-octanoyl chloride, and acetyl chloride was changed to propionyl chloride.
1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 0.88 (t, 3H), 1.16 (m, 6H), 1.3-1.6 (m, 8H), 2.11 (t, 2H), 2.55 (m, 4H), 7.4-7.8 (m, 12H)

(合成例3) 化合物A-54の合成
 化合物(A-1)の合成において、ジフェニルエーテルをジベンゾフランに変更し、プロピオニルクロリドを3-シクロペンチルプロピオニルクロリドに変更した以外は同様の方法で化合物(A-54)を得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):1.2-2.0(m、9H)、2.05(d、2H)、2.20(s、3H)、2.31(s、3H)、7.4-8.2(m、10H)
Synthesis Example 3 Synthesis of Compound A-54 Compound (A-54) was obtained in the same manner as in the synthesis of compound (A-1), except that diphenyl ether was changed to dibenzofuran and propionyl chloride was changed to 3-cyclopentylpropionyl chloride.
1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 1.2-2.0 (m, 9H), 2.05 (d, 2H), 2.20 (s, 3H), 2.31 (s, 3H), 7.4-8.2 (m, 10H)

(合成例4) 化合物A-63の合成
 化合物(A-2)の合成において、ジフェニルスルフィドをジベンゾチオフェンに変更し、3-(t-ブトキシ)安息香酸を4-(t-ブトキシ)ナフタレンカルボン酸に変更した以外は同様の方法で化合物(A-63)を得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):0.78(t、3H)、1.2-1.6(m、8H)、1.76(m、2H)、2.15(t、2H)、2.22(s、3H)、2.37(s、3H)、6.79(d、1H)、7.0-8.5(m、10H)、9.05(d、1H)
Synthesis Example 4 Synthesis of Compound A-63 Compound (A-63) was obtained in the same manner as in the synthesis of compound (A-2), except that diphenyl sulfide was changed to dibenzothiophene and 3-(t-butoxy)benzoic acid was changed to 4-(t-butoxy)naphthalenecarboxylic acid.
1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 0.78 (t, 3H), 1.2-1.6 (m, 8H), 1.76 (m, 2H), 2.15 (t, 2H), 2.22 (s, 3H), 2.37 (s, 3H), 6.79 (d, 1H), 7.0-8.5 (m, 10H), 9.05 (d, 1H)

(合成例5) 化合物A-95の合成
 化合物(A-1)の合成において、ジフェニルエーテルを9.9―ジプロピルフルオレンに変更し、プロピオニルクロリドを5-メチルヘキサノイルクロリドに変更した以外は同様の方法で化合物(A-95)を得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):0.89(t、6H)、0.91(d、6H)、1.2-1.6(m、7H)、1.83(d、2H)、2.11(d、2H)、2.17(s、3H)、2.28(s、3H)、7.4-8.2(m、10H)
Synthesis Example 5 Synthesis of Compound A-95 Compound (A-95) was obtained in the same manner as in the synthesis of compound (A-1), except that diphenyl ether was changed to 9,9-dipropylfluorene and propionyl chloride was changed to 5-methylhexanoyl chloride.
1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 0.89 (t, 6H), 0.91 (d, 6H), 1.2-1.6 (m, 7H), 1.83 (d, 2H), 2.11 (d, 2H), 2.17 (s, 3H), 2.28 (s, 3H), 7.4-8.2 (m, 10H)

(合成例6) 化合物A-142の合成
 化合物(A-54)の合成において、ジベンゾフランを(4-(1H-インドール-1-イル)-2-メチルフェニル)(ジベンゾ[b,d]フラン-2-イル)メタノンに変更したこと以外は同様の方法で化合物(A-142)を得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):1.3-1.9(m、9H)、2.02(d、2H)、2.25(s、3H)、2.43(s、3H),2.52(s、3H)、7.0-8.3(m、17H)、8.76(d、1H)
Synthesis Example 6 Synthesis of Compound A-142 Compound (A-142) was obtained in the same manner as in the synthesis of compound (A-54), except that dibenzofuran was changed to (4-(1H-indol-1-yl)-2-methylphenyl)(dibenzo[b,d]furan-2-yl)methanone.
1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 1.3-1.9 (m, 9H), 2.02 (d, 2H), 2.25 (s, 3H), 2.43 (s, 3H), 2.52 (s, 3H), 7.0-8.3 (m, 17H), 8.76 (d, 1H)

(合成例7) 化合物A-177の合成
 化合物(A-142)の合成において、(4-(1H-インドール-1-イル)-2-メチルフェニル)(ジベンゾ[b,d]フラン-2-イル)メタノンを、(4-(1H-インドール-1-イル)-2-メチルフェニル)(4-((2-エチルヘキシル)(フェニル)アミノフェニル)メタノンに変更したこと以外は同様の方法で化合物(A-177)を得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):0.88(t、3H)、0.95(t、3H)、1.2-1.8(m、9H)、2.21(d,3H)、2.33(d、3H)、2.45(s、3H)、2.53(t、2H)、3.15(t、2H)、3.18(d、2H)、7.2-8.5(m、24H)
Synthesis Example 7 Synthesis of Compound A-177 Compound (A-177) was obtained in the same manner as in the synthesis of compound (A-142), except that (4-(1H-indol-1-yl)-2-methylphenyl)(dibenzo[b,d]furan-2-yl)methanone was changed to (4-(1H-indol-1-yl)-2-methylphenyl)(4-((2-ethylhexyl)(phenyl)aminophenyl)methanone.
1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 0.88 (t, 3H), 0.95 (t, 3H), 1.2-1.8 (m, 9H), 2.21 (d, 3H), 2.33 (d, 3H) , 2.45 (s, 3H), 2.53 (t, 2H), 3.15 (t, 2H), 3.18 (d, 2H), 7.2-8.5 (m, 24H)

(合成例8) 化合物A-245の合成
 三口フラスコにジフェニルスルフィド18.4gを加え、クロロベンゼン100mLに溶解させた。これを5℃に冷却したのち、塩化アルミニウム14.3gを加え、引き続き4-(t-ブトキシ)安息香酸クロリド21.5gを10分かけて滴下した。この反応液を25℃に昇温し2時間さらに攪拌した。次に再び反応液を5℃に冷却し塩化アルミニウム17.1gを加え、引き続き3-シクロペンチルプロパノイルクロリド16.5gを10分かけて滴下した。この反応液を25℃に昇温し2時間さらに攪拌した。得られた反応液を氷水100mLに加え、酢酸エチル200mLで抽出し、有機層を濃縮して中間体(A-245a)35.0gを得た。
Synthesis Example 8 Synthesis of Compound A-245 18.4 g of diphenyl sulfide was added to a three-neck flask and dissolved in 100 mL of chlorobenzene. After cooling to 5°C, 14.3 g of aluminum chloride was added, followed by the dropwise addition of 21.5 g of 4-(t-butoxy)benzoic acid chloride over 10 minutes. The reaction solution was heated to 25°C and stirred for an additional 2 hours. Next, the reaction solution was cooled again to 5°C, and 17.1 g of aluminum chloride was added, followed by the dropwise addition of 16.5 g of 3-cyclopentylpropanoyl chloride over 10 minutes. The reaction solution was heated to 25°C and stirred for an additional 2 hours. The resulting reaction solution was added to 100 mL of ice water and extracted with 200 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer was concentrated to obtain 35.0 g of intermediate (A-245a).

 中間体(A-245a)35.0gをトルエン100mLに溶解し、トリフルオロメタンメタンスルホン酸30mLを加えて60℃で5時間加熱攪拌し、tert-ブチル基を脱保護した。得られた反応液を酢酸エチルと水で洗浄し有機層を濃縮したのちメタノールを加えて結晶を析出させて中間体(A-245b)を27.5g得た。
35.0 g of intermediate (A-245a) was dissolved in 100 mL of toluene, 30 mL of trifluoromethanemethanesulfonic acid was added, and the mixture was heated and stirred at 60°C for 5 hours to deprotect the tert-butyl group. The resulting reaction solution was washed with ethyl acetate and water, and the organic layer was concentrated, and then methanol was added to precipitate crystals, yielding 27.5 g of intermediate (A-245b).

 3つ口フラスコに中間体(A-245b)21.5g加え、ピリジン100mLに溶解させた。これにヒドロキシルアミン塩酸塩15.0gを加え、25℃で10時間攪拌した。得られた反応液をイソプロピルアルコール200mLと1M塩酸水溶液200mLに加え、得られた固体をろ取した。この粗体をアセトニトリルから再結晶して中間体(A-245c)を20.5gで得た。
21.5 g of intermediate (A-245b) was placed in a three-neck flask and dissolved in 100 mL of pyridine. 15.0 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride was added to this, and the mixture was stirred at 25°C for 10 hours. The resulting reaction solution was added to 200 mL of isopropyl alcohol and 200 mL of 1 M aqueous hydrochloric acid solution, and the resulting solid was collected by filtration. This crude product was recrystallized from acetonitrile to obtain 20.5 g of intermediate (A-245c).

 3つ口フラスコに中間体(A-245c)11.2g加え、酢酸エチル100mLに溶解させて5℃に冷却した。これにトリエチルアミン8.5g加え、塩化アセチル6.6gを滴下した。反応液を25℃で2時間攪拌したのち、水で洗浄し有機層を濃縮した。濃縮物をシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィー(ヘキサン/酢酸エチル=8/1)で精製し、化合物(A-245)を7.5gで得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):1.2-1.8(m、11H)、2.11(s、3H)、2.42(s、3H)、2.75(t、2H)、7.3-7.9(m、12H)
11.2 g of intermediate (A-245c) was placed in a three-neck flask, dissolved in 100 mL of ethyl acetate, and cooled to 5°C. 8.5 g of triethylamine was added thereto, and 6.6 g of acetyl chloride was added dropwise. The reaction solution was stirred at 25°C for 2 hours, washed with water, and the organic layer was concentrated. The concentrate was purified by silica gel column chromatography (hexane/ethyl acetate = 8/1), yielding 7.5 g of compound (A-245).
1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 1.2-1.8 (m, 11H), 2.11 (s, 3H), 2.42 (s, 3H), 2.75 (t, 2H), 7.3-7.9 (m, 12H)

(合成例9) 化合物A-287の合成
 化合物(A-2)の合成において、塩化アセチルをオクタン二酸ジクロリドに変更した以外は同様の方法で化合物(A-287)を得た。
 HNMR(CDCl):0.85(t、6H)、1.2-1.8(m、24H)、2.11(t、4H)、2.22(s、6H)、2.52(t、4H)、7.2-7.8(m、24H)
Synthesis Example 9 Synthesis of Compound A-287 Compound (A-287) was obtained in the same manner as in the synthesis of compound (A-2), except that acetyl chloride was changed to octanedioic acid dichloride.
1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 0.85 (t, 6H), 1.2-1.8 (m, 24H), 2.11 (t, 4H), 2.22 (s, 6H), 2.52 (t, 4H), 7.2-7.8 (m, 24H)

<分散液の製造>
 下記表に記載の素材を混合して混合液を得た。得られた混合液を、循環型分散装置(ビーズミル)として寿工業株式会社製のウルトラアペックスミルを用いて分散処理を行い、分散液を製造した。なお、表の「種類」の欄に2種類以上の素材の記載がある場合は、各素材を等量用いた合計量を「質量部」の欄に記載した。
<Preparation of Dispersion>
The materials listed in the table below were mixed to obtain a mixture. The mixture was then dispersed using an Ultra Apex Mill manufactured by Kotobuki Industries Co., Ltd. as a circulating dispersion device (bead mill) to produce a dispersion. When two or more materials are listed in the "Type" column of the table, the total amount of each material used in equal amounts is listed in the "Parts by mass" column.

 上記表に記載の素材の詳細は以下の通りである。 Details of the materials listed in the table above are as follows:

(色材)
 PG36 : C.I.ピグメントグリーン36(緑色顔料)
 PG58 : C.I.ピグメントグリーン58(緑色顔料)
 PY129 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー129(黄色顔料)
 PY138 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー138(黄色顔料)
 PY139 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー139(黄色顔料)
 PY150 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー150(黄色顔料)
 PY185 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー185(黄色顔料)
 PY215 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー215(黄色顔料)
 PR177 : C.I.ピグメントレッド177(赤色顔料)
 PR254 : C.I.ピグメントレッド254(赤色顔料)
 PR264 : C.I.ピグメントレッド264(赤色顔料)
 PR272 : C.I.ピグメントレッド272(赤色顔料)
 PR291 : C.I.ピグメントレッド291(赤色顔料)
 PO71 : C.I.ピグメントオレンジ71(オレンジ色顔料)
 PB15:6 : C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6(青色顔料)
 PV23 : C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23(紫色顔料)
 P-1:下記構造の化合物(ピロロピロール化合物、赤外線吸収顔料)
 P-2:下記構造の化合物(スクアリリウム化合物、赤外線吸収顔料)
 P-3:チタンブラック(TiOxNy)(黒色顔料、三菱マテリアル(株)製)
 P-4:酸化チタン(白色顔料、TTO-51(C)、石原産業(株)製)
 P-5:下記構造の化合物(マゼンタ染料)
(Colorant)
PG36: C.I. Pigment Green 36 (green pigment)
PG58: C.I. Pigment Green 58 (green pigment)
PY129: C.I. Pigment Yellow 129 (yellow pigment)
PY138: C.I. Pigment Yellow 138 (yellow pigment)
PY139: C.I. Pigment Yellow 139 (yellow pigment)
PY150: C.I. Pigment Yellow 150 (yellow pigment)
PY185: C.I. Pigment Yellow 185 (yellow pigment)
PY215: C.I. Pigment Yellow 215 (yellow pigment)
PR177: C.I. Pigment Red 177 (red pigment)
PR254: C.I. Pigment Red 254 (red pigment)
PR264: C.I. Pigment Red 264 (red pigment)
PR272: C.I. Pigment Red 272 (red pigment)
PR291: C.I. Pigment Red 291 (red pigment)
PO71: C.I. Pigment Orange 71 (orange pigment)
PB15:6: C.I. Pigment Blue 15:6 (blue pigment)
PV23: C.I. Pigment Violet 23 (purple pigment)
P-1: Compound having the following structure (pyrrolopyrrole compound, infrared absorbing pigment)
P-2: Compound having the following structure (squarylium compound, infrared absorbing pigment)
P-3: Titanium black (TiOxNy) (black pigment, manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Corporation)
P-4: Titanium oxide (white pigment, TTO-51(C), manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Kaisha, Ltd.)
P-5: Compound having the following structure (magenta dye)

(分散助剤)
 Syn-1、Syn-2、Syn-4~Syn-7:下記構造の化合物
 Syn-3:下記構造の化合物(a/b/c=10/70/20(mol%)、重量平均分子量600)
(Dispersing aid)
Syn-1, Syn-2, Syn-4 to Syn-7: Compounds having the following structure Syn-3: Compound having the following structure (a/b/c=10/70/20 (mol %), weight average molecular weight 600)

(樹脂)
 C2-1:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量20000、酸価67mgKOH/g)
 C2-2:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量23000、酸価59mgKOH/g)
 C2-3:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量18000、酸価69mgKOH/g)
 C2-4:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量23000、酸価67mgKOH/g)
 C2-5:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量10000、酸価85mgKOH/g)
 C2-6:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量18000、酸価82mgKOH/g)
 C2-7:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量8000、酸価50mgKOH/g)
 C2-8:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量28000、酸価95mgKOH/g)
(resin)
C2-1: Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 20,000, acid value: 67 mgKOH/g)
C2-2: Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 23,000, acid value: 59 mg KOH/g)
C2-3: Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 18,000, acid value: 69 mg KOH/g)
C2-4: Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 23,000, acid value: 67 mg KOH/g)
C2-5: Resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 10,000, acid value 85 mgKOH/g)
C2-6: Resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 18,000, acid value 82 mgKOH/g)
C2-7: Resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 8000, acid value 50 mgKOH/g)
C2-8: Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 28,000, acid value: 95 mg KOH/g)

(溶剤)
 S-1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 S-2:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
 S-3:シクロペンタノン
 S-4:3-メトキシブタノール
(solvent)
S-1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
S-2: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
S-3: Cyclopentanone S-4: 3-methoxybutanol

<光硬化性組成物の製造>
 下記表に示す種類の素材と、界面活性剤としてKF-6001(信越化学工業(株)製)を0.2質量部と、酸化防止剤としてアデカスタブAO-80((株)ADEKA製)を0.2質量部と、重合禁止剤としてp-メトキシフェノールを0.01質量部とを混合して、光硬化性組成物を製造した。なお、表の「種類」の欄に2種類以上の素材の記載がある場合は、各素材を等量用いた合計量を「質量部」の欄に記載した。
<Production of Photocurable Composition>
Photocurable compositions were produced by mixing the types of materials shown in the table below with 0.2 parts by mass of KF-6001 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) as a surfactant, 0.2 parts by mass of Adekastab AO-80 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) as an antioxidant, and 0.01 parts by mass of p-methoxyphenol as a polymerization inhibitor. When two or more types of materials are listed in the "Type" column of the table, the total amount of each material used in equal amounts is listed in the "Parts by mass" column.

 上記表に記載の素材の詳細は以下の通りである。 Details of the materials listed in the table above are as follows:

(分散液)
 分散液R1~R12、G1~G12、B1~B7、IR1~IR7、Bk1~Bk4、Wh1:上述した分散液R1~R12、G1~G12、B1~B7、IR1~IR7、Bk1~Bk4、Wh1
(Dispersion liquid)
Dispersions R1 to R12, G1 to G12, B1 to B7, IR1 to IR7, Bk1 to Bk4, and Wh1: the above-mentioned dispersions R1 to R12, G1 to G12, B1 to B7, IR1 to IR7, Bk1 to Bk4, and Wh1

(樹脂)
 B-1:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量11000、酸価69mgKOH/g)
 B-2:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量21000)
 B-3:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量12000、酸価80mgKOH/g)
 B-4:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量26000、ポリアミック酸樹脂)
 B-5:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量25000、ポリイミド樹脂)
 B-6:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量27500、酸価2mgKOH/g、アミン価1mgKOH/g、イミド化率10%)
 B-7:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量24500、酸価4mgKOH/g、アミン価2mgKOH/g、イミド化率92%)
(resin)
B-1: Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 11,000; acid value: 69 mg KOH/g)
B-2: Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight-average molecular weight: 21,000)
B-3: Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 12,000; acid value: 80 mg KOH/g)
B-4: Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio; weight-average molecular weight: 26,000, polyamic acid resin)
B-5: Resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio; weight average molecular weight 25,000, polyimide resin)
B-6: Resin having the following structure (the numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight 27,500, acid value 2 mg KOH/g, amine value 1 mg KOH/g, imidization rate 10%)
B-7: Resin having the following structure (the numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight 24,500, acid value 4 mg KOH/g, amine value 2 mg KOH/g, imidization rate 92%)

(重合性化合物)
 M-1:下記構造の化合物の混合物(左側化合物(6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と右側化合物(5官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)とのモル比が7:3の混合物)
 M-2:下記構造の化合物
 M-3:下記構造の化合物
 M-4:下記構造の化合物
 M-5:下記構造の化合物
 M-6:CN9906NS(アルケマ社製、3級アミン構造を有する脂肪族多官能ウレタンアクリレート)(特開2024-119784号公報記載の化合物))
(Polymerizable compound)
M-1: A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture of the compound on the left (a hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) and the compound on the right (a pentafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) in a molar ratio of 7:3)
M-2: Compound of the following structure
M-3: Compound having the following structure
M-4: Compound having the following structure
M-5: Compound having the following structure
M-6: CN9906NS (manufactured by Arkema, an aliphatic polyfunctional urethane acrylate having a tertiary amine structure (compound described in JP 2024-119784 A)

(光重合開始剤)
 A-1~A-339:上述した特定化合物の具体例で示した化合物A-1~A-339
 cA-1、cA-2:下記構造の化合物(比較化合物)
 a-1~a-14:下記構造の化合物(他の光重合開始剤)
 a-15:TR-PBG-301、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-305、TR-PBG-309、TR-PBG-3054、TR-PBG-3057、TR-PBG-314、TR-PBG-327、TR-PBG-345、TR-PBG-346、TR-PBG-358、TR-PBG-365、TR-PBG-380およびTR-PBG-610(いずれもTRONLY社製)の14種等量混合物(他の光重合開始剤)
 a-16:NCI-730、NCI-831EおよびNCI-930(いずれも(株)ADEKA製)の3種等量混合物(他の光重合開始剤)
(Photopolymerization initiator)
A-1 to A-339: Compounds A-1 to A-339 shown as specific examples of the specific compounds described above
cA-1 and cA-2: Compounds having the following structures (comparative compounds)
a-1 to a-14: Compounds having the following structures (other photopolymerization initiators)
a-15: A mixture of 14 equal parts of TR-PBG-301, TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-305, TR-PBG-309, TR-PBG-3054, TR-PBG-3057, TR-PBG-314, TR-PBG-327, TR-PBG-345, TR-PBG-346, TR-PBG-358, TR-PBG-365, TR-PBG-380, and TR-PBG-610 (all manufactured by TRONLY) (another photopolymerization initiator)
a-16: A mixture of equal amounts of three types of NCI-730, NCI-831E, and NCI-930 (all manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) (another photopolymerization initiator)

(添加剤)
 T-1~T-8:下記構造の化合物
 T-9:熱重合開始剤(パーブチルC(過酸化物)(日油(株)製))と、熱塩基発生剤(U-CAT SA102(DBUのカルボン酸塩)(サンアプロ(株)製))と、防錆剤(ベンゾトリアゾール)と、光吸収剤(アデカスタブAO-80(ADEKA(株)製))と、重合禁止剤(ジ-tブチルヒドロキシトルエン(BHT))の等量混合物
(Additives)
T-1 to T-8: Compounds having the following structure. T-9: A mixture of equal amounts of a thermal polymerization initiator (Perbutyl C (peroxide) (manufactured by NOF Corporation)), a thermal base generator (U-CAT SA102 (carboxylic acid salt of DBU) (manufactured by San-Apro Co., Ltd.)), a rust inhibitor (benzotriazole), a light absorber (ADK STAB AO-80 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation)), and a polymerization inhibitor (di-t-butylhydroxytoluene (BHT)).

(溶剤)
 S-1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 S-2:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
 S-5:シクロヘキサノン
 S-6:3-メトキシプロパノール
 S-7:γ-バレロラクトン
 S-8:N-エチルピロリドン
(solvent)
S-1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
S-2: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
S-5: Cyclohexanone S-6: 3-Methoxypropanol S-7: γ-valerolactone S-8: N-Ethylpyrrolidone

<露光照度依存性>
 8インチ(20.32cm)シリコンウエハに、下地層形成用組成物(CT-4000L、富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)をポストベーク後に厚さが0.1μmになるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、ホットプレートを用いて220℃で300秒間加熱して下地層を形成し、下地層付シリコンウエハを得た。
 上記で得られた各光硬化性組成物を、塗布後の膜厚が0.6μmになるように、下地層付シリコンウエハの下地層上にスピンコート法で塗布し、その後ホットプレートを用いて110℃で2分間加熱して組成物層を形成した。
 次いで、得られた組成物層に対し、i線ステッパー露光機を用い、0.45μm四方のパターンを有するマスクを介して、波長365nmの光(i線)を、照度20000W/m、露光量20~300mJ/cmの露光条件(露光条件1)、または、照度2000W/cm、露光量20~300mJ/cmの露光条件(露光条件2)で照射して露光した。
 次いで、露光後の組成物層に対し、現像液として水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3質量%水溶液を用いて、23℃で60秒間シャワー現像を行った。その後、パターン表面に付着した水滴をエアーで除去し、パターンを自然乾燥させて、パターン(画素)を形成した。画素が形成されたシリコンウエハについて、走査型電子顕微鏡(S-4800H、(株)日立ハイテク製)を用いて、倍率20000倍で観察した。観察した画素において、パターン線幅が0.5μmに達するのに必要な露光量を算出した。
 露光条件1にて露光した際におけるパターン線幅が0.5μmに達するのに必要な露光量Eaと、露光条件2にて露光した際におけるパターン線幅が0.5μmに達するのに必要な露光量Ebとの比(Ea/Eb)を算出し、以下の基準で露光照度依存性を評価した。Ea/Ebの値が1に近いほど、露光量の露光照度依存性が小さいことを意味する。
 -評価基準-
 A:Ea/Ebが0.95以上1.05未満である
 B:Ea/Ebが0.90以上0.95未満、または、1.05以上1.10未満である
 C:Ea/Ebが0.80以上0.90未満、または、1.10以上1.20未満である
 D:Ea/Ebが0.70以上0.80未満、または、1.20以上1.30未満である
 E:Ea/Ebが0.70未満、または、1.30以上である
<Dependence on exposure illuminance>
An underlayer-forming composition (CT-4000L, manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.) was applied to an 8-inch (20.32 cm) silicon wafer using a spin coater so that the thickness after post-baking would be 0.1 μm, and the wafer was heated at 220° C. for 300 seconds using a hot plate to form an underlayer, thereby obtaining a silicon wafer with an underlayer.
Each of the photocurable compositions obtained above was applied by spin coating onto the underlayer of a silicon wafer with an underlayer so that the film thickness after application would be 0.6 μm, and then heated using a hot plate at 110° C. for 2 minutes to form a composition layer.
Next, the obtained composition layer was exposed to light (i-line) having a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask having a 0.45 μm square pattern using an i-line stepper exposure machine under exposure conditions of an illuminance of 20,000 W/m 2 and an exposure dose of 20 to 300 mJ/cm 2 (exposure condition 1), or an illuminance of 2,000 W/cm 2 and an exposure dose of 20 to 300 mJ/cm 2 (exposure condition 2).
Next, the exposed composition layer was subjected to shower development at 23°C for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) as a developer. Thereafter, water droplets adhering to the pattern surface were removed with air, and the pattern was allowed to dry naturally to form a pattern (pixels). The silicon wafer on which pixels had been formed was observed at a magnification of 20,000 times using a scanning electron microscope (S-4800H, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Corporation). The exposure dose required for the observed pixels to reach a pattern line width of 0.5 µm was calculated.
The ratio (Ea/Eb) of the exposure dose Ea required for the pattern line width to reach 0.5 μm when exposed under exposure condition 1 to the exposure dose Eb required for the pattern line width to reach 0.5 μm when exposed under exposure condition 2 was calculated, and the exposure illuminance dependency was evaluated according to the following criteria: The closer the value of Ea/Eb is to 1, the smaller the exposure illuminance dependency of the exposure dose is.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: Ea/Eb is 0.95 or more and less than 1.05. B: Ea/Eb is 0.90 or more and less than 0.95, or 1.05 or more and less than 1.10. C: Ea/Eb is 0.80 or more and less than 0.90, or 1.10 or more and less than 1.20. D: Ea/Eb is 0.70 or more and less than 0.80, or 1.20 or more and less than 1.30. E: Ea/Eb is less than 0.70, or 1.30 or more.

<現像性>
 上記で得られた各光硬化性組成物を、塗布後の膜厚が0.6μmになるように、上記下地層付シリコンウエハの下地層上にスピンコート法で塗布し、その後ホットプレートを用いて110℃で2分間加熱して組成物層を形成した。次いで、得られた組成物層に対し、i線ステッパー露光機を用い、0.45μm四方のパターンを有するマスクを介して波長365nmの光(i線)を、照度20000W/m、上記露光量Eaにて照射し、露光を行った。次いで、露光後の組成物層に対し、現像液として水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3質量%水溶液(現像液1)または水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.03質量%水溶液(現像液2)を用いて、23℃で60秒間シャワー現像を行った。その後、パターン表面に付着した水滴をエアーで除去し、パターンを自然乾燥させて、パターン(画素)を形成した。画素が形成されたシリコンウエハについて、走査型電子顕微鏡(S-4800H、(株)日立ハイテク製)を用いて、倍率20000倍で観察した。観察した画素において、残渣の面積率(%)(残渣の面積率=パターン開口部に占める残渣部分の面積を白黒で算出するソフトで計算)を算出した。現像液1を用いて形成した際における残渣の面積率Zaと、現像液2を用いて形成した際における残渣の面積率Zbとの比(Za/Zb)を算出し、以下の基準で現像性を評価した。Za/Zbが1に近いほど、現像液の濃度依存性が小さく、現像性に優れることを意味する。
-評価基準-
 A:Za/Zbが0.95以上1.05未満である
 B:Za/Zbが0.90以上0.95未満、または、1.05以上1.10未満である
 C:Za/Zbが0.80以上0.90未満、または、1.10以上1.20未満である
 D:Za/Zbが0.70以上0.80未満、または、1.20以上1.30未満である
 E:Za/Zbが0.70未満、または、1.30以上である
<Developability>
Each photocurable composition obtained above was spin-coated onto the underlayer of the underlayer-equipped silicon wafer so that the film thickness after coating was 0.6 μm, and then heated at 110° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to form a composition layer. Next, the resulting composition layer was exposed to light (i-line) with a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask having a 0.45 μm square pattern using an i-line stepper exposure machine at an illuminance of 20,000 W/m 2 and the above-mentioned exposure amount Ea. Next, the exposed composition layer was shower-developed for 60 seconds at 23° C. using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) (Developer 1) or a 0.03% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) (Developer 2) as the developer. Water droplets adhering to the pattern surface were then removed with air, and the pattern was allowed to dry naturally to form a pattern (pixel). The silicon wafer on which pixels were formed was observed at a magnification of 20,000 times using a scanning electron microscope (S-4800H, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Corporation). For the observed pixels, the residue area ratio (%) (residue area ratio = calculated using software that calculates the area of the residue portion in the pattern opening in black and white) was calculated. The ratio (Za/Zb) of the residue area ratio Za when formed using developer 1 to the residue area ratio Zb when formed using developer 2 was calculated, and the developability was evaluated according to the following criteria. The closer Za/Zb is to 1, the smaller the developer concentration dependency and the more excellent the developability.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: Za/Zb is 0.95 or more and less than 1.05. B: Za/Zb is 0.90 or more and less than 0.95, or 1.05 or more and less than 1.10. C: Za/Zb is 0.80 or more and less than 0.90, or 1.10 or more and less than 1.20. D: Za/Zb is 0.70 or more and less than 0.80, or 1.20 or more and less than 1.30. E: Za/Zb is less than 0.70, or 1.30 or more.

<感度>
 上記で得られた各光硬化性組成物を、塗布後の膜厚が0.6μmになるように、上記下地層付シリコンウエハの下地層上にスピンコート法で塗布し、その後ホットプレートを用いて110℃で2分間加熱して組成物層を形成した。次いで、得られた組成物層に対し、i線ステッパー露光機を用い、0.45μm四方のパターンを有するマスクを介して波長365nmの光(i線)を、照度2000W/m、露光量20~300mJ/cmの範囲で変えて照射し、露光を行った。次いで、露光後の組成物層に対し、現像液として水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3質量%水溶液を用いて、23℃で60秒間シャワー現像を行った。その後、パターン表面に付着した水滴をエアーで除去し、パターンを自然乾燥させて、パターン(画素)を形成した。画素が形成されたシリコンウエハについて、走査型電子顕微鏡(S-4800H、(株)日立ハイテク製)を用いて、倍率20000倍で観察した。観察した画素において、パターン線幅が0.5μmに達するのに必要な露光量Eaを算出した。
-評価基準-
 A:Eaが100mJ/cm未満である
 B:Eaが100mJ/cm以上200mJ/cm未満である
 C:Eaが200mJ/cm以上500mJ/cm未満である
 D:Eaが500mJ/cm以上1000mJ/cm未満である
 E:Eaが1000mJ/cm以上である
<Sensitivity>
Each photocurable composition obtained above was applied by spin coating onto the underlayer of the underlayer-equipped silicon wafer so that the film thickness after application was 0.6 μm, and then heated at 110°C for 2 minutes using a hot plate to form a composition layer. Next, the resulting composition layer was exposed to light (i-line) with a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask having a 0.45 μm square pattern using an i-line stepper exposure machine, with the illuminance being 2000 W/ m2 and the exposure dose varying within the range of 20 to 300 mJ/ cm2 . The exposed composition layer was then shower-developed for 60 seconds at 23°C using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) as the developer. Water droplets adhering to the pattern surface were then removed with air, and the pattern was allowed to dry naturally to form a pattern (pixels). The silicon wafer with the formed pixels was observed at 20,000x magnification using a scanning electron microscope (S-4800H, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Corporation). In the observed pixel, the exposure dose Ea required for the pattern line width to reach 0.5 μm was calculated.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: Ea is less than 100 mJ/cm 2 B: Ea is 100 mJ/cm 2 or more and less than 200 mJ/cm 2 C: Ea is 200 mJ/cm 2 or more and less than 500 mJ/cm 2 D: Ea is 500 mJ/cm 2 or more and less than 1000 mJ/cm 2 E: Ea is 1000 mJ/cm 2 or more

 上記表に示すように、実施例は、露光照度依存性の小さいものであった。 As shown in the table above, the examples showed little dependence on exposure illuminance.

Claims (16)

 光重合開始剤と、重合性化合物とを含有する光硬化性組成物であって、
 前記光重合開始剤は、式(1-A)または式(1-B)で表される化合物を含む、光硬化性組成物;
 式(1-A)中、X1aは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基またはNRy1y2-を表し、Ry1はアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry2は水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry1とRy2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよく、
 Ar1aは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2aはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 naは0または1を表し、
 maは0または1を表し、
 sは1~3の整数を表す;
 式(1-B)中、X1bは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1bはt価の連結基を表し、
 Ar1bは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1bはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2bはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 nbは0または1を表し、
 mbは0または1を表し、
 tは2~4の整数を表す;
 式(X1-1)中、*は結合手を表し、
 X11およびX12は、それぞれ独立して芳香族炭化水素基を表し、
 L11およびL12はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-または-CO-を表し、RL1~RL3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、L11とL12は同時に単結合ではなく、
 L13は単結合または-CO-を表し、
 X13は単結合を表すか、または、ピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基を表し、X13が単結合の場合は、L13は単結合であり、
 aは0または1を表し、aが0の場合、L11は存在しない;
 ただし、L13およびX13が単結合で、X11およびX12がベンゼン環基で、L12が-NRL1-の場合、aは0であるか、または、aが1で、かつ、L11が、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-もしくは-CO-である。
A photocurable composition containing a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound,
The photopolymerization initiator is a photocurable composition containing a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B);
In formula (1-A), X 1a represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —, R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
Ar 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R2a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
na represents 0 or 1;
ma represents 0 or 1;
s represents an integer of 1 to 3;
In formula (1-B), X 1b represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1b represents a t-valent linking group;
Ar 1b represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R 2b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
nb represents 0 or 1;
mb represents 0 or 1;
t represents an integer of 2 to 4;
In formula (X1-1), * represents a bond.
X11 and X12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group;
L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —S—, —NR L1 —, —CR L2 R L3 —, or —CO—; R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group; L 11 and L 12 are not simultaneously single bonds;
L13 represents a single bond or —CO—;
X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond;
a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L 11 is absent;
However, when L 13 and X 13 are single bonds, X 11 and X 12 are benzene ring groups, and L 12 is -NR L1 -, a is 0, or a is 1 and L 11 is -O-, -S-, -NR L1 -, -CR L2 R L3 -, or -CO-.
 前記式(1-A)のnaは1であり、前記式(1-B)のnbは1である、請求項1に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 1, wherein na in formula (1-A) is 1 and nb in formula (1-B) is 1.  前記式(1-A)のR2a、および、前記式(1-B)のR2bは、それぞれ独立して式(Z-1)で表される基である、請求項1または2に記載の光硬化性組成物;
 式(Z-1)中、*は結合手を表し、
 LZ1は単結合またはアルキレン基を表し、
 LZ2~LZ4は、それぞれ独立して、-CRLZ1LZ2-、-O-、-S-または-NRLZ3-を表し、RLZ1~RLZ3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 RZ1およびRZ2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、RZ1とRZ2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよい;
 ただし、LZ2~LZ4のうち少なくとも2つは-CRLZ1LZ2-である。
The photocurable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein R 2a in formula (1-A) and R 2b in formula (1-B) are each independently a group represented by formula (Z-1).
In formula (Z-1), * represents a bond.
L Z1 represents a single bond or an alkylene group;
L Z2 to L Z4 each independently represent —CR LZ1 R LZ2 —, —O—, —S— or —NR LZ3 —, and R LZ1 to R LZ3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group;
R Z1 and R Z2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R Z1 and R Z2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
However, at least two of L Z2 to L Z4 are -CR LZ1 R LZ2 -.
 前記式(1-A)のR2a、および、前記式(1-B)のR2bは、それぞれ独立して式(Z-2)で表される基である、請求項1または2に記載の光硬化性組成物;
 式(Z-2)中、*は結合手を表し、
 LZ11は単結合または炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、
 RZ11~RZ14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、
 LZ11は、RZ11またはRZ12と結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 LZ12は、-(CRLZ11LZ12-を表し、RLZ11およびRLZ12は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、pは1~5の整数を表す。
The photocurable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein R 2a in formula (1-A) and R 2b in formula (1-B) are each independently a group represented by formula (Z-2).
In formula (Z-2), * represents a bond.
L Z11 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R Z11 to R Z14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
L Z11 may be bonded to R Z11 or R Z12 to form a ring;
L Z12 represents —(CR LZ11 R LZ12 ) p —, R LZ11 and R LZ12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and p represents an integer of 1 to 5.
 更に、色材を含む、請求項1または2に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a colorant.  更に、樹脂を含む、請求項1または2に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a resin.  前記樹脂は、架橋性基を有する樹脂を含む、請求項6に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 6, wherein the resin includes a resin having a crosslinkable group.  前記樹脂は、グラフト樹脂を含む、請求項6に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 6, wherein the resin includes a graft resin.  前記樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミック酸樹脂およびポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、請求項6に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 6, wherein the resin includes at least one selected from the group consisting of (meth)acrylic resin, polyester resin, polyurethane resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, polyamic acid resin, and polybenzoxazole resin.  前記樹脂は、式(B-1)で表される部分構造、及び、式(B-2)で表される部分構造の少なくとも一方を有する、請求項6に記載の光硬化性組成物;
 式(B-1)中、XB1は4+m価の有機基を表し、YB1は2+n価の有機基を表し、RB1およびRB2はそれぞれ独立して重合性基を含む基を表し、nは0~6の整数を表し、mは0~6の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である;
 式(B-2)中、XB1は4+m価の有機基を表し、YB1は2+n価の有機基を表し、Ax1およびAx2はそれぞれ独立して1価の有機基を表し、RB1およびRB2はそれぞれ独立して重合性基を含む基を表し、nは0~6の整数を表し、mは0~6の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数であり、ただし、Ax1及びAx2の少なくとも一方が重合性基を有する場合は、n+mは0であってもよい。
The photocurable composition according to claim 6, wherein the resin has at least one of a partial structure represented by formula (B-1) and a partial structure represented by formula (B-2):
In formula (B-1), X represents a 4+m-valent organic group, Y represents a 2+n-valent organic group, R and R each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group, n represents an integer of 0 to 6, m represents an integer of 0 to 6, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more;
In formula (B-2), X represents a 4+m-valent organic group, Y represents a 2 +n-valent organic group, A and A each independently represent a monovalent organic group, R and R each independently represent a group containing a polymerizable group, n represents an integer of 0 to 6, m represents an integer of 0 to 6, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more, provided that when at least one of A and A has a polymerizable group, n+m may be 0.
 更に、連鎖移動剤を含む、請求項1または2に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a chain transfer agent.  請求項1または2に記載の光硬化性組成物を用いて支持体上に組成物層を形成する工程と、
 前記組成物層に波長150~400nmの光を照射してパターン状に露光する工程と、
 前記組成物層の未露光部を現像除去する工程と、を含む、画素の製造方法。
forming a composition layer on a support using the photocurable composition according to claim 1 or 2;
a step of patternwise exposing the composition layer to light having a wavelength of 150 to 400 nm;
and developing and removing the unexposed portion of the composition layer.
 請求項1または2に記載の光硬化性組成物を硬化して得られる膜。 A film obtained by curing the photocurable composition described in claim 1 or 2.  請求項13に記載の膜を含む固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device comprising the film described in claim 13.  請求項13に記載の膜を含む画像表示装置。 An image display device comprising the film described in claim 13.  式(1-A)または式(1-B)で表される化合物を含む光重合開始剤;
 式(1-A)中、X1aは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基またはNRy1y2-を表し、Ry1はアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry2は水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、Ry1とRy2は単結合または連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよく、
 Ar1aは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1aはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2aはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 naは0または1を表し、
 maは0または1を表し、
 sは1~3の整数を表す;
 式(1-B)中、X1bは式(X1-1)で表される基を表し、
 Y1bはt価の連結基を表し、
 Ar1bは芳香族炭化水素基または芳香族複素環基を表し、
 R1bはアルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基またはヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 R2bはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 nbは0または1を表し、
 mbは0または1を表し、
 tは2~4の整数を表す;
 式(X1-1)中、*は結合手を表し、
 X11およびX12は、それぞれ独立して芳香族炭化水素基を表し、
 L11およびL12はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-または-CO-を表し、RL1~RL3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、L11とL12は同時に単結合ではなく、
 L13は単結合または-CO-を表し、
 X13は単結合を表すか、または、ピロール環もしくはインドール環を有する基を表し、X13が単結合の場合は、L13は単結合であり、
 aは0または1を表し、aが0の場合、L11は存在しない;
 ただし、L13およびX13が単結合で、X11およびX12がベンゼン環基で、L12が-NRL1-の場合、aは0であるか、または、aが1で、かつ、L11が、-O-、-S-、-NRL1-、-CRL2L3-もしくは-CO-である。
a photopolymerization initiator containing a compound represented by formula (1-A) or formula (1-B);
In formula (1-A), X 1a represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, or NR y1 R y2 —, R y1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R y1 and R y2 may be bonded to each other via a single bond or a linking group to form a ring;
Ar 1a represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R2a represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
na represents 0 or 1;
ma represents 0 or 1;
s represents an integer of 1 to 3;
In formula (1-B), X 1b represents a group represented by formula (X1-1):
Y 1b represents a t-valent linking group;
Ar 1b represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group;
R 1b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
R 2b represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
nb represents 0 or 1;
mb represents 0 or 1;
t represents an integer of 2 to 4;
In formula (X1-1), * represents a bond.
X11 and X12 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group;
L 11 and L 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —S—, —NR L1 —, —CR L2 R L3 —, or —CO—; R L1 to R L3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group; L 11 and L 12 are not simultaneously single bonds;
L13 represents a single bond or —CO—;
X 13 represents a single bond or a group having a pyrrole ring or an indole ring, and when X 13 is a single bond, L 13 is a single bond;
a represents 0 or 1, and when a is 0, L 11 is absent;
However, when L 13 and X 13 are single bonds, X 11 and X 12 are benzene ring groups, and L 12 is -NR L1 -, a is 0, or a is 1 and L 11 is -O-, -S-, -NR L1 -, -CR L2 R L3 -, or -CO-.
PCT/JP2025/014108 2024-04-23 2025-04-09 Photocurable composition, pixel production method, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator Pending WO2025225376A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2024069947 2024-04-23
JP2024-069947 2024-04-23

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025225376A1 true WO2025225376A1 (en) 2025-10-30

Family

ID=97489953

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2025/014108 Pending WO2025225376A1 (en) 2024-04-23 2025-04-09 Photocurable composition, pixel production method, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025225376A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011525480A (en) * 2008-06-06 2011-09-22 ビーエーエスエフ ソシエタス・ヨーロピア Oxime ester photoinitiator
JP2023517304A (en) * 2020-03-04 2023-04-25 ベーアーエスエフ・エスエー oxime ester photoinitiator
JP7442004B1 (en) * 2023-03-01 2024-03-01 artience株式会社 Photosensitive composition, film using the same, optical filter, solid-state image sensor, image display device, and infrared sensor

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011525480A (en) * 2008-06-06 2011-09-22 ビーエーエスエフ ソシエタス・ヨーロピア Oxime ester photoinitiator
JP2023517304A (en) * 2020-03-04 2023-04-25 ベーアーエスエフ・エスエー oxime ester photoinitiator
JP7442004B1 (en) * 2023-03-01 2024-03-01 artience株式会社 Photosensitive composition, film using the same, optical filter, solid-state image sensor, image display device, and infrared sensor

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021020360A1 (en) Colored resin composition, film, color filter, solid state imaging device and image display device
WO2024004619A1 (en) Curable composition, method for producing cured product, film, optical element, image sensor, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and radical polymerization initiator
WO2024190447A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP2025063188A (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and asymmetric diketopyrrolopyrrole compound
TW202231790A (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
JP7147044B2 (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7163481B2 (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
TW202231789A (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2025225376A1 (en) Photocurable composition, pixel production method, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
WO2025225377A1 (en) Photocurable composition, pixel production method, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
KR20240075890A (en) Curable composition, method for producing a cured product, film, optical element, image sensor, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and radical polymerization initiator
JP7752627B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, optical sensor and display device
WO2025164315A1 (en) Photocurable composition, method for producing pixel, film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
WO2025164316A1 (en) Photocurable composition, pixel manufacturing method, film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
WO2025041644A1 (en) Curable composition, method for producing pixel, film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, compound, and photosensitizer
JP2025139790A (en) Photocurable composition, pixel manufacturing method, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
WO2025110008A1 (en) Curable composition, method for producing pixel, film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
WO2025110009A1 (en) Curable composition, method for producing pixel, film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
WO2025094724A1 (en) Curable composition, method for producing pixel, film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
WO2025192264A1 (en) Curable composition, film, optical filter, optical sensor, and image display device
JP2025128466A (en) Photocurable composition, method for producing pixel, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and photopolymerization initiator
WO2025033225A1 (en) Curable composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2024111393A1 (en) Curable composition, method for producing cured article, film, optical element, image sensor, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and radical polymerization initiator
WO2025033226A1 (en) Method for manufacturing optical filter, photosensitive composition, and compound
WO2025220511A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25794033

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1